WO2022168627A1 - Layered body and method for producing same - Google Patents

Layered body and method for producing same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022168627A1
WO2022168627A1 PCT/JP2022/002091 JP2022002091W WO2022168627A1 WO 2022168627 A1 WO2022168627 A1 WO 2022168627A1 JP 2022002091 W JP2022002091 W JP 2022002091W WO 2022168627 A1 WO2022168627 A1 WO 2022168627A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
different
carbon atoms
independently
integer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2022/002091
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
友宏 伊藤
彩香 櫻井
知典 宮本
Original Assignee
住友化学株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 住友化学株式会社 filed Critical 住友化学株式会社
Publication of WO2022168627A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022168627A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/30Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin comprising vinyl (co)polymers; comprising acrylic (co)polymers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B33/00Layered products characterised by particular properties or particular surface features, e.g. particular surface coatings; Layered products designed for particular purposes not covered by another single class
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G77/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming a linkage containing silicon with or without sulfur, nitrogen, oxygen or carbon in the main chain of the macromolecule
    • C08G77/42Block-or graft-polymers containing polysiloxane sequences
    • C08G77/46Block-or graft-polymers containing polysiloxane sequences containing polyether sequences
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09KMATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K3/00Materials not provided for elsewhere
    • C09K3/18Materials not provided for elsewhere for application to surfaces to minimize adherence of ice, mist or water thereto; Thawing or antifreeze materials for application to surfaces
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B1/00Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements
    • G02B1/10Optical coatings produced by application to, or surface treatment of, optical elements
    • G02B1/11Anti-reflection coatings
    • G02B1/113Anti-reflection coatings using inorganic layer materials only
    • G02B1/115Multilayers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B1/00Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements
    • G02B1/10Optical coatings produced by application to, or surface treatment of, optical elements
    • G02B1/18Coatings for keeping optical surfaces clean, e.g. hydrophobic or photo-catalytic films

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a laminate and its manufacturing method.
  • a film formed from a composition containing a compound having a fluoropolyether structure has a very low surface free energy, so it can be used in display devices such as touch panel displays, optical elements, semiconductor elements, building materials, and windows of automobiles and buildings. It is used as an antifouling coating or a water- and oil-repellent coating in various fields such as.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a compound (A) having a perfluoropolyether structure, an oxyalkylene unit in which at least part of the hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms, and a compound having a hydroxy group, It discloses that a composition containing a compound (B) having a number average molecular weight of less than 10,000 and a fluorine-based solvent (C) is formed into a film on non-alkali glass by vacuum deposition.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a laminate including a base material and a water-repellent layer, the laminate having good abrasion resistance on the surface of the water-repellent layer, and a method for producing the same.
  • a laminate comprising a substrate (s) and a water-repellent layer (r), A laminate in which the water-repellent layer (r) has a nitrogen content of 0.30 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less.
  • the water contact angle is 105° or more. and (ii) the water slide angle is less than 45°.
  • the water-repellent layer (r) is an organosilicon compound (A) having a fluoropolyether structure represented by the following formula (a1);
  • Rf a26 , Rf a27 , Rf a28 , and Rf a29 are each independently a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom ;
  • Rf a26 When a plurality of Rf a26 are present, a plurality of Rf a26 may be different, when a plurality of Rf a27 are present, a plurality of Rf a27 may be different, and when a plurality of Rf a28 are present, a plurality of Rf a28 may be different from each other, and when a plurality of Rf a29 are present, the plurality of Rf a29 may be different, R 25 and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a halogenated alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atom
  • R x11 , R x12 , R x13 , and R x14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when multiple R x11 are present, the multiple R x11 are different.
  • Rf x11 , Rf x12 , Rf x13 , and Rf x14 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf x11 are present
  • the plurality of Rf x11 may be different, when there are multiple Rf x12 , the plurality of Rf x12 may be different, and when there is a plurality of Rf x13 , the plurality of Rf x13 may be different.
  • Rf x14 may be different, and if there are multiple Rf x14 , the multiple Rf x14 may be different, R x15 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R x15 are present, the plurality of R x15 may be different, X 11 is a hydrolyzable group, and when a plurality of X 11 are present, the plurality of X 11 may be different, Y 11 is -NH- or -S-, and when a plurality of Y 11 are present, the plurality of Y 11 may be different, Z 11 is a vinyl group, ⁇ -methylvinyl group, styryl group, methacryloyl group, acryloyl group, amino group, isocyanate group, isocyanurate group, epoxy group, ureido group, or mercapto group; p1 is an integer of 1 to 20, p2, p3, and p4 are each independently an integer of 0 to 10,
  • R x20 and R x21 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms ;
  • Rf x20 and Rf x21 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and when there are multiple Rf x20 , multiple Rf x20 may be different, and when there are a plurality of Rf x21 , a plurality of Rf x21 may be different, R x22 and R x23 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when there are a plurality of R x22 and R x23 , a plurality of R x22 and R x23 may be different, X 20 and X 21 are each independently a hydrolyzable group,
  • R 100 in the amine skeleton is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • p22 and p23 are each independently an integer of 1 to 3
  • p21- ⁇ C( Rfx20 )( Rfx21 ) ⁇ -units ( Uc21 ) are p20 units ( U c20 ) or p21 units (U c21 ) need not be contiguous, and each unit (U c21 ) and unit (U c20 ) can be arranged in any order and combined to form the formula (c2).
  • Z 31 and Z 32 are each independently a reactive functional group other than a hydrolyzable group and a hydroxy group.
  • the reactive functional group is a vinyl group, ⁇ -methylvinyl group, styryl group, methacryloyl group, acryloyl group, amino group, epoxy group, ureido group, or mercapto group
  • R x31 , R x32 , R x33 and R x34 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when there are multiple R x31 , the multiple R x31 may be different.
  • Rf x31 , Rf x32 , Rf x33 , and Rf x34 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf x31 are present
  • the plurality of Rf x31 may be different, and when there are multiple Rf x32 , the plurality of Rf x32 may be different, and when there are multiple Rf x33 , the plurality of Rf x33 may be different.
  • Y 31 is —NH—, —N(CH 3 )— or —O—
  • X 31 , X 32 , X 33 and X 34 are each independently —OR c (R c is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or amino-C 1-3 alkyldi-C 1-3 alkoxysilyl is a group)
  • R c is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or amino-C 1-3 alkyldi-C 1-3 alkoxysilyl is a group
  • R c is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or amino-C 1-3 alkyldi-C 1-3 alkoxysilyl is a group
  • R c is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or amino-C 1-3 alkyldi-C 1-3 alkoxysilyl is a group
  • a window film or touch panel display comprising the laminate according to any one of [1] to [3].
  • a method for producing a laminate comprising the step of forming a water-repellent layer (r) by vacuum deposition on a substrate (s).
  • [6] Further comprising the step of forming a layer (X) different from the substrate (s) and the water-repellent layer (r) on the substrate (s), The production method according to [5], wherein the mixed composition after heating is vacuum-deposited onto the layer (X) provided on the substrate (s) to form the water-repellent layer (r).
  • [7] further comprising a step of hydrophilizing the surface of the substrate (s) or the surface of the layer (X) provided on the substrate (s), The production method according to [5] or [6], wherein the mixed composition after heating is vacuum-deposited on the hydrophilized surface of the substrate (s) or the hydrophilized surface of the layer (X).
  • the present invention it is possible to realize a laminate that includes a base material and a water-repellent layer and has good wear resistance on the surface of the water-repellent layer, and a method for producing the same.
  • the laminate of the present invention includes a substrate (s) and a water-repellent layer (r), and the nitrogen content on the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) is 0.30 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less. It is a laminate.
  • Water-repellent layer (r) The water-repellent layer (r) can be obtained by vapor deposition as described later, and such a layer has a surface nitrogen content of 0.30 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less.
  • the nitrogen content is preferably 0.5 atomic % or more, more preferably 0.6 atomic % or more, and may be 8.0 atomic % or less, or 5.0 atomic % or less. , is preferably 2.0 atomic % or less, more preferably 1.0 atomic % or less.
  • the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) for which the nitrogen content is specified is the surface opposite to the substrate (s).
  • the nitrogen content can be obtained by measuring the elements constituting the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) and their amounts by X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS).
  • Elements constituting the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) measured by XPS are typically B, C, N, O, F, Si, P, S, Cl, particularly C, N, O, F , Si.
  • the contents of B, C, N, O, F, Si, P, S, and Cl are respectively B1s spectrum, C1s spectrum, N1s spectrum, O1s spectrum, F1s spectrum, Si2p spectrum, P2p spectrum, S2p spectrum, Cl2p Calculated based on the spectrum.
  • the above XPS measurement uses MgK ⁇ as the excitation X-ray, the X-ray output is 110 W, the photoelectron escape angle is 45 °, the pass energy is 50 eV, carbon (C1s) , nitrogen (N1s), oxygen (O1s), fluorine (F1s), silicon (2p), boron (B1s), phosphorus (P2p), sulfur (S2p), and chlorine (Cl2p).
  • an electron gun for charge correction may be used as appropriate, and charge correction for the chemical shift of the measured spectrum can be performed using various standard samples. For example, among the C1s spectra, the spectra due to the C—C and C—H structures may be corrected with the energy standard of 284.0 eV.
  • the effect that the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) has good wear resistance can be exhibited.
  • the water contact angle is 105° or more, and (ii) the water slide angle is less than 45°. meet at least one of the requirements of
  • the water contact angle of (i) above is more preferably 108° or more, more preferably 110° or more, and may be 120° or less.
  • the water sliding angle of (ii) is more preferably 40° or less, still more preferably 35° or less, still more preferably 20° or less, particularly preferably 15° or less, and 5 ° or more.
  • Paper made of pulp material includes, for example, Kimwipe Wiper S-200.
  • the contact angle and the sliding angle were measured at approximately the center of the stroke area with a Kimwipe wiper S-200 at a stroke distance of 30 mm and a rubbing speed of 70 reciprocations/minute.
  • the initial contact angle on the surface of the water-repellent layer (r), that is, the contact angle after formation of the layer but not subjected to an abrasion resistance test is, for example, 105° or more, preferably 108° or more, and more preferably 110°. ° or more, and may be 125° or less.
  • the initial sliding angle of the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) is preferably less than 18°, more preferably 17° or less, and may be 3° or more.
  • Both the initial contact angle and the contact angle after the abrasion resistance test were measured by dropping 1 ⁇ L of water droplets on the water-repellent layer (r) and using the droplet method using the ⁇ /2 method.
  • 20 ⁇ L of water droplets are dropped on the water-repellent layer (r), and the sliding method (analysis method: tangential method, tilt method: continuous inclination, sliding detection: after sliding, movement judgment: forward angle, sliding judgment distance: 5 dots).
  • the "dot” means a pixel at the resolution when photographing with a camera attached to DM700 used in the examples described later, and 1 dot is 0.01 mm in the examples described later.
  • the water-repellent layer (r) satisfies the water contact angle as described above, and such a water-repellent layer (r) also has good oil repellency.
  • the thickness of the water-repellent layer (r) is, for example, 1 nm to 1000 nm.
  • the water-repellent layer (r) is, as described later, a mixed composition of an organosilicon compound (A) having a fluoropolyether structure, an organosilicon compound (C) having an amino group or an amine skeleton, and a solvent.
  • a mixture composition in which the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (A) to 100% by mass of the composition is more than 1% by mass and the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (C) is 0.1% by mass or more is used as a base material.
  • (s) or the layer (X) formed on the substrate (s) is preferably formed by vapor deposition and curing. Layer (r) can be formed.
  • the water-repellent layer (r) preferably has a structure derived from the organosilicon compound (A).
  • the organosilicon compound (A) has a hydrolyzable group or a hydroxy group bonded to a silicon atom (which may be bonded via a linking group), and the organosilicon compound ( Since the —SiOH groups of A) or the —SiOH groups of the organosilicon compound (A) (Si and OH may be bonded via a linking group) formed by hydrolysis undergo dehydration condensation, the water-repellent layer ( r) generally preferably has a condensed structure between the organosilicon compounds (A).
  • the water-repellent layer (r) contains —SiOH groups derived from the organosilicon compound (A), —SiOH groups derived from other compounds, or active hydrogen (hydroxyl groups) on the surface on which the water-repellent layer (r) is formed. etc.) are also preferably included.
  • the organosilicon compound (A) in a preferred embodiment, has a fluoropolyether structure in which a monovalent group (hereinafter referred to as an FPE group) having an oxygen atom at the terminal on the bond side is linked via a linking group.
  • the condensed structure between the organosilicon compounds (A) is such that the monovalent group (hereinafter referred to as the FPE group) having an oxygen atom at the end of the bond side of the fluoropolyether structure (hereinafter referred to as an FPE group) is linked via a linking group or It preferably contains a structure that is bonded to a silicon atom without a group intervening, and that the other end of the FPE group is a fluorine-containing group having a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the FPE group monovalent group having an oxygen atom at the end of the bond side of the fluoropolyether structure
  • the water-repellent layer (r) preferably has a structure derived from the organosilicon compound (C).
  • a hydrolyzable group is bonded to the silicon atom of the organosilicon compound (C), and the -SiOH group of the organosilicon compound (C) generated by hydrolysis of the hydrolyzable group Since they undergo dehydration condensation, the water-repellent layer (r) preferably has a condensed structure derived from the organosilicon compound (C).
  • —SiOH groups Si and OH may be bonded via a linking group; hereinafter the same) derived from the organosilicon compound (C) are It is also preferable to include a —SiOH group or a condensed structure formed by dehydration condensation with active hydrogen (such as a hydroxyl group) on the surface on which the water-repellent layer (r) is formed.
  • the water-repellent layer (r) contains at least one of a condensate of the organosilicon compounds (C) and a condensate of the organosilicon compound (C) and the organosilicon compound (A). is preferred.
  • the water-repellent layer (r) contains a condensate of organosilicon compounds (A) having a fluoropolyether structure represented by the formula (a1) described later, and the following formulas (c1) to (c3) At least one condensate of organosilicon compounds (C) having an amino group or amine skeleton represented by any of preferably included.
  • the organosilicon compound (B) represented by the following formula (b1) is a hydrolyzable group represented by A 2 or Having a hydroxy group
  • the —SiOH of the organosilicon compound (B) or the —SiOH group of the organosilicon compound (B) generated by hydrolysis is a —SiOH group derived from the organosilicon compound (A)
  • the organosilicon compound (A) contains a fluoropolyether structure.
  • the fluoropolyether structure can also be referred to as a fluorooxyalkylene group, and means a structure in which both ends are oxygen atoms.
  • Fluoropolyether structures have liquid repellency, such as water repellency or oil repellency.
  • the fluoropolyether structure is preferably a perfluoropolyether structure.
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in the longest linear portion of the fluoropolyether structure is, for example, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 10 or more, and even more preferably 20 or more.
  • the upper limit of the number of carbon atoms is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 200, preferably 150.
  • the number of silicon atoms in one molecule of the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-6.
  • the organosilicon compound (A) preferably contains a hydrolyzable group or a hydroxy group (hereinafter both are collectively referred to as a reactive group (k)) in addition to a fluoropolyether structure and a silicon atom, and the More preferably, the reactive group (k) is bonded to the silicon atom via a linking group or not via a linking group.
  • the reactive group (k) is formed between the organosilicon compounds (A) through a hydrolysis/dehydration condensation reaction; the organosilicon compound (A) and another monomer; or the organosilicon compound (A) and the mixture composition has the function of bonding with active hydrogen (hydroxyl group, etc.) on the surface to which is applied through a condensation reaction.
  • hydrolyzable group examples include an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an acetoxy group and an isocyanate group.
  • the reactive group (k) is preferably an alkoxy group or a halogen atom, more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a chlorine atom, and particularly preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group.
  • the organosilicon compound (A) contains a fluoropolyether structure, a silicon atom and a reactive group (k)
  • a monovalent group having an oxygen atom of the fluoropolyether structure at the terminal on the bond side hereinafter referred to as an FPE group
  • the silicon atom is bonded via a linking group or not
  • the silicon atom and the reactive group (k) are bonded via a linking group or not Bonding
  • the silicon atom bonded to the reactive group (k) via the linking group or not via the linking group is the organosilicon compound (A) may be present in one molecule, and the number thereof is, for example, 1 or more and 10 or less.
  • the FPE group may be linear or may have a side chain, and preferably has a side chain.
  • the fluoropolyether structure in the FPE group has a side chain. It preferably has a fluoroalkyl group as a side chain, and the fluoroalkyl group is more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group, still more preferably a trifluoromethyl group.
  • the carbon number of the linking group linking the FPE group and the silicon atom is, for example, 1 or more and 20 or less, preferably 2 or more and 15 or less.
  • the FPE group described above is preferably a group in which a fluorine-containing group having a fluoroalkyl group at its end and a perfluoropolyether structure are directly bonded.
  • the fluorine-containing group may be a fluoroalkyl group or a group in which a linking group such as a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group is bonded to a fluoroalkyl group, but is preferably a fluoroalkyl group.
  • the fluoroalkyl group is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group, more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • fluorine-containing group examples include CF 3 (CF 2 ) p — (p is, for example, 1 to 19, preferably 1 to 10), CF 3 (CF 2 ) m —(CH 2 ) n -, CF 3 (CF 2 ) m -C 6 H 4 - (m is 1 to 10, preferably 3 to 7; n is 1 to 5, preferably 2 to 4; and CF 3 (CF 2 ) p — or CF 3 (CF 2 ) m —(CH 2 ) n — are preferred.
  • the reactive group (k) may be bonded to the silicon atom via a linking group, or may be directly bonded to the silicon atom without the linking group, and is directly bonded to the silicon atom. is preferred.
  • the number of reactive groups (k) bonded to one silicon atom may be 1 or more, and may be 2 or 3, preferably 2 or 3, particularly 3 preferable.
  • different reactive groups (k) may be attached to the silicon atom, but the same reactive group (k) may be attached to the silicon atom. preferably combined.
  • the remaining bonds may be bonded with a monovalent group other than the reactive group (k), for example, An alkyl group (especially an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms), H, NCO, etc. can be bonded.
  • the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (a1).
  • Rf a26 , Rf a27 , Rf a28 , and Rf a29 are each independently a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom ;
  • Rf a26 When a plurality of Rf a26 are present, the plurality of Rf a26 may be different, when there are a plurality of Rf a27, the plurality of Rf a27 may be different, and when a plurality of Rf a28 are present, a plurality of Rf a28 may be different from each other, and when a plurality of Rf a29 are present, the plurality of Rf a29 may be different, R 25 and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a halogenated alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms in
  • “Arranged in any order and bonded” means that the repeating units are not limited to being arranged consecutively in the order as described in formula (a1) above, and f21 - ⁇ C(R 25 )( R 26 ) ⁇ -units (U a1 ) do not need to be continuously bonded, and may be bonded via other units along the way. The same applies to the units (U a2 ) to (U a6 ) enclosed by f22 to f26.
  • R 27 and R 28 when at least one of R 27 and R 28 is a single bond, the single bond portion of the unit enclosed by f23 and —O— in M 7 are repeatedly bonded to form a branched or cyclic It can form siloxane bonds.
  • Rf a26 , Rf a27 , Rf a28 , and Rf a29 are preferably each independently a fluorine atom or a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms. More preferably, it is a fluorine atom or a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms in which all hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms.
  • R 25 and R 26 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, and at least one of R 25 and R 26 bonded to one carbon atom is a hydrogen atom.
  • R 27 and R 28 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably all alkyl groups having 1 to 2 carbon atoms.
  • R 29 and R 30 are preferably C 1-5 alkyl groups, more preferably C 1-2 alkyl groups.
  • M5 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably all hydrogen atoms.
  • M10 is more preferably a fluorine atom.
  • M8 and M9 are more preferably each independently an alkoxy group or a halogen atom, more preferably a methoxy group, an ethoxy group or a chlorine atom, particularly preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group.
  • f21, f23, and f24 are each 1/2 or less of f22, more preferably 1/4 or less, still more preferably f23 or f24 is 0, and particularly preferably f24 is 0 .
  • f25 is preferably 1/5 or more of the total value of f21, f22, f23, and f24 and less than or equal to the total value of f21, f22, f23, and f24.
  • f21 is preferably 0-20, more preferably 0-15, even more preferably 1-15, and particularly preferably 1-10.
  • f22 is preferably 5 to 600, more preferably 8 to 600, still more preferably 20 to 200, still more preferably 30 to 200, still more preferably 35 to 180, most preferably 40 to 180 is.
  • f23 and f24 are preferably 0 to 5, more preferably 0 to 3, still more preferably 0.
  • f25 is preferably 4-600, more preferably 4-200, even more preferably 10-200, still more preferably 30-60.
  • the total value of f21, f22, f23, f24 and f25 is preferably 20-600, more preferably 20-250, even more preferably 50-230.
  • f26 is preferably 0-18, more preferably 0-15, even more preferably 0-10, still more preferably 0-5.
  • f27 is preferably 0 to 1, preferably 0.
  • g21 and g31 are each independently preferably 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
  • g22 and g32 are each independently preferably 0 or 1, more preferably 0.
  • both R 25 and R 26 are hydrogen atoms
  • f21 is 1 to 15
  • both Rf a26 and Rf a27 are fluorine atoms
  • f22 is 40 to 180 (especially 50 to 100)
  • f23 and f24 are both 0
  • M7 is —O—
  • f25 is 30 to 60
  • M5 is a hydrogen atom
  • M8 and M9 are all methoxy groups
  • the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably represented by the following formula (a2).
  • Rf a1 is a divalent fluoropolyether structure having oxygen atoms at both ends
  • R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when there are a plurality of R 11 , the plurality of R 11 may be different, and the plurality of R 12 may be When present, multiple R 12 may be different, and when multiple R 13 are present, multiple R 13 may be different
  • E 1 , E 2 , E 3 , E 4 , and E 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, and when a plurality of E 1 are present, the plurality of E 1 may be different, and E When a plurality of 2 are present, a plurality of E 2 may be different, when a plurality of E 3 are present, a plurality of E 3 may be different, and when a plurality of E 4 is present, a plurality of E 4 may be different, and when multiple E 5 are present, the multiple
  • a21 and a23 are each independently 0 to 2
  • e11 is 1 to 3
  • e12 is 0 to 2
  • e21 is 1 to 3
  • e22 is 0 to 2
  • e31 is 1 to 3
  • e32 is 0 to 2
  • a10 is 0 means that the portion enclosed with a10 is a single bond, and even if a11, a12, a13, a14, a15, a16, a21 or a23 is 0 It is the same.
  • Rf a1 is preferably -O-(CF 2 CF 2 O) e4 -, -O-(CF 2 CF 2 CF 2 O) e5 -, -O-(CF 2 -CF(CF 3 )O) e6 - . Both e4 and e5 are 15 to 80, and e6 is 3 to 60 (more preferably 25 to 55). Rf a1 is also preferably a group in which hydrogen atoms are removed from hydroxyl groups at both ends of a structure obtained by randomly dehydrating and condensing p mol of perfluoropropylene glycol and q mol of perfluoromethanediol, and p + q is 15-80.
  • Rf a1 is —O—(CF 2 CF 2 CF 2 O) e5 — and e5 is 15 to 80 (preferably 20 to 40), or —O—(CF 2 —CF(CF 3 ) O) more preferably e6- and e6 is from 25 to 55;
  • R 11 , R 12 and R 13 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms.
  • Each of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is preferably a hydrogen atom, and E 5 is preferably a fluorine atom.
  • L 1 and L 2 each independently represent - ⁇ C(R 25 )(R 26 ) ⁇ -unit (U a1 ), - ⁇ C(Rf a26 )(Rf a27 ) ⁇ -unit (U a2 ), - ⁇ Si(R 27 )(R 28 ) ⁇ -units (U a3 ) or -M 7 -units (U a5 ), one or more of which are aligned in any order and bonded to carbon containing a fluorine atom or an oxygen atom
  • a divalent linking group of numbers 1 to 12 (preferably 1 to 10) is preferred.
  • L 1 is preferably -(CF 2 ) x1 - in which x1 is 1 to 5 (preferably 1 to 3) or a group represented by the following (L1-1) to (L1-5). Note that * in (L1-1) to (L1-5) below represents a bond.
  • L 2 is preferably -(CF 2 ) x2 - where x2 is 1 to 5 (preferably 1 to 3).
  • G 1 and G 2 are each independently preferably a divalent to pentavalent organosiloxane group having a siloxane bond.
  • J 1 , J 2 and J 3 are each independently preferably methoxy, ethoxy or —(CH 2 ) e7 —Si(OR 14 ) 3 , more preferably methoxy or ethoxy.
  • a10 is preferably 1, a11 is preferably 0, a12 is preferably 0 to 7, more preferably 0 to 5, a13 is preferably 0 to 3, a14 is preferably 1, a15 is preferably 0, a16 is preferably 0 to 6, more preferably 0 to 3, both a21 and a23 are preferably 0 or 1 (more preferably both are 0), d11 is preferably 1, d12 is preferably 1, e11, Both e21 and e31 are preferably 1-3. Each of e12, e22 and e32 is preferably 0 or 1, more preferably 0. These preferred ranges may be satisfied singly or in combination of two or more.
  • Rf a1 in the above formula (a2) is O—(CF 2 —CF(CF 3 )O) e6 — (e6 is 25 to 55), and R 12 and R 13 are each independent is an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, L 1 is a group represented by any one of the above (L1-1) to (L1-5), and L 2 is a group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 3), wherein a12 and a13 are 0, E 4 is a hydrogen atom, E 5 is a fluorine atom, and J 2 and J 3 are both a methoxy group or an ethoxy group.
  • a10 is 1, a11 is 0, a14 is 1, a15 is 0, a16 is 0 to 6 (especially 0), and a23 is 0 or 1 Yes (preferably 0), d11 is 1, d12 is 1, e21 and e31 are each independently 1 to 3, e22 and e32 are both 0 or 1 (especially 0) ( a21) is preferably used.
  • Rf a1 in formula (a2) above is —O—(CF 2 CF 2 CF 2 O) e5 — and e5 is 15 to 80 (preferably 20 to 40).
  • e11, e21 and e31 are all 3
  • E 1 to E 4 are all hydrogen atoms
  • E 5 is a fluorine atom
  • a11 and a15 are 0,
  • L 1 and L 2 are is -(CF 2 ) x - in which x is 1 to 5 (preferably 1 to 3)
  • a10 and a14 are 1, both J 1 and J 2 are methoxy groups
  • a12 is 0 to 9
  • a21 is 0, a13 is 2
  • a16 is 0, and d11 and d12 are both 1.
  • Rf a1 in the above formula (a2) is —O—(CF 2 CF 2 CF 2 O) e5 —, e5 is 25 to 40, and L 1 is a fluorine atom and an oxygen atom.
  • L 2 is a perfluoroalkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, both E 2 and E 3 are hydrogen atoms, and E 5 is a fluorine atom.
  • J 2 is —(CH 2 ) e7 —Si(OCH 3 ) 3
  • e7 is 2 to 4
  • a10 is 1, a11 is 0, a12 is 0, a13 is 2
  • a14 is 1, a15 is 0, a16 is 0, d11 is 1, d12 is 1 and e21 is 3 (a23) is also preferably used.
  • organosilicon compound (A) includes compounds of the following formula (a3).
  • R 30 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
  • R 31 is a perfluoropolyethylene group having 25 to 55 repeated perfluorooxyalkylene groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. It has an ether structure (both ends are oxygen atoms)
  • R 32 is a group represented by any one of the above (L1-1) to (L1-5)
  • R 33 is an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • R 34 is an alkoxy group
  • y11 is 1 to 3
  • y12 is 0 to 2
  • R 30 is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • R 31 is a perfluoropolyether structure in which 25 to 55 branched perfluorooxyalkylene groups having 1 to 3 carbon atoms are repeated. (Both ends are oxygen atoms).
  • y11+y12 is preferably three.
  • organosilicon compound (A) examples include compounds represented by the following formula (a4).
  • R 40 is a C 2-5 perfluoroalkyl group
  • R 41 is a C 2-5 perfluoroalkylene group
  • R 42 is a C 2-5 a fluoroalkylene group in which some of the hydrogen atoms of the alkylene group are substituted with fluorine
  • R 43 and R 44 are each independently an alkylene group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms
  • R 45 is a methyl group or an ethyl group; be.
  • k1 is an integer of 1-5.
  • k2 is an integer of 1 to 3, preferably 2 or more, and may be 3.
  • organosilicon compound (A) a compound represented by the following formula (a5) can also be mentioned.
  • R 50 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms
  • R 51 is a perfluoroalkylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms
  • R 52 has 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • R 53 is a trivalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms
  • R 54 is an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms in R 50 , R 51 and R 53 is each independently preferably 2-4, more preferably 2-3.
  • the carbon number of R 52 is preferably 2-16, more preferably 2-10.
  • h1 is 5-50 and h2 is 1-10.
  • h1 is preferably 10-40.
  • the compound represented by the above formula (a5) includes a compound represented by the following formula (1), or a compound having a similar structure to the compound.
  • OPTOOL registered trademark manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd.
  • the organosilicon compound (A) in DSX is represented by the following formula (1).
  • r is 24, s is an integer of 1 to 10, and the number average molecular weight is about 5,000.
  • Other hydrocarbon groups including hydrocarbon groups in which at least some of the hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms
  • Intervening structures, structures in which a silicon atom and a hydrolyzable group are bonded via a linking group, structures in which the values of r and s are different, and the like are included, but are not limited to these structures.
  • the number average molecular weight of the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably 2,000 or more, more preferably 4,000 or more, even more preferably 5,000 or more, still more preferably 5,300 or more, and 40 ,000 or less, more preferably 20,000 or less, and even more preferably 15,000 or less.
  • organosilicon compound (A) only one type may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • the mass ratio (solid content) of the organosilicon compound (A) to 100% by mass of the mixed composition is more than 1% by mass. Formable.
  • the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, still more preferably 10% by mass or more, and even more preferably 13% by mass or more.
  • the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably 30% by mass or less, and by setting it in such a range, the appearance of the water-repellent layer (r) is improved.
  • the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (A) may be 25% by mass or less.
  • the amounts of the organosilicon compound (A) and other compounds described later can be adjusted during preparation of the composition, or can be calculated from the analysis results of the composition.
  • the type of each compound contained in the composition is analyzed by gas chromatography mass spectrometry, liquid chromatography mass spectrometry, etc., and the obtained analysis
  • the results can be identified by library searching, and the amount of each compound contained in the composition can be calculated from the above analytical results using the calibration curve method.
  • the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably calculated as a ratio when the mixed composition of the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C) and the solvent is taken as 100% by mass, and the organic The same applies to the mass ratio of the silicon compound (C).
  • the mixed composition is obtained by mixing the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C), and preferably the solvent (especially the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2)), Including those in which the reaction has progressed, examples in which the reaction has progressed include the mixed composition having a hydrolyzable hydrolyzable compound bonded to the silicon atom of the organosilicon compound (A) (which may be bonded via a linking group). Examples include compounds in which a group is hydrolyzed to a —SiOH group (Si and OH may be bonded via a linking group).
  • the mixed composition may contain a condensate of the organosilicon compound (A), and the condensate may be a —SiOH group possessed by the organosilicon compound (A) or an organosilicon compound produced by hydrolysis (
  • the -SiOH group (Si and OH may be bonded via a linking group) of A) is a -SiOH group derived from the organosilicon compound (A) (Si and OH are bonded via a linking group may be used), or condensates formed by dehydration condensation with —SiOH groups derived from other compounds.
  • Organosilicon compound (C) The organosilicon compound (C) is a compound having an amino group or an amine skeleton, and may have both an amino group and an amine skeleton.
  • the amine skeleton is represented by —NR 100 —, where R 100 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • a hydrolyzable group or a hydroxy group is preferably bonded to the silicon atom of the organosilicon compound (C).
  • the hydrolyzable groups bonded to the silicon atoms of the organosilicon compound (C) include alkoxy groups, halogen atoms, cyano groups, acetoxy groups, isocyanate groups and the like.
  • the silicon atom of the organosilicon compound (C) is preferably bonded to an alkoxy group or a hydroxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkoxy group or a hydroxy group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, and a methoxy group. is particularly preferred.
  • the organosilicon compound (C) preferably has at least an amine skeleton, and more preferably has both an amine skeleton and an amino group.
  • organosilicon compound (C) examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (c1) to (c3).
  • Organosilicon compound (C) represented by formula (c1) (hereinafter, organosilicon compound (C1))
  • R x11 , R x12 , R x13 , and R x14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when multiple R x11 are present, the multiple R x11 are different may be different when there are a plurality of R x12 ; when there are a plurality of R x13 , a plurality of R x13 may be different ; and when there are a plurality of R x14 may be different from each other in a plurality of R x14 , Rf x11 , Rf x12 , Rf x13 , and Rf x14 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf x11 are present When there is a plurality of Rf x11 may be different, when there are a plurality of Rf x11
  • R x11 , R x12 , R x13 and R x14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • Rf x11 , Rf x12 , Rf x13 and Rf x14 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom.
  • R x15 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • X 11 is preferably an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an isocyanate group, more preferably an alkoxy group, even more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a methoxy group or an ethoxy is more preferred, and a methoxy group is particularly preferred.
  • Y 11 is preferably -NH-.
  • Z 11 is preferably a methacryloyl group, an acryloyl group, a mercapto group or an amino group, more preferably a mercapto group or an amino group, still more preferably an amino group.
  • p1 is preferably 1-15, more preferably 2-10.
  • Each of p2, p3 and p4 is independently preferably 0-5, more preferably 0-2.
  • p5 is preferably 0-5, more preferably 0-3.
  • p6 is preferably 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
  • both R x11 and R x12 are hydrogen atoms
  • Y 11 is —NH—
  • X 11 is an alkoxy group (especially a methoxy group or an ethoxy group).
  • Z 11 is an amino group or a mercapto group
  • p1 is 1 to 10
  • p2, p3 and p4 are all
  • p5 is 0 to 5 ( In particular, it is preferable to use a compound of 1 to 3) and p6 of 3.
  • p1 pieces of - ⁇ C(R x11 )(R x12 ) ⁇ - do not need to be continuously bonded to - ⁇ C(R x11 )(R x12 ) ⁇ -, and other units may be linked via , and p1 pieces in total may be used. The same applies to units enclosed by p2 to p5.
  • the organosilicon compound (C1) is preferably represented by the following formula (c1-2).
  • X 12 is a hydrolyzable group, and when a plurality of X 12 are present, the plurality of X 12 may be different, Y 12 is -NH-, Z 12 is an amino group or a mercapto group, R x16 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R x16 are present, the plurality of R x16 may be different, p is an integer of 1 to 3, q is an integer of 2 to 5, r is an integer of 0 to 5, s is 0 or 1, When s is 0, Z 12 is an amino group.
  • X 12 is preferably an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an isocyanate group, more preferably an alkoxy group, still more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. Preferred are methoxy groups.
  • Z 12 is preferably an amino group.
  • R x16 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • p is preferably an integer of 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
  • q is preferably an integer of 2 to 3
  • r is preferably an integer of 2 to 4
  • the sum of q and r is 1 to 5.
  • s is 1.
  • Organosilicon compound (C) represented by formula (c2) (hereinafter referred to as organosilicon compound (C2))
  • R x20 and R x21 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms ;
  • Rf x20 and Rf x21 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and when there are multiple Rf x20 , multiple Rf x20 may be different, and when there are a plurality of Rf x21 , the plurality of Rf x21 may be different, R x22 and R x23 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when there are a plurality of R x22 and R x23 , a plurality of R x22 and R x23 may be different, X 20 and X 21 are each independently a hydrolyzable group, and
  • R 100 in the amine skeleton is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • p22 and p23 are each independently an integer of 1 to 3
  • p21- ⁇ C( Rfx20 )( Rfx21 ) ⁇ -units ( Uc21 ) are p20 units ( U c20 ) or p21 units (U c21 ) need not be contiguous, and each unit (U c21 ) and unit (U c20 ) can be arranged in any order and combined to form the formula (c2).
  • One end of the compound is -Si(X 20 ) p22 (R x22 ) 3-p22
  • the other end is -Si(X 21 ) p23 (R x23 ) 3-p23 .
  • R x20 and R x21 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • Rf x20 and Rf x21 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom.
  • R x22 and R x23 are preferably alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • X 20 and X 21 are preferably an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an isocyanate group, more preferably an alkoxy group, still more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. group is even more preferred, and a methoxy group is particularly preferred.
  • At least one amine skeleton —NR 100 — may be present in the molecule, and the amine skeleton may be replaced by either a repeating unit bracketed with p20 or p21. , p20 are preferably part of a bracketed repeating unit.
  • a plurality of the amine skeletons may be present, and in that case, the number of amine skeletons is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, and even more preferably 2-5. In this case, it is preferable to have - ⁇ C(R x20 )(R x21 ) ⁇ p200 - between adjacent amine skeletons, and p200 is preferably 1 to 10, preferably 1 to 5. more preferred.
  • p200 is included in the total number of p20s.
  • the number of carbon atoms is preferably 5 or less, more preferably 3 or less.
  • the amine skeleton -NR 100 - is preferably -NH- (R 100 is a hydrogen atom).
  • p20 is preferably 1-15, more preferably 1-10, excluding the number of repeating units replaced by the amine skeleton.
  • p21 is preferably 0 to 5, more preferably 0 to 2, excluding the number of repeating units replaced by the amine skeleton.
  • p22 and p23 are preferably 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
  • both R x20 and R x21 are hydrogen atoms
  • X 20 and X 21 are alkoxy groups (particularly preferably methoxy or ethoxy groups, particularly methoxy groups is preferred)
  • at least one repeating unit bracketed with p20 is replaced with an amine skeleton —NR 100 —
  • R 100 is a hydrogen atom
  • p20 is 1 to 10 ( However, it is preferable to use a compound in which p21 is 0 and p22 and p23 are 3, except for the number of repeating units replaced by the amine skeleton.
  • the organosilicon compound (C2) is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (c2-2).
  • X 22 and X 23 are each independently a hydrolyzable group, and when a plurality of X 22 and X 23 are present, the plurality of X 22 and X 23 may be different, R x24 and R x25 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when there are a plurality of R x24 and R x25 , a plurality of R x24 and R x25 may be different, —C w H 2w — has at least one of its methylene groups replaced with an amine skeleton —NR 100 —, and R 100 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group; w is an integer of 1 to 30 (excluding the number of methylene groups substituted for the amine skeleton), p24 and p25 are each independently an integer of 1-3.
  • X 22 and X 23 are preferably an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an isocyanate group, more preferably an alkoxy group, even more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, methoxy or an ethoxy group, particularly preferably a methoxy group.
  • a plurality of amine skeletons —NR 100 — may be present, and in that case, the number of amine skeletons is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and 2 to 5. More preferred. Moreover, in this case, it is preferable to have an alkylene group between adjacent amine skeletons.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene groups between adjacent amine skeletons is included in the total number of w.
  • the number of carbon atoms is preferably 5 or less, more preferably 3 or less.
  • the amine skeleton -NR 100 - is preferably -NH- (R 100 is a hydrogen atom).
  • R x24 and R x25 are preferably alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • p24 and p25 are preferably integers of 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
  • w is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, and preferably 20 or less, more preferably 10 or less.
  • Organosilicon compound (C) represented by formula (c3) (hereinafter, organosilicon compound (C3))
  • Z 31 and Z 32 are each independently a reactive functional group other than a hydrolyzable group and a hydroxy group.
  • Reactive functional groups include vinyl, ⁇ -methylvinyl, styryl, methacryloyl, acryloyl, amino, epoxy, ureido, or mercapto groups.
  • Z 31 and Z 32 are preferably an amino group, a mercapto group, or a methacryloyl group, particularly preferably an amino group.
  • R x31 , R x32 , R x33 and R x34 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when there are multiple R x31 , the multiple R x31 are different may be different when there are a plurality of R x32 , and when there are a plurality of R x33, a plurality of R x33 may be different, and when there are a plurality of R x34 may be different from each other in a plurality of R x34 .
  • R x31 , R x32 , R x33 and R x34 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • Rf x31 , Rf x32 , Rf x33 , and Rf x34 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf x31 are present
  • the plurality of Rf x31 may be different
  • when there are multiple Rf x32 , the plurality of Rf x32 may be different
  • when there are multiple Rf x33 , the plurality of Rf x33 may be different.
  • each of the multiple Rf x34 may be different.
  • Rf x31 , Rf x32 , Rf x33 and Rf x34 are preferably C 1-10 alkyl groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or fluorine atoms.
  • Y 31 is —NH—, —N(CH 3 )—, or —O—, and when there are a plurality of Y 31 , the plurality of Y 31 may be different.
  • Y 31 is preferably -NH-.
  • X 31 , X 32 , X 33 and X 34 are each independently —OR c (R c is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or amino-C 1-3 alkyldi-C 1-3 alkoxysilyl is a group), and when a plurality of X 31 are present, the plurality of X 31 may be different, when a plurality of X 32 are present, the plurality of X 32 may be different, and X 33 is When a plurality of X 33 are present, the plurality of X 33 may be different, and when a plurality of X 34 are present, the plurality of X 34 may be different.
  • X 31 , X 32 , X 33 and X 34 are preferably —OR c in which R c is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • p31 is an integer of 0 to 20
  • p32, p33, and p34 are each independently an integer of 0 to 10
  • p35 is an integer of 0 to 5
  • p36 is an integer of 1 to 10 and p37 is 0 or 1.
  • p31 is preferably 1-15, more preferably 3-13, still more preferably 5-10.
  • p32, p33 and p34 are each independently preferably 0-5, more preferably 0-2.
  • p35 is preferably 0-3.
  • p36 is preferably 1-5, more preferably 1-3.
  • p37 is preferably 1.
  • the organosilicon compound (C3) satisfies the condition that at least one of Z 31 and Z 32 is an amino group, or at least one of Y 31 is —NH— or —N(CH 3 )—, and the formula p31 - ⁇ C(R x31 ) (R x32 ) ⁇ -unit (U c31 ), p32- ⁇ C(Rf x31 )(Rf x32 ) ⁇ -unit (U c32 ), p33- ⁇ Si(R x33 )(R x34 ) ⁇ - unit (U c33 ), p34 - ⁇ Si(Rf x33 )(Rf x34 ) ⁇ - unit (U c34 ), p35 -Y 31 - unit (U c35 ), p36 - ⁇ Si(X 31 ) (X 32 )-O ⁇ -unit (U c36 ) and p37 - ⁇ Si(X 33 )(X 34
  • p31 - ⁇ C(R x31 )(R x32 ) ⁇ -units (U c31 ) do not have to be continuously linked with - ⁇ C(R x31 )(R x32 ) ⁇ - It may be bound via another unit, and the total number of p31 may be sufficient. The same applies to the units (U c32 ) to (U c37 ) enclosed by p32 to p37.
  • Z 31 and Z 32 are amino groups, R x31 and R x32 are hydrogen atoms, p31 is 3 to 13 (preferably 5 to 10), R x33 and R Each of x34 is a hydrogen atom, each of Rf x31 to Rf x34 is an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with a fluorine atom or a fluorine atom, and each of p32 to p34 is 0 to 5, Y 31 is —NH—, p35 is 0 to 5 (preferably 0 to 3), X 31 to X 34 are all —OH, and p36 is 1 to 5 (preferably is 1-3) and p37 is 1 is preferred.
  • the organosilicon compound (C3) is preferably represented by the following formula (c3-2).
  • Z 31 , Z 32 , X 31 , X 32 , X 33 , X 34 and Y 31 have the same meanings as those in formula (c3), and p41 to p44 are each independent is an integer of 1 to 6, and p45 and 46 are each independently 0 or 1.
  • Z 31 and Z 32 are preferably an amino group, a mercapto group, or a methacryloyl group, particularly preferably an amino group.
  • X 31 , X 32 , X 33 and X 34 are preferably —OR c in which R c is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably R c is a hydrogen atom. preferable.
  • Y 31 is preferably -NH-.
  • p41 to p44 are preferably 1 or more, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 4 or less. Both p45 and p46 are preferably 0.
  • the mixed composition is prepared by mixing the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C), preferably the solvent (especially the fluorinated solvent (D1) and the non-fluorinated solvent (D2)), and then reacting
  • the mixed composition includes a compound in which the hydrolyzable group bonded to the silicon atom of the organosilicon compound (C) is hydrolyzed to become a —SiOH group. Things are mentioned.
  • the mixed composition may include a condensate of the organosilicon compound (C).
  • the —SiOH group of the organosilicon compound (C) or the —SiOH group of the organosilicon compound (C) generated by hydrolysis is a —SiOH group derived from the organosilicon compound (C), or another
  • a condensate formed by dehydration condensation with a -SiOH group derived from a compound is exemplified.
  • the condensate of the organosilicon compound (C) includes, for example, the organosilicon compound (C3') in which the organosilicon compound (C3) is condensed and bonded with at least one of the above X 31 to X 34 . .
  • the organosilicon compound (C3′) has two or more structures (c31-1) represented by the following formula (c31-1), and the structures (c31-1) are represented by *3 or *4 below.
  • a chain or ring-bonded compound, wherein the bond in *3 or *4 below is due to the condensation of two or more of the organosilicon compounds (C3) above X 31 or X 32 , *1 and *2 in the following formula (c31-1) are, respectively, at least the units enclosed by p31, p32, p33, p34, p35, (p36)-1, and p37 in the following formula (c31-2)
  • One type is bonded in any order and a group having a terminal Z- is bonded, and the groups bonded to *1 and *2 may be different for each of the plurality of structures (c31-1),
  • *3 which is the terminal
  • *4 is a hydroxy group.
  • Z is a reactive functional group other than a hydrolyzable group and a hydroxy group
  • R x31 , R x32 , R x33 , R x34 , Rf x31 , Rf x32 , Rf x33 , Rf x34 , Y 31 , X 31 , X 32 , X 33 , X 34 , p31 to p37 are synonymous with these signs of
  • the organosilicon compound (C3) is a compound represented by the above formula (c3-2)
  • the organosilicon compound (C3′) is, for example, a structure represented by the following formula (c31-3) *3 below. or *4 may be a chain or ring-bonded compound.
  • the terminal *3 is a hydrogen atom and the terminal *4 is a hydroxy group.
  • the organosilicon compound (C3') is preferably a compound in which 2 to 10 (preferably 3 to 8) structures represented by the formula (c31-3) are bonded.
  • organosilicon compound (C) only one type may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • organosilicon compound (C) the organosilicon compound (C1) is preferably used.
  • the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (C) to 100% by mass of the mixed composition is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.7% by mass or more, still more preferably 1% by mass or more, and still more preferably. is 1.5% by mass or more, particularly preferably 2% by mass or more, may be 10% by mass or less, may be 8% by mass or less, or may be 6% by mass or less good.
  • the mass ratio (solid content) of the organosilicon compound (A) to the organosilicon compound (C) is preferably 0.2 or more, and is set within this range.
  • the appearance of the water-repellent layer (r) is improved.
  • (A)/(C) is more preferably 0.5 or more, still more preferably 1.0 or more, still more preferably 1.5 or more, and particularly preferably 2.0 or more.
  • (A)/(C) is preferably 9.5 or less, and by setting it in such a range, the adhesion of the water-repellent layer (r) is improved.
  • (A)/(C) is more preferably 8.0 or less, still more preferably 7.0 or less.
  • the mixed composition further contains a solvent.
  • the amount (mass ratio) of the solvent is preferably 60% by mass or more, more preferably 65% by mass or more, based on 100% by mass of the mixed composition of the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C) and the solvent. more preferably 70 mass % or more, may be 98 mass % or less, may be 95 mass % or less, or may be 90 mass % or less.
  • the solvent preferably contains a fluorinated solvent (D1) and a non-fluorinated solvent (D2). When the solvent contains the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2), the amount of the solvent means the total amount of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2).
  • Fluorinated solvent (D1) The organosilicon compound (A) is particularly easy to dissolve in fluorine-based solvents.
  • the fluorinated solvent (D1) for example, a fluorinated ether solvent, a fluorinated amine solvent, a fluorinated hydrocarbon solvent, a fluorinated alcohol solvent, or the like can be used. Solvents are preferably used.
  • fluorinated ether-based solvents examples include hydrofluoroethers having 3 to 8 carbon atoms, such as C 3 F 7 OCH 3 (manufactured by 3M, Novec (registered trademark) 7000), C 4 F 9 OCH 3 ( 3M Novec (registered trademark) 7100), C 4 F 9 OC 2 H 5 (3M Novec (registered trademark) 7200), C 2 F 5 CF (OCH 3 ) C 3 F 7 (3M , Novec (registered trademark) 7300) and the like can be used.
  • hydrofluoroethers having 3 to 8 carbon atoms such as C 3 F 7 OCH 3 (manufactured by 3M, Novec (registered trademark) 7000), C 4 F 9 OCH 3 ( 3M Novec (registered trademark) 7100), C 4 F 9 OC 2 H 5 (3M Novec (registered trademark) 7200), C 2 F 5 CF (OCH 3 ) C 3 F 7 (3M ,
  • fluorinated amine-based solvent an amine in which at least one hydrogen atom of ammonia is substituted with a fluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a third A class amine is preferred, specifically tris(heptafluoropropyl)amine, and Fluorinert (registered trademark) FC-3283 (manufactured by 3M) corresponds to this.
  • Fluorinated hydrocarbon solvents include fluorinated aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents such as 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluorobutane and perfluorohexane, and 1,3-bis(trifluoromethylbenzene). Examples include fluorinated aromatic hydrocarbon solvents.
  • 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluorobutane examples include Solv 55 (manufactured by Solvex).
  • Fluorinated alcohol solvents include 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-propanol, 2,2,3,3-tetrafluoro-1-propanol, 2,2,3,3, 4,4,5,5-octafluoro-1-pentanol, 2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,7,7-dodecafluoro-1-heptanol, perfluorooctyl ethanol, 1H,1H,2H,2H-tridecafluoro-1-n-octanol and the like.
  • hydrochlorofluorocarbons such as Asahiklin (registered trademark) AK225 (manufactured by AGC) and hydrofluorocarbons such as Asahiklin (registered trademark) AC2000 (manufactured by AGC) can be used. can.
  • fluorine-based solvent (D1) only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
  • fluorinated solvent (D1) it is preferable to use at least a fluorinated ether solvent or a fluorinated hydrocarbon solvent.
  • the amount (mass ratio) of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) with respect to 100% by mass of the mixed composition is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and still more preferably 60% by mass or more. Also, the mass ratio of the fluorinated solvent (D1) may be, for example, 90% by mass or less, 85% by mass or less, or 80% by mass or less. When using a plurality of types as the fluorine-based solvent (D1), the total amount should be within the above range.
  • Non-fluorinated solvent (D2) Since the organosilicon compound (C) is easily dissolved in the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2), it is thought that the aggregation and condensation of the organosilicon compounds (C) can be suppressed. The effect of being superior can also be produced.
  • non-fluorine-based solvent that is, the solvent (D2) containing no F atom
  • water alcohol-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, ether-based solvents, hydrocarbon-based solvents, ester-based solvents, and the like
  • solvent (D2) containing no F atom water, alcohol-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, ether-based solvents, hydrocarbon-based solvents, ester-based solvents, and the like.
  • Alcohol solvents include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol (isopropyl alcohol), 1-butanol and the like.
  • Ketone solvents include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, and the like.
  • Ether solvents include diethyl ether, dipropyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane and the like.
  • hydrocarbon solvents include aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents such as pentane and hexane, alicyclic hydrocarbon solvents such as cyclohexane, and aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as benzene, toluene, and xylene.
  • Ester-based solvents include ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, amyl acetate, and isoamyl acetate.
  • non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) only one type may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • the non-fluorine solvent (D2) preferably contains at least one of an alcohol solvent, a ketone solvent, and an ester solvent, and more preferably contains an alcohol solvent. Along with the alcohol solvent, the ester solvent and / Or it is more preferable to contain a ketone solvent.
  • the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) contains an alcohol-based solvent, condensation between the organosilicon compounds (C) can be easily suppressed.
  • the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) contains an alcohol-based solvent and an ester-based solvent
  • the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) contains an alcohol-based solvent and a ketone-based solvent
  • the abrasion resistance of the obtained film is improved.
  • a uniform film with good appearance can be obtained.
  • the amount (mass ratio) of the alcohol-based solvent with respect to 100% by mass of the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably It is 60% by mass or more, more preferably 75% by mass or more, and may be 100% by mass or 90% by mass or less.
  • the amount (mass ratio) of the ester-based solvent with respect to 100% by mass of the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably It is 5% by mass or more, more preferably 8% by mass or more, and may be 15% by mass or less, or may be 13% by mass or less.
  • the amount (mass ratio) of the ketone-based solvent with respect to 100% by mass of the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably It is 5% by mass or more, more preferably 8% by mass or more, and may be 15% by mass or less, or may be 13% by mass or less.
  • the amount (mass ratio) of the non-fluorinated solvent (D2) with respect to 100% by mass of the mixed composition is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, and still more preferably 13% by mass or more,
  • the upper limit may be, for example, 30% by mass or 25% by mass.
  • the total amount should be within the above range.
  • the distance Ra between the Hansen solubility parameter (HSP, hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "HSP") of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) obtained by the following formula (E.1) is preferably a predetermined value or more.
  • the Hansen solubility parameter divides the solubility parameter introduced by Hildebrand into three components: the dispersion term ( ⁇ D), the polar term ( ⁇ P), and the hydrogen bonding term ( ⁇ H). It is represented.
  • the dispersion term ( ⁇ D) indicates the effect of the dispersion force
  • the polar term ( ⁇ P) indicates the effect of the dipole force
  • the hydrogen bond term ( ⁇ H) indicates the effect of the hydrogen bond force.
  • Hansen Solubility Parameters The definition and calculation of the Hansen Solubility Parameters are described in Charles M. Hansen, Hansen Solubility Parameters: A Users Handbook (CRC Press, 2007). In addition, by using the computer software Hansen Solubility Parameters in Practice (HSPiP), the Hansen Solubility Parameters can be easily estimated from the chemical structure of compounds for which literature values are not known. Furthermore, for compounds for which literature values are unknown, it is possible to calculate the Hansen solubility parameter by using the melting sphere method described later.
  • HSPiP version 5.2.05 was used for solvents registered in the database. Hansen Solubility Parameters were calculated using the values of Hansen Solubility Parameters, and for unregistered solvents, the dissolving ball method described later was used.
  • the dissolving sphere method is a method for calculating the Hansen solubility parameter of a target substance, in which the target substance is dissolved or dispersed in many different solvents whose Hansen solubility parameters
  • the type of solvent used in the solubility test is preferably selected so that the total value of the HSP dispersion term, polar term and hydrogen bonding term of each solvent varies widely between solvents, more specifically, preferably It is preferable to evaluate using 10 or more solvents, more preferably 15 or more solvents, and still more preferably 17 or more solvents.
  • solubility sphere that is a sphere with a minimum radius is searched for, and the central coordinates of the sphere are used as the Hansen solubility parameter of the object. Evaluation of solubility and dispersibility is carried out by visually determining whether or not the target substance is dissolved in the solvent and whether or not it is dispersed.
  • the target substance If the mixture of the target substance and the solvent becomes cloudy, the target substance precipitates, or the target substance and the solvent separate into layers, it can be determined that the target substance is not dissolved or dispersed in the solvent.
  • a specific method for the solubility test will be described in detail in the Examples section.
  • the Hansen Solubility Parameters of some other solvent that was not used to determine the Hansen Solubility Parameters of the object was ( ⁇ d, ⁇ p, ⁇ h)
  • the point indicated by the coordinates would be inside the solubility sphere of the object.
  • the solvent is believed to dissolve or disperse the object.
  • the coordinate point is outside the solubility sphere of the target, the solvent is considered incapable of dissolving and dispersing the target.
  • the distance Ra1 between the fluorinated solvent (D1) and the non-fluorinated solvent (D2) in the Hansen solubility parameter obtained by the following formula (E.1) is preferably 5.2 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more. , more preferably 5.5 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more, still more preferably 7 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more, and the distance Ra1 is, for example, 25 (J/cm 3 ). 0.5 or less.
  • ⁇ D1 dispersion term (J/cm 3 ) of Hansen solubility parameter of fluorine-based solvent (D1) 0.5
  • ⁇ D2 dispersion term (J/cm 3 ) of Hansen solubility parameter of non-fluorine solvent (D2) 0.5
  • ⁇ P1 the polar term of the Hansen solubility parameter (J/cm 3 ) of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) 0.5
  • ⁇ P2 the polar term of the Hansen solubility parameter (J/cm 3 ) of the non-fluorinated solvent (D2) 0.5
  • ⁇ H1 Hydrogen bond term (J/cm 3 ) of Hansen solubility parameter of fluorine-based solvent (D1) 0.5
  • ⁇ H2 Hydrogen bond term (J/cm 3 ) of Hansen solubility parameter of non-fluorinated solvent (D2) is 0.5
  • J/cm 3 Hydrogen bond term of Hansen solubility parameter of fluorine-based solvent (D
  • the distance Ra1 of the Hansen solubility parameter described above is the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D1). Any of the combinations selected one by one from the fluorinated solvent (D2) may satisfy the above range.
  • ⁇ D1, ⁇ P1, and ⁇ H1 of each fluorine-based solvent and the volume fraction of each fluorine-based solvent with respect to the total fluorine-based solvent are used to determine ⁇ D1total and ⁇ P1total of the entire fluorine-based solvent. and ⁇ H1total can be determined.
  • ⁇ D1total can be obtained based on the following formula (E.2), and ⁇ P1total and ⁇ H1total can also be obtained in the same manner.
  • ⁇ D1 i is the value of ⁇ D1 for each fluorine-based solvent when there are multiple types of fluorine-based solvents (D1)
  • n is the number of types of fluorine-based solvents (D1)
  • X i is the volume fraction of each fluorinated solvent to the total fluorinated solvent.
  • the distance Ra′ between the HSP of the entire fluorine-based solvent and the HSP of the entire non-fluorine-based solvent can be obtained.
  • the distance Ra' is preferably 15 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or less, and may be 11 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more.
  • the distance Ra2 of the Hansen solubility parameter between the organosilicon compound (C) and the non-fluorine solvent (D2) obtained by the following formula (E.3) is 0.5 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more. is preferably 1.0 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more, more preferably 2.0 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more, and for example 10 (J/cm 3 ) 0 0.5 or less, preferably 8 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or less, more preferably 7 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or less.
  • ⁇ DC dispersion term (J/cm 3 ) of the Hansen solubility parameter of the organosilicon compound (C) 0.5
  • ⁇ D2 dispersion term (J/cm 3 ) of Hansen solubility parameter of non-fluorine solvent (D2) 0.5
  • ⁇ PC the polar term of the Hansen solubility parameter of the organosilicon compound (C) (J/cm 3 ) 0.5
  • ⁇ P2 the polar term of the Hansen solubility parameter (J/cm 3 ) of the non-fluorinated solvent (D2) 0.5
  • ⁇ HC hydrogen bond term of Hansen solubility parameter of organosilicon compound (C) (J/cm 3 ) 0.5
  • ⁇ H2 Hydrogen bonding term of Hansen solubility parameter of non-fluorinated solvent (D2) ((J/cm 3 ) is 0.5 )
  • the Hansen solubility parameter of the organosilicon compound (C) can be determined by the same method as the method for determining the Hansen solubility parameter of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) described above.
  • the Hansen solubility parameter of the organosilicon compound (C) is calculated by using the above-described dissolving ball method.
  • the HSP values ( ⁇ DC, ⁇ PC, ⁇ HC) of the organosilicon compound (C) calculated by the melting ball method are used as they are, but the organosilicon compound (C ), it is calculated from the HSP values ( ⁇ DC, ⁇ PC, ⁇ HC) of each organosilicon compound (C) and the volume fraction of each organosilicon compound (C) with respect to all the organosilicon compounds (C).
  • .delta.DC, .delta.PC and .delta.HC of the entire organosilicon compound (C) are used.
  • ⁇ DC when multiple types of organosilicon compounds (C) are used can be determined based on the following formula (E.4), and ⁇ PC and ⁇ HC when multiple types of organosilicon compounds (C) are used are similarly determined. be able to.
  • ⁇ DCi is the value of the dispersion term ( ⁇ D) of each organosilicon compound (C) when there are multiple types of organosilicon compounds (C)
  • n is the type of the organosilicon compound (C)
  • XCi is the volume fraction of each organosilicon compound (C) to all organosilicon compounds (C).
  • the mass ratio of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) to the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, still more preferably 100% by mass or more, and 200% by mass or more. , 240% by mass or more, 280% by mass or more, or 300% by mass or more. Further, the mass ratio of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) to the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is, for example, 3000% by mass or less, 2000% by mass or less, 1000% by mass or less, 800% by mass or less, 700% by mass or less, 600% by mass. % or less, or 500% by mass or less.
  • the mass ratio of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) to the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is particularly preferably 240% by mass or more and 800% by mass or less, 280% by mass or more and 700% by mass or less, or 300% by mass or more and 600% by mass or less. . If the mass ratio of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) to the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is too small, the wear resistance may decrease, whereas if it is too large, the appearance may be impaired.
  • Organosilicon compound (B) The mixed composition may further contain an organosilicon compound (B) represented by the following formula (b1).
  • the mixed composition contains the organic silicon compound (A), the organic silicon compound (B), the organic silicon compound (C), and preferably a solvent. It includes those obtained by mixing them and undergoing reaction during storage, for example.
  • the organosilicon compound (B) is present between the organosilicon compounds (A) in the film and has the effect of improving the slideability of water droplets and the like.
  • the organosilicon compound (B) has a hydrolyzable group or a hydroxy group represented by A2 , as described later. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an acetoxy group and an isocyanate group.
  • Rf b10 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom
  • R b11 , R b12 , R b13 , and R b14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R b11 are present, the plurality of R b11 are different from each other.
  • the plurality of R b12 may be different, when there are a plurality of R b13 , a plurality of R b13 may be different, and when there is a plurality of R b14 a plurality of R b14 may be different, Rf b11 , Rf b12 , Rf b13 and Rf b14 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf b11 are present When there is a plurality of Rf b11, the plurality of Rf b11 may be different, when there are a plurality of Rf b12 , the plurality of Rf b12 may be different, and when there is a plurality of Rf b13 , the plurality of Rf b13 may be different.
  • Each Rf b10 is independently preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms).
  • R b11 , R b12 , R b13 and R b14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • R b15 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • A2 is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a halogen atom, more preferably a methoxy group, an ethoxy group or a chlorine atom.
  • b11 is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-25, still more preferably 1-10, particularly preferably 1-5, most preferably 1-2.
  • b12 is preferably 0-15, more preferably 0-10.
  • b13 is preferably 0-5, more preferably 0-2.
  • b14 is preferably 0-4, more preferably 0-2.
  • b15 is preferably 0-4, more preferably 0-2.
  • c is preferably 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
  • the total value of b11, b12, b13, b14, and b15 is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, still more preferably 5 or more, and preferably 80 or less, more preferably 50 or less, and still more preferably 20. It is below.
  • Rf b10 is a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms
  • both R b11 and R b12 are hydrogen atoms
  • A2 is a methoxy group or an ethoxy group
  • b11 is 1 to 5
  • b12 is 0 to 5
  • b13, b14, and b15 are all 0, and c is 3.
  • Specific examples of the compounds represented by the above formula (b1) include C j F 2j+1 -Si-(OCH 3 ) 3 and C j F 2j+1 -Si-(OC 2 H 5 ) 3 (where j is 1 to 12). integers), among which C 4 F 9 —Si—(OC 2 H 5 ) 3 , C 6 F 13 —Si—(OC 2 H 5 ) 3 , C 7 F 15 —Si—(OC 2H5 ) 3 , C8F17 - Si- ( OC2H5 ) 3 are preferred.
  • CF3CH2O ( CH2 ) kSiCl3 CF3CH2O ( CH2 ) kSi ( OCH3 ) 3 , CF3CH2O ( CH2 ) kSi ( OC2H5 ) 3 , CF3 ( CH2 )2Si( CH3 ) 2 ( CH2 ) kSiCl3 , CF3 ( CH2 ) 2Si(CH3)2 ( CH2 ) kSi ( OCH3) 3 , CF3 ( CH2 )2Si( CH3 ) 2 ( CH2 ) kSi ( OC2H5 ) 3 , CF3 ( CH2 ) 6Si ( CH3 ) 2 ( CH2 ) kSiCl3 , CF3 ( CH2 ) 6Si ( CH3 ) 2 ( CH2 ) kSiCl3 , CF3 ( CH2 ) 6Si ( CH3 ) 2 ( CH2 ) kS
  • CF 3 (CF 2 ) m —(CH 2 ) n SiCl 3 , CF 3 (CF 2 ) m — (CH 2 ) n Si(OCH 3 ) 3 , CF 3 (CF 2 ) m —(CH 2 ) n Si(OC 2 H 5 ) 3 may also be mentioned (where m is 0 to 10, preferably 0 to 7, n is 1 to 5, preferably 2 to 4). ).
  • R 60 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms
  • R 61 is an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms
  • R 62 is an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the amount (mass ratio) of the organosilicon compound (B) with respect to 100% by mass of the mixed composition is, for example, 0.1% by mass or more, preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and 15% by mass or less. It is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or less.
  • the mixed composition of the present invention comprises an organosilicon compound (A), an organosilicon compound (C), preferably a solvent (fluorinated solvent (D1) and non-fluorinated solvent (D2)), and optionally
  • the reaction may have progressed.
  • it includes a compound whose degradable group is a —SiOH group by hydrolysis.
  • the mixed composition may contain a condensate of the organosilicon compound (B), and the condensate may be a —SiOH group possessed by the organosilicon compound (B) or an organosilicon compound produced by hydrolysis ( Condensates formed by dehydration condensation of —SiOH groups of B) with —SiOH groups derived from the organosilicon compound (B) or —SiOH groups derived from other compounds are exemplified.
  • the total amount of the organosilicon compound (A) and the organosilicon compound (C) is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and still more preferably 7% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the mixed composition. or more, and may be 40% by mass or less, or may be 30% by mass or less.
  • the mixed composition contains the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C), a preferably used solvent, and additives other than the organosilicon compound (B) within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention.
  • additives other than the organosilicon compound (B) within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention.
  • silanol condensation catalysts antioxidants, rust inhibitors, UV absorbers, light stabilizers, anti-mold agents, antibacterial agents, antiviral agents, anti-biofouling agents, deodorants, pigments, flame retardants
  • additives such as antistatic agents and resins may be mixed.
  • the amount (mass ratio) of the additive is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, relative to 100% by mass of the mixed composition.
  • the amount (mass ratio) of the resin is preferably less than 1% by mass, more preferably 0% with respect to 100% by mass of the mixed composition (including the solvent). .5% by mass or less, and may be 0% by mass.
  • the amount of the additive (mass ratio) is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and still more preferably 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the total solid content in the mixed composition. % by mass or less, particularly preferably 4% by mass or less.
  • the amount (mass ratio) of the resin in particular is 30% by mass or less, 20% by mass or less, 10% by mass or less, or 4% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the total solid content in the mixed composition. % or less, preferably less than 4% by mass or 2% by mass or less, and may be 0% by mass.
  • the ratios of the additives and the resin to the total amount of solids mentioned above are equal to those ratios in the water-repellent layer.
  • each compound is not limited. It is preferable to prepare each solution (p1) in which the system solvent (D2) is mixed, and to mix the solutions (r1) and (p1).
  • the present invention is a laminate comprising the water-repellent layer (r) and the base material (s), and the material of the base material (s) of the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be either an organic material or an inorganic material. Also, the shape of the substrate may be flat, curved, or a combination of these.
  • organic materials include acrylic resins, acrylonitrile resins, polycarbonate resins, polyester resins (such as polyethylene terephthalate), styrene resins, cellulose resins, polyolefin resins, vinyl resins (such as polyethylene, polyvinyl chloride (that is, vinyl chloride resin), vinylbenzyl chloride resin, polyvinyl alcohol, etc.), polyvinylidene chloride resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, polyetherimide resin, polyethersulfone resin, polysulfone resin, polyvinyl alcohol resin, polyvinyl acetal resin and thermoplastic resins such as these copolymers; resins such as thermosetting resins such as phenolic resins, urea resins, melamine resins, epoxy resins, unsaturated polyesters, silicone resins and urethane resins.
  • inorganic materials include metals such as iron, silicon, copper, zinc, and aluminum, alloys containing these metals, ceramics,
  • inorganic particles organic particles, rubber particles in the substrate (s), and also colorants such as pigments and dyes, fluorescent brighteners, dispersants, plasticizers, heat stabilizers, light stabilizers.
  • colorants such as pigments and dyes, fluorescent brighteners, dispersants, plasticizers, heat stabilizers, light stabilizers.
  • Ingredients such as agents, infrared absorbers, ultraviolet absorbers, antistatic agents, antioxidants, lubricants and solvents may also be incorporated.
  • the thickness of the substrate (s) is, for example, 5 ⁇ m or more, preferably 10 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 20 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 30 ⁇ m or more, and may be 8 mm or less, preferably 7 mm or less, It is more preferably 6.5 mm or less, still more preferably 6 mm or less.
  • Layer (X) In the laminate of the present invention, it is preferable that the substrate (s) and the water-repellent layer (r) are laminated via a layer (X) different from the substrate (s) and the water-repellent layer (r). .
  • the layer (X) include layers formed from at least one selected from the group (X1) consisting of active energy ray-curable resins and thermosetting resins.
  • the active energy ray is defined as an energy ray capable of decomposing a compound that generates active species to generate active species. Active energy rays include visible light, ultraviolet rays, infrared rays, X-rays, ⁇ rays, ⁇ rays, ⁇ rays, electron beams, and the like.
  • the active energy curable resins include acrylic resins, epoxy resins, oxetane resins, urethane resins, polyamide resins, vinylbenzyl chloride resins, vinyl resins (polyethylene, vinyl chloride resins, etc.), and styrene resins.
  • UV-curable resins such as resins, phenolic resins, vinyl ether-based resins, silicone-based resins, or mixed resins thereof, and electron beam-curable resins are included, and UV-curable resins are particularly preferred.
  • the layer (X) at least one selected from the group (X2) consisting of titanium oxide, zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, niobium oxide, tantalum oxide, lanthanum oxide, and SiO2 Layers that are formed can also be mentioned.
  • group (X1) acrylic resins, silicone resins, styrene resins, vinyl chloride resins, polyamide resins, phenol resins, and epoxy resins are particularly preferred.
  • SiO 2 is preferred for group (X2).
  • the thickness of the layer (X) is, for example, 0.1 nm or more and 100 ⁇ m or less, preferably 1 nm or more and 60 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1 nm or more and 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • Hard coat layer (hc) When the layer (X) is formed from at least one selected from the group (X1), the layer (X) can function as a hard coat layer (hc) having surface hardness, and the substrate (s ) can be imparted with scratch resistance.
  • the hard coat layer (hc) generally has a pencil hardness of B or higher, preferably HB or higher, more preferably H or higher, and even more preferably 2H or higher.
  • the hard coat layer (hc) may have a single layer structure or a multilayer structure.
  • the hard coat layer (hc) preferably contains, for example, the above-described UV-curable resin, and particularly preferably contains an acrylic resin or a silicone resin. is preferred. It is also preferable to contain an epoxy-based resin, since there is a tendency that the adhesion between the substrate (s) and the film (r) is improved. A specific method for forming the active energy ray-curable resin and the thermosetting resin constituting the group (X1) will be described later in the column of the display device.
  • the hard coat layer (hc) may contain additives.
  • Additives are not limited and include inorganic microparticles, organic microparticles, or mixtures thereof.
  • additives include ultraviolet absorbers, silica, metal oxides such as alumina, and inorganic fillers such as polyorganosiloxane.
  • the thickness of the hard coat layer (hc) is, for example, 1 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less, preferably 2 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thickness of the hard coat layer (hc) is 1 ⁇ m or more, sufficient scratch resistance can be ensured, and when it is 100 ⁇ m or less, flex resistance can be ensured, and as a result, curling due to curing shrinkage can be suppressed. becomes.
  • Antireflection layer (ar) When the layer (X) is formed from at least one selected from the group (X2), the layer (X) can function as an antireflection layer (ar) that prevents reflection of incident light. When the layer (X) contains an antireflection layer (ar), the antireflection layer (ar) is a layer exhibiting reflection characteristics in which the reflectance is reduced to about 5.0% or less in the visible light region of 380 to 780 nm. is preferably Layer (X) preferably comprises a layer formed from SiO2 .
  • the structure of the antireflection layer (ar) is not particularly limited, and may be a single layer structure or a multilayer structure. In the case of a multilayer structure, a structure in which low refractive index layers and high refractive index layers are alternately laminated is preferable, and the number of laminated layers is preferably 2 to 20 in total.
  • Materials constituting the high refractive index layer include titanium oxide, zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, niobium oxide, tantalum oxide and lanthanum oxide, and silica is a material constituting the low refractive index layer. mentioned.
  • the multi-layered antireflection layer has a structure in which SiO 2 (silica) and ZrO 2 or SiO 2 and Nb 2 O 5 are alternately laminated, and the outermost layer on the side opposite to the substrate (s) is SiO 2 . is preferred.
  • the antireflection layer (ar) can be formed by vapor deposition, for example.
  • the thickness of the antireflection layer (ar) is, for example, 0.1 nm to 5 ⁇ m.
  • the layer (X) may contain both the hard coat layer (hc) and the antireflection layer (ar).
  • the laminate of the present invention comprises the substrate (s), the hard It is preferable that the coat layer (hc), the antireflection layer (ar), and the film (r) are laminated in this order.
  • the layer (X) is formed from at least one selected from the group (X1), for example, the mixture composition constituting the layer (X) is applied to the substrate (s), and heat, ultraviolet rays, etc.
  • the layer (X) can be formed by curing with an active energy ray of .
  • the layer (X) can be formed, for example, by a vapor deposition method.
  • the laminate of the present invention is produced by forming the above-described layer (X) on the substrate (s) as necessary, and then vapor-depositing and curing the mixed composition after heating. can be formed.
  • the degree of vacuum is, for example, about 2.0 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 Pa or less.
  • a heating method for vapor deposition either a resistance heating method or an electron beam heating method may be used, and the heating temperature is, for example, 100 to 400.degree.
  • the film formation time is, for example, about 1 to 90 seconds.
  • the hydrolyzable group possessed by the organosilicon compound (A) is hydrolyzed by taking in moisture in the air, followed by dehydration condensation, or in a preferred embodiment, the —SiOH group possessed by the organosilicon compound (A). By dehydration condensation, siloxane bonds are formed and a cured film can be obtained.
  • the humidity condition during standing at room temperature or during heating may be 50 to 90% RH.
  • the water-repellent layer (r) After forming the water-repellent layer (r), it may be left vapor-deposited, or it may be subjected to a predetermined post-treatment, and the abrasion resistance of the film can be further improved by the post-treatment.
  • Post-treatments include heating and holding, standing in a humidified atmosphere, ultrasonic cleaning, and wiping the surface with a cloth containing a solvent or a dry cloth. These post-treatments are performed alone. may be used, or two or more may be used in combination. Among these, heating and holding, ultrasonic cleaning, and wiping the surface with a dry cloth are particularly preferred. Heating may be maintained at, for example, 100 to 200° C. for 10 to 60 minutes.
  • Ultrasonic cleaning may be performed using, for example, water, a fluorinated solvent, or alcohol as a cleaning liquid for about 1 to 5 minutes. Wiping the surface can be done several times. From the viewpoint of further increasing wear resistance, it is preferable to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or perform ultrasonic cleaning after heating and holding. By heating and holding, the interaction between any of the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C), the substrate (s), or the layer (X) changes to a state with higher durability. expected to do so. Wiping the surface also removes the excess, resulting in a smoother, cleaner film. On such films, lower resistance during abrasion testing is expected and higher abrasion resistance is expected.
  • the substrate (s) or the layer (X) provided on the substrate (s) it is preferable to subject the substrate (s) or the layer (X) provided on the substrate (s) to an easy-adhesion treatment before vapor-depositing the mixed composition.
  • Hydrophilic treatment such as corona treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet treatment, etc.
  • Functional groups such as OH groups (especially when the base material is an epoxy resin) or COOH groups (especially when the base material is an acrylic resin) on the surface of the base material by performing adhesion treatment such as plasma treatment. can be formed, and the adhesion between the substrate (s) or the layer (X) and the water-repellent layer (r) is further improved.
  • the laminate of the present invention is suitably used for a display device.
  • the laminate of the present invention can preferably be used as a front panel in a display device, and the front panel is sometimes called a window film.
  • the display device preferably comprises a display device laminate containing a window film (that is, the laminate of the present invention) and an organic EL display panel. body is placed.
  • the laminate for a flexible display device including a window film having flexible properties and an organic EL display panel are provided.
  • a laminate is arranged and configured to be foldable.
  • the laminate for a display device (preferably a laminate for a flexible display device) may further contain a polarizing plate (preferably a circularly polarizing plate), a touch sensor, etc. to constitute a touch panel display, and the order of lamination thereof is arbitrary.
  • the layers are laminated in the order of the window film, the polarizing plate and the touch sensor, or in the order of the window film, the touch sensor and the polarizing plate from the viewing side.
  • the polarizing plate is present on the viewing side of the touch sensor, the pattern of the touch sensor becomes less visible and the visibility of the displayed image is improved, which is preferable.
  • Each member can be laminated using an adhesive, a pressure-sensitive adhesive, or the like.
  • the flexible display device may include a light shielding pattern formed on at least one surface of any one of the window film, the polarizing plate, and the touch sensor.
  • the window film is arranged on the viewing side of the display device (preferably the flexible image display device) and plays a role of protecting other components from external shocks or environmental changes such as temperature and humidity.
  • Glass may be used as such a protective layer, and in a flexible image display device, a material having flexible properties may be used for the window film instead of being rigid and hard like glass. Therefore, when the laminate of the present invention is used as a window film in a flexible display device, the substrate (s) preferably has a layer made of a flexible transparent substrate, and the substrate (s) is at least one of It may have a multi-layer structure in which a hard coat layer is laminated on the surface.
  • the transparent substrate has a visible light transmittance of, for example, 70% or more, preferably 80% or more.
  • Any transparent polymer film can be used as the transparent substrate.
  • polyolefins such as polyethylene, polypropylene, polymethylpentene, norbornene, or cycloolefin derivatives having a monomer unit containing cycloolefin, (modified) cellulose such as diacetyl cellulose, triacetyl cellulose, and propionyl cellulose acrylics such as methyl methacrylate (co)polymers, polystyrenes such as styrene (co)polymers, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymers, acrylonitrile-styrene copolymers, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers Polyvinyl chlorides, polyvinylidene chlorides, polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene n
  • polymers can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • transparent substrates described above preferred are polyamide films, polyamideimide films, polyimide films, polyester films, olefin films, acrylic films, and cellulose films, which are excellent in transparency and heat resistance. It is also preferable to disperse inorganic particles such as silica, organic fine particles, rubber particles, etc. in the polymer film.
  • colorants such as pigments and dyes, optical brighteners, dispersants, plasticizers, heat stabilizers, light stabilizers, infrared absorbers, ultraviolet absorbers, antistatic agents, antioxidants, lubricants, solvents, etc. may contain a compounding agent.
  • the thickness of the transparent substrate is 5 ⁇ m or more and 200 ⁇ m or less, preferably 20 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less. Particularly when used in a flexible image display device, the thickness of the transparent substrate is preferably 5 ⁇ m or more and 60 ⁇ m or less.
  • the hard coat layer when the laminate of the present invention is used as a window film is also the same as the hard coat layer (hc) described above.
  • the hard coat layer (hc) is preferably formed from an active energy ray-curable resin and a thermosetting resin. It can be formed by curing a hardcoat composition containing the forming reactive material.
  • the hard coat composition contains at least one polymer of a radically polymerizable compound and a cationic polymerizable compound.
  • the radically polymerizable compound is a compound having a radically polymerizable group.
  • the radically polymerizable group possessed by the radically polymerizable compound may be any functional group capable of causing a radical polymerization reaction, and examples thereof include a group containing a carbon-carbon unsaturated double bond. Specific examples include a vinyl group and a (meth)acryloyl group.
  • these radically polymerizable groups may be the same or different.
  • the number of radically polymerizable groups in one molecule of the radically polymerizable compound is preferably two or more from the viewpoint of improving the hardness of the hard coat layer.
  • the radically polymerizable compound is preferably a compound having a (meth)acryloyl group from the viewpoint of high reactivity, and a polyfunctional acrylate monomer having 2 to 6 (meth)acryloyl groups in one molecule.
  • Compounds called epoxy (meth) acrylate, urethane (meth) acrylate, polyester (meth) acrylate and oligomers having several (meth) acryloyl groups in the molecule and having a molecular weight of several hundred to several thousand are preferred. Available. It preferably contains one or more selected from epoxy (meth)acrylate, urethane (meth)acrylate and polyester (meth)acrylate.
  • the cationically polymerizable compound is a compound having a cationically polymerizable group such as an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, or a vinyl ether group.
  • the number of cationically polymerizable groups in one molecule of the cationically polymerizable compound is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, from the viewpoint of improving the hardness of the hard coat layer.
  • a compound having at least one of an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group as a cationically polymerizable group is preferable.
  • a cyclic ether group such as an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group is preferable from the viewpoint that shrinkage accompanying a polymerization reaction is small.
  • compounds having epoxy groups are readily available in various structures, do not adversely affect the durability of the resulting hard coat layer, and are easy to control compatibility with radically polymerizable compounds. There is an advantage.
  • the oxetanyl group tends to have a higher degree of polymerization than the epoxy group, is less toxic, accelerates the network formation rate obtained from the cationically polymerizable compound in the resulting hard coat layer, and radicals It has the advantage of forming an independent network without leaving unreacted monomers in the film even in a region where the polymerizable compound is mixed.
  • Examples of cationic polymerizable compounds having an epoxy group include polyglycidyl ethers of polyhydric alcohols having an alicyclic ring, or compounds containing cyclohexene rings or cyclopentene rings, which are treated with a suitable oxidizing agent such as hydrogen peroxide or peracid.
  • Alicyclic epoxy resin obtained by epoxidation polyglycidyl ether of aliphatic polyhydric alcohol or its alkylene oxide adduct, polyglycidyl ester of aliphatic long-chain polybasic acid, homopolymer of glycidyl (meth)acrylate, Aliphatic epoxy resins such as copolymers; bisphenols such as bisphenol A, bisphenol F and hydrogenated bisphenol A, or derivatives such as alkylene oxide adducts and caprolactone adducts thereof, and glycidyl ethers produced by reaction with epichlorohydrin, and glycidyl ether type epoxy resins derived from bisphenols such as novolak epoxy resins.
  • the hard coat composition may further include a polymerization initiator.
  • the polymerization initiator include radical polymerization initiators, cationic polymerization initiators, radical and cationic polymerization initiators, etc., and can be appropriately selected and used. These polymerization initiators are decomposed by at least one of active energy ray irradiation and heating to generate radicals or cations to promote radical polymerization and cationic polymerization.
  • Any radical polymerization initiator may be used as long as it can release a substance that initiates radical polymerization by at least one of active energy ray irradiation and heating.
  • thermal radical polymerization initiators include organic peroxides such as hydrogen peroxide and perbenzoic acid, and azo compounds such as azobisbutyronitrile.
  • active energy ray radical polymerization initiators Type 1 type radical polymerization initiators that generate radicals by decomposition of molecules and Type 2 type radical polymerization initiators that generate radicals by hydrogen abstraction type reaction in coexistence with tertiary amines are used. Yes, they can be used alone or in combination.
  • the cationic polymerization initiator should be capable of releasing a substance that initiates cationic polymerization by at least one of active energy ray irradiation and heating.
  • cationic polymerization initiators aromatic iodonium salts, aromatic sulfonium salts, cyclopentadienyl iron (II) complexes and the like can be used. These can initiate cationic polymerization by either or both of active energy ray irradiation and heating depending on the difference in structure.
  • the polymerization initiator can be included in an amount of 0.1 to 10% by weight with respect to 100% by weight of the hard coat composition as a whole. If the content of the polymerization initiator is less than 0.1% by weight, curing may not proceed sufficiently, and it may be difficult to realize the mechanical properties and adhesion of the finally obtained coating film. If the content is more than % by weight, adhesion failure, cracking, and curling may occur due to cure shrinkage.
  • the hard coat composition may further contain one or more selected from the group consisting of solvents and additives.
  • the solvent is capable of dissolving or dispersing the polymerizable compound and the polymerization initiator, and any solvent known as a solvent for hard coat compositions in this technical field can be used without limitation.
  • the additives may further include inorganic particles, leveling agents, stabilizers, surfactants, antistatic agents, lubricants, antifouling agents, and the like.
  • the display device (preferably flexible display device) of the present invention preferably includes a polarizing plate, especially a circularly polarizing plate.
  • a circularly polarizing plate is a functional layer having a function of transmitting only a right-handed or left-handed circularly polarized light component by laminating a ⁇ /4 retardation plate on a linearly polarizing plate. For example, by converting external light into right-handed circularly polarized light and blocking the left-handed circularly polarized light reflected by the organic EL panel, and allowing only the luminescent component of the organic EL to pass through, the effect of the reflected light is suppressed to create an image. used to make it easier to see.
  • the absorption axis of the linear polarizer and the slow axis of the ⁇ /4 retardation plate should theoretically be 45 degrees, but in practice they are 45 ⁇ 10 degrees.
  • the linear polarizing plate and the ⁇ /4 retardation plate do not necessarily have to be laminated adjacent to each other as long as the relationship between the absorption axis and the slow axis satisfies the above range.
  • the circularly polarizing plate in the present invention also includes an elliptically polarizing plate. It is also preferable to further laminate a ⁇ /4 retardation film on the visible side of the linear polarizing plate to circularly polarize the emitted light, thereby improving the visibility when wearing polarized sunglasses.
  • a linear polarizer is a functional layer that passes light oscillating in the direction of the transmission axis, but blocks the polarization of the oscillating component perpendicular to it.
  • the linear polarizing plate may have a configuration including a linear polarizer alone or a linear polarizer and a protective film attached to at least one surface of the linear polarizer.
  • the thickness of the linear polarizing plate may be 200 ⁇ m or less, preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less. When the thickness of the linear polarizing plate is within the above range, the flexibility of the linear polarizing plate tends to be less likely to decrease.
  • the linear polarizer may be a film-type polarizer manufactured by dyeing and stretching a polyvinyl alcohol (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as PVA) film.
  • a dichroic dye such as iodine is adsorbed on a PVA-based film that has been oriented by stretching, or the film is stretched while adsorbed to PVA, thereby aligning the dichroic dye and exhibiting polarizing performance.
  • the production of the film-type polarizer may include other steps such as swelling, cross-linking with boric acid, washing with an aqueous solution, and drying.
  • the stretching and dyeing processes may be carried out on the PVA-based film alone, or may be carried out while it is laminated with another film (stretching resin base material) such as polyethylene terephthalate.
  • the thickness of the PVA-based film used is preferably 3 to 100 ⁇ m, and the draw ratio is preferably 2 to 10 times.
  • a method for producing a laminate of a stretchable resin base material and a PVA-based resin layer a method of applying a coating liquid containing a PVA-based resin to the surface of the stretchable resin base material and drying it is preferable.
  • the manufacturing method includes the step of stretching and dyeing the PVA-based resin layer and the resin substrate for stretching in the state of a laminate, even if the PVA-based resin layer is thin, it is supported by the resin substrate for stretching.
  • the film can be stretched without problems such as breakage due to stretching.
  • the thickness of the polarizer is 20 ⁇ m or less, preferably 12 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 9 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 1 to 8 ⁇ m, particularly preferably 3 to 6 ⁇ m. If it is within the above range, it becomes a preferred embodiment without inhibiting bending.
  • the polarizer is a liquid crystal coated polarizer formed by applying a liquid crystal polarizing composition.
  • the liquid crystal polarizing composition may contain a liquid crystal compound and a dichroic dye compound.
  • the liquid crystalline compound only needs to have a property of exhibiting a liquid crystal state, and it is particularly preferable to have a high-order alignment state such as a smectic phase because high polarizing performance can be exhibited.
  • the liquid crystalline compound preferably has a polymerizable functional group.
  • the dichroic dye compound is a dye that exhibits dichroism by aligning with the liquid crystalline compound, and may have a polymerizable functional group, and the dichroic dye itself has liquid crystallinity.
  • the liquid crystal polarizing composition may further include an initiator, a solvent, a dispersant, a leveling agent, a stabilizer, a surfactant, a cross-linking agent, a silane coupling agent, and the like.
  • the liquid crystal polarizing layer is manufactured by coating a liquid crystal polarizing composition on an alignment film to form a liquid crystal polarizing layer.
  • the liquid crystal polarizing layer can be formed thinner than the film-type polarizer, and the thickness is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ m or more and 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the alignment film is produced, for example, by coating an alignment film-forming composition on a substrate and imparting alignment properties by rubbing, polarized light irradiation, or the like.
  • the alignment film-forming composition contains an alignment agent, and may further contain a solvent, a cross-linking agent, an initiator, a dispersant, a leveling agent, a silane coupling agent, and the like.
  • the alignment agent include polyvinyl alcohols, polyacrylates, polyamic acids, and polyimides.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer used as the alignment agent is, for example, about 10,000 to 1,000,000.
  • the thickness of the alignment film is preferably 5 nm or more and 10,000 nm or less, and more preferably 10 nm or more and 500 nm or less in terms of sufficiently expressing the alignment control force.
  • the liquid crystal polarizing layer can be laminated by peeling from the base material and transferring, or the base material can be laminated as it is. It is also preferable that the base material plays a role as a protective film, a retardation plate, or a transparent base material for a window film.
  • any transparent polymer film can be used, and the same materials and additives as those used for the transparent base material of the window film can be used.
  • Cellulose-based films, olefin-based films, acrylic films, and polyester-based films are preferred.
  • It may also be a coating-type protective film obtained by applying and curing a cationic curable composition such as an epoxy resin or a radical curable composition such as an acrylate.
  • the protective film may optionally contain plasticizers, ultraviolet absorbers, infrared absorbers, colorants such as pigments and dyes, fluorescent brighteners, dispersants, heat stabilizers, light stabilizers, antistatic agents, and antioxidants. , a lubricant, a solvent, and the like.
  • the thickness of the protective film is preferably 200 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less. When the thickness of the protective film is within the above range, the flexibility of the film tends to be less likely to decrease.
  • the protective film can also serve as the transparent base material of the window film.
  • the ⁇ /4 retardation plate is a film that provides a ⁇ /4 retardation in a direction (in-plane direction of the film) perpendicular to the traveling direction of incident light.
  • the ⁇ /4 retardation plate may be a stretched retardation plate manufactured by stretching a polymer film such as a cellulose-based film, an olefin-based film, or a polycarbonate-based film.
  • the ⁇ / 4 retardation plate if necessary, retardation modifiers, plasticizers, ultraviolet absorbers, infrared absorbers, colorants such as pigments and dyes, fluorescent brighteners, dispersants, heat stabilizers, light stabilizers agents, antistatic agents, antioxidants, lubricants, solvents, and the like.
  • the thickness of the stretched retardation plate is preferably 200 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ m or more and 100 ⁇ m or less. When the thickness of the stretched retardation plate is within the above range, the flexibility of the stretched retardation plate tends to be less likely to decrease.
  • the ⁇ /4 retardation plate is a liquid crystal coated retardation plate formed by coating a liquid crystal composition.
  • the liquid crystal composition includes a liquid crystal compound exhibiting a liquid crystal state such as nematic, cholesteric, or smectic.
  • the liquid crystalline compound has a polymerizable functional group.
  • the liquid crystal composition may further include an initiator, a solvent, a dispersant, a leveling agent, a stabilizer, a surfactant, a cross-linking agent, a silane coupling agent, and the like.
  • the liquid crystal-coated retardation plate can be produced by applying a liquid crystal composition on a base and curing to form a liquid crystal retardation layer in the same manner as the liquid crystal polarizing layer.
  • the liquid crystal coating type retardation plate can be formed thinner than the stretching type retardation plate.
  • the thickness of the liquid crystal polarizing layer is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ m or more and 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the liquid crystal-coated retardation plate can be laminated by peeling from the base material and transferred, or the base material can be laminated as it is. It is also preferable that the base material plays a role as a protective film, a retardation plate, or a transparent base material for a window film.
  • the in-plane retardation is preferably 100 nm or more so that it is ⁇ /4 around 560 nm where visibility is high. It is designed to be 180 nm or less, more preferably 130 nm or more and 150 nm or less.
  • a reverse-dispersion ⁇ /4 retardation plate using a material having a birefringence wavelength dispersion characteristic opposite to that of a normal one is preferable in terms of good visibility.
  • the stretched retardation plate for example, those described in JP-A-2007-232873 and the like for the stretched retardation plate, and those described in JP-A-2010-30979 and the like for the liquid crystal-coated retardation plate can be used.
  • a technique of obtaining a broadband ⁇ /4 retardation plate by combining with a ⁇ /2 retardation plate is also known (for example, JP-A-10-90521).
  • the ⁇ /2 retardation plate is also manufactured by a material method similar to that of the ⁇ /4 retardation plate.
  • the combination of the stretched retardation plate and the liquid crystal-coated retardation plate is arbitrary, but the thickness of both can be reduced by using the liquid crystal-coated retardation plate.
  • a method is known in which a positive C plate is laminated on the circularly polarizing plate in order to improve the visibility in the oblique direction (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-224837).
  • the positive C-plate may be either a liquid crystal-coated retardation plate or a stretched retardation plate.
  • the retardation in the thickness direction of the retardation plate is preferably ⁇ 200 nm or more and ⁇ 20 nm or less, more preferably ⁇ 140 nm or more and ⁇ 40 nm or less.
  • a display device preferably a flexible display device including the laminate of the present invention preferably includes a touch sensor as described above.
  • a touch sensor is used as an input means.
  • the touch sensor there are various types such as a resistive film type, a surface acoustic wave type, an infrared type, an electromagnetic induction type, and an electrostatic capacity type, and the capacitive type is preferred.
  • a capacitive touch sensor is divided into an active area and a non-active area located outside the active area. The active area is an area corresponding to the area (display part) where the screen is displayed on the display panel, and is an area where a user's touch is sensed. display area).
  • the touch sensor preferably includes a flexible substrate, a sensing pattern formed in an active region of the substrate, and an external driving circuit formed in a non-active region of the substrate through the sensing pattern and a pad portion.
  • each sensing line for connecting to a As the flexible substrate the same material as the transparent substrate of the window film can be used.
  • the substrate of the touch sensor preferably has a toughness of 2,000 MPa % or more from the viewpoint of suppressing cracks in the touch sensor. More preferably, the toughness is 2,000 MPa% or more and 30,000 MPa% or less.
  • the toughness is defined as the lower area of the stress-strain curve (Stress-strain curve) obtained through a tensile test of a polymer material up to the breaking point.
  • the sensing patterns may include first patterns formed in a first direction and second patterns formed in a second direction.
  • the first pattern and the second pattern are arranged in different directions.
  • the first pattern and the second pattern are formed in the same layer, and each pattern must be electrically connected to sense a touched point.
  • the first pattern has a form in which a plurality of unit patterns are connected to each other through joints, while the second pattern has a structure in which a plurality of unit patterns are separated from each other in an island form.
  • a separate bridge electrode is required for direct connection.
  • a well-known transparent electrode can be applied to the electrode for connection of the second pattern.
  • Materials for the transparent electrode include, for example, indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), zinc oxide (ZnO), indium zinc tin oxide (IZTO), and indium gallium zinc oxide (IGZO). , cadmium tin oxide (CTO), PEDOT (poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)), carbon nanotube (CNT), graphene, metal wire, etc., preferably ITO. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the metal used for the metal wire is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include silver, gold, aluminum, copper, iron, nickel, titanium,nium, chromium, etc. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. can be done.
  • a bridge electrode may be formed on the insulating layer above the sensing pattern with an insulating layer interposed therebetween, and the bridge electrode may be formed on the substrate, and the insulating layer and the sensing pattern may be formed thereon.
  • the bridge electrode may be made of the same material as the sensing pattern, and may be made of molybdenum, silver, aluminum, copper, palladium, gold, platinum, zinc, tin, titanium, or an alloy of two or more of these. can. Since the first pattern and the second pattern should be electrically insulated, an insulating layer is formed between the sensing pattern and the bridge electrode.
  • the insulating layer can be formed only between the joints and bridge electrodes of the first pattern, or can be formed as a layer covering the entire sensing pattern. In the case of a layer covering the entire sensing pattern, the bridge electrode can connect the second pattern through contact holes formed in the insulating layer.
  • the touch sensor is induced by a difference in transmittance between a patterned area where a sensing pattern is formed and a non-patterned area where no sensing pattern is formed, specifically by a difference in refractive index in these areas.
  • An optical adjustment layer may further be included between the substrate and the electrode as a means for properly compensating for differences in optical transmittance.
  • the optical modulating layer can comprise an inorganic insulating material or an organic insulating material.
  • the optical control layer may be formed by coating a photocurable composition containing a photocurable organic binder and a solvent on a substrate.
  • the photocurable composition may further include inorganic particles. The inorganic particles can increase the refractive index of the optical adjustment layer.
  • the photocurable organic binder includes a copolymer of each monomer such as an acrylate-based monomer, a styrene-based monomer, and a carboxylic acid-based monomer within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. be able to.
  • the photocurable organic binder may be, for example, a copolymer containing different repeating units such as epoxy group-containing repeating units, acrylate repeating units, and carboxylic acid repeating units.
  • examples of the inorganic particles include zirconia particles, titania particles, and alumina particles.
  • the photocurable composition may further include additives such as a photopolymerization initiator, a polymerizable monomer, and a curing aid.
  • each layer (window film, circularly polarizing plate, touch sensor) forming the laminate for the display device (preferably a flexible image display device) and film members (linear polarizing plate, ⁇ /4 retardation plate, etc.) constituting each layer are It can be joined with an adhesive.
  • the adhesive include water-based adhesives, organic solvent-based adhesives, solvent-free adhesives, solid adhesives, solvent volatile adhesives, moisture-curable adhesives, heat-curable adhesives, anaerobic-curable adhesives, and active energy ray-curable adhesives.
  • adhesives such as adhesives, curing agent-mixed adhesives, hot-melt adhesives, pressure-sensitive adhesives (adhesives), and rewetting adhesives can be used, preferably water-based solvent volatilization.
  • a type adhesive, an active energy ray-curable adhesive, and a pressure-sensitive adhesive can be used.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted according to the desired adhesive strength and the like, and is preferably 0.01 to 500 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 300 ⁇ m.
  • a plurality of adhesive layers are present in the laminate for a display device (preferably a flexible image display device), and the respective thicknesses and types may be the same or different.
  • water-based solvent volatilization adhesive water-soluble polymers such as polyvinyl alcohol-based polymers and starch, and polymers in a water-dispersed state such as ethylene-vinyl acetate-based emulsions and styrene-butadiene-based emulsions can be used as main polymers.
  • crosslinking agents silane compounds, ionic compounds, crosslinking catalysts, antioxidants, dyes, pigments, inorganic fillers, organic solvents, and the like may be added.
  • adhesion can be imparted by injecting the water-based solvent volatilization type adhesive between the layers to be adhered, laminating the layers to be adhered, and then drying.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 1 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness and type of each layer may be the same or different.
  • the active energy ray-curable adhesive can be formed by curing an active energy ray-curable composition containing a reactive material that forms an adhesive layer upon irradiation with an active energy ray.
  • the active energy ray-curable composition can contain at least one polymer of the same radically polymerizable compound and cationic polymerizable compound as those contained in the hard coat composition.
  • the radically polymerizable compound the same compound as the radically polymerizable compound in the hard coat composition can be used.
  • As the cationic polymerizable compound the same compound as the cationic polymerizable compound in the hard coat composition can be used.
  • Epoxy compounds are particularly preferred as the cationic polymerizable compound used in the active energy ray-curable composition. It is also preferred to contain a monofunctional compound as a reactive diluent in order to reduce the viscosity of the adhesive composition.
  • the active energy ray composition can contain a monofunctional compound to reduce viscosity.
  • the monofunctional compound include acrylate-based monomers having one (meth)acryloyl group in one molecule, compounds having one epoxy group or oxetanyl group in one molecule, such as glycidyl (meth) ) acrylates and the like.
  • the active energy ray composition can further contain a polymerization initiator.
  • the polymerization initiator include radical polymerization initiators, cationic polymerization initiators, radical and cationic polymerization initiators, and these are appropriately selected and used.
  • the active energy ray-curable composition further includes an ion scavenger, an antioxidant, a chain transfer agent, an adhesion imparting agent, a thermoplastic resin, a filler, a flow viscosity modifier, a plasticizer, an antifoaming agent solvent, an additive, and a solvent.
  • the active energy ray-curable composition is applied to one or both of the layers to be adhered, and then laminated, and any adherend layer is adhered. Alternatively, both layers to be adhered can be adhered by irradiating them with active energy rays for curing.
  • the adhesive layer preferably has a thickness of 0.01 to 20 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 10 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness and type of each layer may be the same or different.
  • the adhesives are classified into acrylic adhesives, urethane adhesives, rubber adhesives, silicone adhesives, etc., depending on the main polymer, and any of them can be used.
  • the adhesive may contain a cross-linking agent, a silane compound, an ionic compound, a cross-linking catalyst, an antioxidant, a tackifier, a plasticizer, a dye, a pigment, an inorganic filler, and the like.
  • An adhesive layer is formed by dissolving and dispersing each component constituting the adhesive in a solvent to obtain an adhesive composition, applying the adhesive composition on a substrate and then drying it. be.
  • the adhesive layer may be formed directly, or may be transferred after being separately formed on the substrate.
  • the adhesive layer preferably has a thickness of 0.1 to 500 ⁇ m, more preferably 1 to 300 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness and type of each layer may be the same or different.
  • the light shielding pattern can be applied as at least part of a bezel or housing of the display device (preferably a flexible image display device). The visibility of the image is improved by hiding the wiring arranged at the peripheral portion of the display device (preferably the flexible image display device) by the light-shielding pattern and making it difficult to see.
  • the light shielding pattern may be in the form of a single layer or multiple layers.
  • the color of the light-shielding pattern is not particularly limited, and various colors such as black, white, and metallic color may be used.
  • the light-shielding pattern may be formed of pigments for realizing colors and polymers such as acryl-based resin, ester-based resin, epoxy-based resin, polyurethane, and silicone.
  • the light-shielding pattern can be formed by various methods such as printing, lithography, and inkjet.
  • the thickness of the light-shielding pattern is preferably 1-100 ⁇ m, more preferably 2-50 ⁇ m. It is also preferable to impart a shape such as an inclination in the thickness direction of the light shielding pattern.
  • Example 1 A compound (a1) satisfying the above formula (a3) including the preferred range as the organosilicon compound (A) and Novec (registered trademark) 7200 as the fluorinated solvent (D1) are mixed and stirred at room temperature for a predetermined time. to obtain a mixture (a). Further, KBM603 (N-2-(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) as the organosilicon compound (C) and isopropyl alcohol as the non-fluorine solvent (D2) were mixed. , and shaken for a predetermined time at room temperature to obtain a mixture (c).
  • KBM603 N-2-(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • the mixed solution (a) and the mixed solution (c) were mixed and mixed using a vortex mixer to obtain a film-forming solution.
  • Table 1 shows the mixing ratio of the organosilicon compound (A), the fluorine-based solvent (D1), the organosilicon compound (C), and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2).
  • the compound (a1) is a compound that also satisfies the requirements of the compounds (a11) and (a21).
  • a glass having a thickness of 0.7 mm was used as the substrate (s), and SiO 2 and metal oxides other than SiO 2 were alternately laminated on the substrate (s) by a vacuum deposition method.
  • a layer (X) (antireflection layer) having SiO 2 on the side opposite to the substrate (s) was laminated.
  • the surface of the layer (X) on which the film was formed was activated using an atmospheric pressure plasma device (manufactured by Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.).
  • the solvent was evaporated to prepare a sample to be used for vapor deposition.
  • VPC-410A manufactured by ULVAC KIKO Co., Ltd.
  • a layer obtained by activating the above sample by a vacuum deposition method resistance heating method, pressure 1 ⁇ 10 -3 Pa, applied current 50 A, deposition processing time 90 seconds
  • X a layer obtained by activating the above sample by a vacuum deposition method (resistance heating method, pressure 1 ⁇ 10 -3 Pa, applied current 50 A, deposition processing time 90 seconds)
  • X resistance heating method, pressure 1 ⁇ 10 -3 Pa, applied current 50 A, deposition processing time 90 seconds
  • the film was heated and held at a temperature of 40° C. and a relative humidity of 90% for 60 minutes. After that, the membrane surface was wiped with a dry cloth.
  • Example 2 In place of the compound (a1) and Novec7200 as the fluorine-based solvent (D1), Optool (registered trademark) DSX (manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd.) (20% by mass of the organosilicon compound (A) and perfluorohexane as the solvent 80% by mass) was used in the same manner as in Example 1 to obtain a laminate in which the substrate (s), the layer (X), and the film (r) were laminated in this order.
  • Optool registered trademark
  • DSX manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd.
  • Example 3 In the same manner as in Example 1, except that the mixing ratio of compound (a1), KBM603, Novec7200, and isopropyl alcohol was changed as shown in Table 1, the substrate (s), layer (X), and film (r) were prepared in this order. A laminated body was obtained.
  • Comparative example 1 As the film-forming solution, 20% by mass of the compound (a1) and 80% by mass of Novec (registered trademark) 7200 were mixed, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for a predetermined time. Thus, a laminate was obtained in which the substrate (s), the layer (X), and the film (r) were laminated in this order.
  • Comparative example 2 The substrate (s), the layer A laminate was obtained in which (X) and film (r) were laminated in this order.
  • Comparative example 3 In the same manner as in Example 1, except that the mixing ratio of compound (a1), KBM603, Novec7200, and isopropyl alcohol was changed as shown in Table 1, the substrate (s), layer (X), and film (r) were prepared in this order. A laminated body was obtained.
  • N amount measurement by XPS Using JFS-9010 type manufactured by JEOL Ltd., excitation X-ray: MgK ⁇ , X-ray output of 110 W, photoelectron escape angle of 45 °, pass energy of 50 eV, carbon (C1s) : 260 to 300 eV, nitrogen (N1s: 390 to 410 eV), oxygen (O1s): 525 to 545 eV, fluorine (F1s): 680 to 698 eV, silicon (2p): 92 to 112 eV. Regarding the N content on the surface of the water-repellent layer (r), the atomic ratio of the N (nitrogen) amount to the total amount of carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, fluorine and silicon was determined.
  • a laminate including the substrate (s) and the water-repellent layer (r) can be formed in one step (one-liquid) by vapor deposition. It was found that the nitrogen content was 0.30 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less. It was also found that the laminate has excellent abrasion resistance on the surface of the water-repellent layer (r).
  • the laminate of the present invention can be used for display devices such as touch panel displays, optical elements, semiconductor elements, building materials, nanoimprint technology, solar cells, window glass for automobiles and buildings, metal products such as cookware, ceramic products such as tableware, and plastics. It is industrially useful because it can be suitably formed into a film on automotive parts and the like. It is also preferably used for items such as kitchens, bathrooms, washbasins, mirrors, and members around toilets.

Abstract

The present invention provides a layered body including a substrate (s) and a water-repellent layer (r), the nitrogen content at the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) being 0.30-10 at% (inclusive). In this layered body, the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) is preferably configured so as to satisfy either condition from among (i) the water contact angle being 105° or greater and (ii) the water slipping angle being less than 45° after the surface has been subjected to a load of 200 g per area measuring 1.5 cm × 1.5 cm and then scraped 20,000 times.

Description

積層体及びその製造方法Laminate and its manufacturing method
 本発明は、積層体及びその製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a laminate and its manufacturing method.
 フルオロポリエーテル構造を有する化合物を含む組成物から形成される皮膜は、その表面自由エネルギーが非常に小さいため、タッチパネルディスプレイ等の表示装置、光学素子、半導体素子、建築材料、自動車や建物の窓ガラス等の種々の分野において防汚コーティング、又は撥水撥油コーティングなどとして用いられている。 A film formed from a composition containing a compound having a fluoropolyether structure has a very low surface free energy, so it can be used in display devices such as touch panel displays, optical elements, semiconductor elements, building materials, and windows of automobiles and buildings. It is used as an antifouling coating or a water- and oil-repellent coating in various fields such as.
 例えば、特許文献1には、パーフルオロポリエーテル構造を有する化合物(A)と、水素原子の少なくとも一部がフッ素原子に置換されているオキシアルキレン単位と、ヒドロキシ基とを有する化合物であって、数平均分子量が10000未満である化合物(B)とフッ素系溶剤(C)を含む組成物を、真空蒸着法により無アルカリガラス上に製膜したことが開示されている。 For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a compound (A) having a perfluoropolyether structure, an oxyalkylene unit in which at least part of the hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms, and a compound having a hydroxy group, It discloses that a composition containing a compound (B) having a number average molecular weight of less than 10,000 and a fluorine-based solvent (C) is formed into a film on non-alkali glass by vacuum deposition.
特開2019-143020号公報JP 2019-143020 A
 ところで、フルオロポリエーテル構造を有する化合物から形成される皮膜には、耐摩耗性が要求される場合がある。しかし、本発明者らが検討したところ、前記特許文献1に開示される皮膜は、耐摩耗性に改善の余地があることが分かった。 By the way, abrasion resistance is sometimes required for a film formed from a compound having a fluoropolyether structure. However, as a result of investigation by the present inventors, it has been found that the coating disclosed in Patent Document 1 has room for improvement in wear resistance.
 そこで、本発明は、基材と撥水層を含む積層体であって、撥水層表面の耐摩耗性が良好な積層体及びその製造方法を提供することを目的とする。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a laminate including a base material and a water-repellent layer, the laminate having good abrasion resistance on the surface of the water-repellent layer, and a method for producing the same.
 上記課題を達成した発明は以下の通りである。
[1]基材(s)と、撥水層(r)とを含む積層体であって、
 前記撥水層(r)表面の窒素含有量が0.30原子%以上、10原子%以下である積層体。
[2]前記撥水層(r)表面を、1.5cm×1.5cmの面積当たり200gの荷重を掛けて20,000回擦った後の、(i)水接触角が105°以上であること、及び(ii)水滑落角が45°未満であること、の少なくともいずれかの要件を満たす[1]に記載の積層体。
[3]前記撥水層(r)は、
 下記式(a1)で表されるフルオロポリエーテル構造を有する有機ケイ素化合物(A)と、
 下記式(c1)~(c3)のいずれかで表されるアミノ基又はアミン骨格を有する有機ケイ素化合物(C)の混合組成物の硬化物である[1]または[2]に記載の積層体。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 上記式(a1)中、
 Rfa26、Rfa27、Rfa28、及びRfa29は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のフッ化アルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfa26が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa26がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfa27が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa27がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfa28が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa28がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfa29が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa29がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 R25及びR26は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又は1個以上の水素原子がハロゲン原子に置換された炭素数1~4のハロゲン化アルキル基であり、一つの炭素原子に結合するR25及びR26の少なくとも一方は水素原子であり、R25が複数存在する場合は複数のR25がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R26が複数存在する場合は複数のR26がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 R27及びR28は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又は単結合であり、R27が複数存在する場合は複数のR27がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R28が複数存在する場合は複数のR28がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 R29及びR30は、それぞれ独立して、炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R29が複数存在する場合は複数のR29がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R30が複数存在する場合は複数のR30がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Mは、-O-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-、-NR-、-NRC(=O)-、-C(=O)NR-、-CH=CH-、又は-C-(フェニレン基)であり、前記Rは水素原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基又は炭素数1~4の含フッ素アルキル基であり、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Mは、水素原子、フッ素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基であり、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 M10は、水素原子、又はハロゲン原子であり、
 M及びMは、それぞれ独立して、加水分解性基、ヒドロキシ基、又は-(CHe7-Si(OR14であり、e7は1~5であり、R14はメチル基又はエチル基であり、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 f21、f22、f23、f24、及びf25はそれぞれ独立して0~600の整数であり、f21、f22、f23、f24、及びf25の合計値は13以上であり、
 f26は、0~20の整数であり、
 f27は、それぞれ独立して、0~2の整数であり、
 g21は1~3の整数、g22は0~2の整数、g21+g22≦3であり、
 g31は1~3の整数、g32は0~2の整数、g31+g32≦3であり、
 M10-、-Si(Mg31(H)g32(R303-g31-g32、f21個の-{C(R25)(R26)}-単位(Ua1)、f22個の-{C(Rfa26)(Rfa27)}-単位(Ua2)、f23個の-{Si(R27)(R28)}-単位(Ua3)、f24個の-{Si(Rfa28)(Rfa29)}-単位(Ua4)、f25個の-M-単位(Ua5)、及びf26個の-[C(M){(CHf27-Si(Mg21(H)g22(R293-g21-g22}]-単位(Ua6)は、M10-が式(a1)における一方の末端であり、-Si(Mg31(H)g32(R303-g31-g32が他方の末端であり、少なくとも一部でフルオロポリエーテル構造を形成する順で並び、-O-が-O-と連続しない限り、それぞれの単位が任意の順で並んで結合する。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 上記式(c1)中、
 Rx11、Rx12、Rx13、Rx14は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であり、Rx11が複数存在する場合は複数のRx11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx12が複数存在する場合は複数のRx12がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx13が複数存在する場合は複数のRx13がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx14が複数存在する場合は複数のRx14がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rfx11、Rfx12、Rfx13、Rfx14は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfx11が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx12が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx12がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx13が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx13がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx14が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx14がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rx15は、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であり、Rx15が複数存在する場合は複数のRx15がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 X11は、加水分解性基であり、X11が複数存在する場合は複数のX11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Y11は、-NH-、又は-S-であり、Y11が複数存在する場合は複数のY11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Z11は、ビニル基、α-メチルビニル基、スチリル基、メタクリロイル基、アクリロイル基、アミノ基、イソシアネート基、イソシアヌレート基、エポキシ基、ウレイド基、又はメルカプト基であり、
 p1は、1~20の整数であり、p2、p3、p4は、それぞれ独立して、0~10の整数であり、p5は、0~10の整数であり、
 p6は、1~3の整数であり、
 Z11がアミノ基でない場合は-NH-であるY11を少なくとも1つ有し、Y11が全て-S-である場合又はp5が0である場合はZ11がアミノ基であり、
 Z11-、-Si(X11p6(Rx153-p6、p1個の-{C(Rx11)(Rx12)}-単位(Uc11)、p2個の-{C(Rfx11)(Rfx12)}-単位(Uc12)、p3個の-{Si(Rx13)(Rx14)}-単位(Uc13)、p4個の-{Si(Rfx13)(Rfx14)}-単位(Uc14)、p5個の-Y11-単位(Uc15)は、Z11-が式(c1)で表される化合物の一方の末端となり、-Si(X11p6(Rx153-p6が他方の末端となり、-O-が-O-と連結しない限り、それぞれの単位が任意の順で並んで結合する。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 上記式(c2)中、
 Rx20及びRx21は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であり、Rx20が複数存在する場合は複数のRx20がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx21が複数存在する場合は複数のRx21がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rfx20及びRfx21は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfx20が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx20がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx21が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx21がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rx22及びRx23はそれぞれ独立して、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であり、Rx22及びRx23が複数存在する場合は複数のRx22及びRx23がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 X20及びX21はそれぞれ独立して、加水分解性基であり、X20及びX21が複数存在する場合は複数のX20及びX21がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 p20は、1~30の整数であり、p21は、0~30の整数であり、p20又はp21を付して括弧でくくられた繰り返し単位の少なくとも1つは、アミン骨格-NR100-に置き換わっており、前記アミン骨格におけるR100は水素原子又はアルキル基であり、
 p22及びp23はそれぞれ独立して、1~3の整数であり、
 p20個の-{C(Rx20)(Rx21)}-単位(Uc20)、p21個の-{C(Rfx20)(Rfx21)}-単位(Uc21)は、p20個の単位(Uc20)又はp21個の単位(Uc21)が連続である必要はなく、それぞれの単位(Uc21)及び単位(Uc20)が任意の順で並んで結合し、式(c2)で表される化合物の一方の末端が-Si(X20p22(Rx223-p22となり、他方の末端が-Si(X21p23(Rx233-p23となる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 上記式(c3)中、
 Z31、Z32は、それぞれ独立に、加水分解性基及びヒドロキシ基以外の、反応性官能基である。反応性官能基としては、ビニル基、α-メチルビニル基、スチリル基、メタクリロイル基、アクリロイル基、アミノ基、エポキシ基、ウレイド基、又はメルカプト基であり、
 Rx31、Rx32、Rx33、Rx34は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であり、Rx31が複数存在する場合は複数のRx31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx32が複数存在する場合は複数のRx32がそれぞれ異なって
いてもよく、Rx33が複数存在する場合は複数のRx33がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx34が複数存在する場合は複数のRx34がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rfx31、Rfx32、Rfx33、Rfx34は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfx31が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx32が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx32がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx33が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx33がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx34が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx34がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Y31は、-NH-、-N(CH)-又は-O-であり、Y31が複数存在する場合は複数のY31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 X31、X32、X33、X34は、それぞれ独立に、-OR(Rは、水素原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又はアミノC1-3アルキルジC1-3アルコキシシリル基である)であり、X31が複数存在する場合は複数のX31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、X32が複数存在する場合は複数のX32がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、X33が複数存在する場合は複数のX33がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、X34が複数存在する場合は複数のX34がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 p31は、0~20の整数であり、p32、p33、p34は、それぞれ独立して、0~10の整数であり、p35は、0~5の整数であり、p36は、1~10の整数であり、p37は0又は1であり、
 Z31及びZ32の少なくとも一方がアミノ基であるか、又はY31の少なくとも一つが-NH-又は-N(CH)-であるという条件を満たし、かつ式(c3)で表される化合物の一方の末端がZ31-であり、他方の末端がZ32-であり、-O-が-O-と連結しない限り、p31個の-{C(Rx31)(Rx32)}-単位(Uc31)、p32個の-{C(Rfx31)(Rfx32)}-単位(Uc32)、p33個の-{Si(Rx33)(Rx34)}-単位(Uc33)、p34個の-{Si(Rfx33)(Rfx34)}-単位(Uc34)、p35個の-Y31-単位(Uc35)、p36個の-{Si(X31)(X32)-O}-単位(Uc36)、p37個の-{Si(X33)(X34)}-単位(Uc37)が、それぞれ任意の順で並んで結合する。
[4][1]~[3]のいずれかに記載の積層体を含むウインドウフィルムまたはタッチパネルディスプレイ。
[5]基材(s)と、撥水層(r)を有する積層体の製造方法であって、
 フルオロポリエーテル構造を有する有機ケイ素化合物(A)、アミノ基又はアミン骨格を有する有機ケイ素化合物(C)、及び溶剤の混合組成物であって、該混合組成物100質量%に対する前記有機ケイ素化合物(A)の質量比が1質量%超であり、前記有機ケイ素化合物(C)の質量比が0.1質量%以上である混合組成物を加熱する工程、及び
 加熱後の前記混合組成物を、基材(s)に真空蒸着して撥水層(r)を形成する工程を含む積層体の製造方法。
[6]更に、前記基材(s)上に、基材(s)及び撥水層(r)とは異なる層(X)を形成する工程を含み、
 加熱後の前記混合組成物を、基材(s)上に設けられた層(X)に真空蒸着して撥水層(r)を形成する[5]に記載の製造方法。
[7]更に、前記基材(s)表面又は基材(s)上に設けられた層(X)表面に親水化処理する工程を含み、
 前記基材(s)の親水化処理面又は前記層(X)の親水化処理面に、加熱後の前記混合組成物を真空蒸着する[5]または[6]に記載の製造方法。
The invention that achieves the above-mentioned problems is as follows.
[1] A laminate comprising a substrate (s) and a water-repellent layer (r),
A laminate in which the water-repellent layer (r) has a nitrogen content of 0.30 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less.
[2] After rubbing the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) 20,000 times with a load of 200 g per area of 1.5 cm × 1.5 cm, (i) the water contact angle is 105° or more. and (ii) the water slide angle is less than 45°.
[3] The water-repellent layer (r) is
an organosilicon compound (A) having a fluoropolyether structure represented by the following formula (a1);
The laminate according to [1] or [2], which is a cured product of a mixed composition of an organosilicon compound (C) having an amino group or an amine skeleton represented by any one of the following formulas (c1) to (c3). .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
In the above formula (a1),
Rf a26 , Rf a27 , Rf a28 , and Rf a29 are each independently a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom ; When a plurality of Rf a26 are present, a plurality of Rf a26 may be different, when a plurality of Rf a27 are present, a plurality of Rf a27 may be different, and when a plurality of Rf a28 are present, a plurality of Rf a28 may be different from each other, and when a plurality of Rf a29 are present, the plurality of Rf a29 may be different,
R 25 and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a halogenated alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with halogen atoms group, at least one of R 25 and R 26 bonded to one carbon atom is a hydrogen atom ; When doing, multiple R 26 may be different,
R 27 and R 28 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a single bond ; When a plurality of R 28 are present, the plurality of R 28 may be different,
R 29 and R 30 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R 29 are present, the plurality of R 29 may be different, and when a plurality of R 30 are present may have different R 30s ,
M 7 is -O-, -C(=O)-O-, -OC(=O)-, -NR-, -NRC(=O)-, -C(=O)NR-, - CH═CH— or —C 6 H 4 — (phenylene group), R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and M 7 is When a plurality of M7 are present, the plurality of M7 may be different,
M 5 is a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when multiple M 5 are present, the multiple M 5 may be different,
M 10 is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom,
M 8 and M 9 are each independently a hydrolyzable group, a hydroxy group, or —(CH 2 ) e7 —Si(OR 14 ) 3 , e7 is 1 to 5, and R 14 is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and when there are a plurality of M 8 , the plurality of M 8 may be different, and when there is a plurality of M 9 , the plurality of M 9 may be different,
f21, f22, f23, f24, and f25 are each independently an integer of 0 to 600, and the total value of f21, f22, f23, f24, and f25 is 13 or more,
f26 is an integer from 0 to 20,
f27 is each independently an integer of 0 to 2,
g21 is an integer of 1 to 3, g22 is an integer of 0 to 2, g21 + g22 ≤ 3,
g31 is an integer of 1 to 3, g32 is an integer of 0 to 2, g31 + g32 ≤ 3,
M 10 -, -Si (M 9 ) g31 (H) g32 (R 30 ) 3-g31-g32 , f21 -{C(R 25 )(R 26 )}-units (U a1 ), f22 -{C(Rf a26 )(Rf a27 )}-unit (U a2 ), f23 -{Si(R 27 )(R 28 )}-unit (U a3 ), f24-{Si(Rf a28 )(Rf a29 )}-units (U a4 ), f25 -M 7 -units (U a5 ), and f26 -[C(M 5 ){(CH 2 ) f27 -Si(M 8 ) g21 (H) g22 (R 29 ) 3-g21-g22 }]-unit (U a6 ) has M 10 - at one end in formula (a1), and -Si(M 9 ) g31 (H) g32 ( R 30 ) 3-g31-g32 are the other ends, and are arranged in an order that forms a fluoropolyether structure at least in part, and each unit can be in any order as long as —O— is not continuous with —O— Join side by side.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
In the above formula (c1),
R x11 , R x12 , R x13 , and R x14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when multiple R x11 are present, the multiple R x11 are different. may be different when there are a plurality of R x12 , and when there are a plurality of R x13 , a plurality of R x13 may be different, and when there are a plurality of R x14 may be different from each other in a plurality of R x14 ,
Rf x11 , Rf x12 , Rf x13 , and Rf x14 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf x11 are present When there are multiple Rf x11, the plurality of Rf x11 may be different, when there are multiple Rf x12 , the plurality of Rf x12 may be different, and when there is a plurality of Rf x13 , the plurality of Rf x13 may be different. may be different, and if there are multiple Rf x14 , the multiple Rf x14 may be different,
R x15 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R x15 are present, the plurality of R x15 may be different,
X 11 is a hydrolyzable group, and when a plurality of X 11 are present, the plurality of X 11 may be different,
Y 11 is -NH- or -S-, and when a plurality of Y 11 are present, the plurality of Y 11 may be different,
Z 11 is a vinyl group, α-methylvinyl group, styryl group, methacryloyl group, acryloyl group, amino group, isocyanate group, isocyanurate group, epoxy group, ureido group, or mercapto group;
p1 is an integer of 1 to 20, p2, p3, and p4 are each independently an integer of 0 to 10, p5 is an integer of 0 to 10,
p6 is an integer from 1 to 3,
having at least one Y 11 which is —NH— if Z 11 is not an amino group, and Z 11 is an amino group if all Y 11 are —S— or p5 is 0;
Z 11 -, -Si(X 11 ) p6 (R x15 ) 3-p6 , p1 -{C(R x11 )(R x12 )}-units (U c11 ), p2 -{C(Rf x11 ) (Rf x12 )}-unit (U c12 ), p3-{Si(R x13 )(R x14 )}-unit (U c13 ), p4-{Si(Rf x13 )(Rf x14 )} - unit (U c14 ), p5 -Y 11 - units (U c15 ), Z 11 - becomes one end of the compound represented by formula (c1), and -Si(X 11 ) p6 (R x15 ) Unless 3-p6 is the other end and —O— is not linked to —O—, each unit is linked in any order.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
In the above formula (c2),
R x20 and R x21 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms ; When a plurality of R x21 are present, the plurality of R x21 may be different,
Rf x20 and Rf x21 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and when there are multiple Rf x20 , multiple Rf x20 may be different, and when there are a plurality of Rf x21 , a plurality of Rf x21 may be different,
R x22 and R x23 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when there are a plurality of R x22 and R x23 , a plurality of R x22 and R x23 may be different,
X 20 and X 21 are each independently a hydrolyzable group, and when multiple X 20 and X 21 are present, multiple X 20 and X 21 may be different,
p20 is an integer of 1 to 30, p21 is an integer of 0 to 30, and at least one of the repeating units bracketed with p20 or p21 is replaced with an amine skeleton —NR 100 —. and R 100 in the amine skeleton is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group,
p22 and p23 are each independently an integer of 1 to 3,
p20-{C( Rx20 )( Rx21 )}-units ( Uc20 ), p21-{C( Rfx20 )( Rfx21 )}-units ( Uc21 ) are p20 units ( U c20 ) or p21 units (U c21 ) need not be contiguous, and each unit (U c21 ) and unit (U c20 ) can be arranged in any order and combined to form the formula (c2). One end of the compound is -Si(X 20 ) p22 (R x22 ) 3-p22 , and the other end is -Si(X 21 ) p23 (R x23 ) 3-p23 .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
In the above formula (c3),
Z 31 and Z 32 are each independently a reactive functional group other than a hydrolyzable group and a hydroxy group. The reactive functional group is a vinyl group, α-methylvinyl group, styryl group, methacryloyl group, acryloyl group, amino group, epoxy group, ureido group, or mercapto group,
R x31 , R x32 , R x33 and R x34 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when there are multiple R x31 , the multiple R x31 may be different. may be different when there are a plurality of R x32 , and when there are a plurality of R x33, a plurality of R x33 may be different, and when there are a plurality of R x34 may be different from each other in a plurality of R x34 ,
Rf x31 , Rf x32 , Rf x33 , and Rf x34 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf x31 are present When there are multiple Rf x31, the plurality of Rf x31 may be different, and when there are multiple Rf x32 , the plurality of Rf x32 may be different, and when there are multiple Rf x33 , the plurality of Rf x33 may be different. may be different, and if there are multiple Rf x34 , the multiple Rf x34 may be different,
Y 31 is —NH—, —N(CH 3 )— or —O—, and when there are a plurality of Y 31 , the plurality of Y 31 may be different,
X 31 , X 32 , X 33 and X 34 are each independently —OR c (R c is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or amino-C 1-3 alkyldi-C 1-3 alkoxysilyl is a group), and when a plurality of X 31 are present, the plurality of X 31 may be different, when a plurality of X 32 are present, the plurality of X 32 may be different, and X 33 is When a plurality of X 33 are present, the plurality of X 33 may be different, and when a plurality of X 34 are present, the plurality of X 34 may be different,
p31 is an integer of 0 to 20, p32, p33, and p34 are each independently an integer of 0 to 10, p35 is an integer of 0 to 5, and p36 is an integer of 1 to 10 and p37 is 0 or 1,
A compound that satisfies the condition that at least one of Z 31 and Z 32 is an amino group, or at least one of Y 31 is -NH- or -N(CH 3 )-, and is represented by formula (c3) p31 -{C(R x31 )(R x32 )}-units, unless one end of is Z 31 - and the other end is Z 32 -, and -O- is not linked to -O- (U c31 ), p32-{C(Rf x31 )(Rf x32 )}-units (U c32 ), p33-{Si(R x33 )(R x34 )}-units (U c33 ), p34 -{Si(Rf x33 )(Rf x34 )}-units (U c34 ), p35 -Y 31 -units (U c35 ), p36 -{Si(X 31 )(X 32 )-O }-unit (U c36 ) and p37 -{Si(X 33 )(X 34 )}-units (U c37 ) are arranged and bonded in any order.
[4] A window film or touch panel display comprising the laminate according to any one of [1] to [3].
[5] A method for producing a laminate having a substrate (s) and a water-repellent layer (r),
A mixed composition of an organosilicon compound (A) having a fluoropolyether structure, an organosilicon compound (C) having an amino group or an amine skeleton, and a solvent, wherein the organosilicon compound ( a step of heating a mixed composition in which the mass ratio of A) is more than 1% by mass and the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (C) is 0.1% by mass or more; A method for producing a laminate, comprising the step of forming a water-repellent layer (r) by vacuum deposition on a substrate (s).
[6] Further comprising the step of forming a layer (X) different from the substrate (s) and the water-repellent layer (r) on the substrate (s),
The production method according to [5], wherein the mixed composition after heating is vacuum-deposited onto the layer (X) provided on the substrate (s) to form the water-repellent layer (r).
[7] further comprising a step of hydrophilizing the surface of the substrate (s) or the surface of the layer (X) provided on the substrate (s),
The production method according to [5] or [6], wherein the mixed composition after heating is vacuum-deposited on the hydrophilized surface of the substrate (s) or the hydrophilized surface of the layer (X).
 本発明によれば、基材と撥水層を含む積層体であって、撥水層表面の耐摩耗性が良好な積層体及びその製造方法を実現できる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a laminate that includes a base material and a water-repellent layer and has good wear resistance on the surface of the water-repellent layer, and a method for producing the same.
 本発明の積層体は、基材(s)と、撥水層(r)とを含み、前記撥水層(r)表面の窒素含有量が0.30原子%以上、10原子%以下である積層体である。 The laminate of the present invention includes a substrate (s) and a water-repellent layer (r), and the nitrogen content on the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) is 0.30 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less. It is a laminate.
 1.撥水層(r)
 撥水層(r)は、後述する通り、蒸着によって得ることができ、このような層は表面の窒素含有量が0.30原子%以上、10原子%以下である。該窒素含有量は0.5原子%以上が好ましく、より好ましくは0.6原子%以上であり、また8.0原子%以下であってもよく、5.0原子%以下であってもよく、2.0原子%以下が好ましく、より好ましくは1.0原子%以下である。窒素含有量を特定する撥水層(r)の表面とは、基材(s)と反対側の表面である。また、窒素含有量は、撥水層(r)表面を構成する元素とその量をX線光電子分光法(XPS)により測定することで求めることができる。XPSにより測定される撥水層(r)表面を構成する元素は、代表的にはB、C、N、O、F、Si、P、S、Clであり、特にC、N、O、F、Siである。B、C、N、O、F、Si、P、S、及びClの含有量は、それぞれ、B1sスペクトル、C1sスペクトル、N1sスペクトル、O1sスペクトル、F1sスペクトル、Si2pスペクトル、P2pスペクトル、S2pスペクトル、Cl2pスペクトルに基づいて算出される。
1. Water-repellent layer (r)
The water-repellent layer (r) can be obtained by vapor deposition as described later, and such a layer has a surface nitrogen content of 0.30 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less. The nitrogen content is preferably 0.5 atomic % or more, more preferably 0.6 atomic % or more, and may be 8.0 atomic % or less, or 5.0 atomic % or less. , is preferably 2.0 atomic % or less, more preferably 1.0 atomic % or less. The surface of the water-repellent layer (r) for which the nitrogen content is specified is the surface opposite to the substrate (s). Also, the nitrogen content can be obtained by measuring the elements constituting the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) and their amounts by X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS). Elements constituting the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) measured by XPS are typically B, C, N, O, F, Si, P, S, Cl, particularly C, N, O, F , Si. The contents of B, C, N, O, F, Si, P, S, and Cl are respectively B1s spectrum, C1s spectrum, N1s spectrum, O1s spectrum, F1s spectrum, Si2p spectrum, P2p spectrum, S2p spectrum, Cl2p Calculated based on the spectrum.
 上記したXPSによる測定は、後述の実施例で示したように、励起X線として、MgKαを用い、X線出力は110Wとし、光電子脱出角度は45°、パスエネルギー50eVにて、炭素(C1s)、窒素(N1s)、酸素(O1s)、フッ素(F1s)、ケイ素(2p)、ホウ素(B1s)、リン(P2p)、硫黄(S2p)、塩素(Cl2p)の各種元素について、測定を行えばよい。測定中に試料がチャージアップする場合には、適宜帯電補正用電子銃を用いればよく、さらに測定スペクトルの化学シフトの帯電補正は、各種標準サンプルなどで実施することができる。例えば、C1sスペクトルのうち、C-C、およびC-H構造によるスペクトルをエネルギー基準284.0eVと補正すればよい。 As shown in the examples below, the above XPS measurement uses MgKα as the excitation X-ray, the X-ray output is 110 W, the photoelectron escape angle is 45 °, the pass energy is 50 eV, carbon (C1s) , nitrogen (N1s), oxygen (O1s), fluorine (F1s), silicon (2p), boron (B1s), phosphorus (P2p), sulfur (S2p), and chlorine (Cl2p). . If the sample is charged up during measurement, an electron gun for charge correction may be used as appropriate, and charge correction for the chemical shift of the measured spectrum can be performed using various standard samples. For example, among the C1s spectra, the spectra due to the C—C and C—H structures may be corrected with the energy standard of 284.0 eV.
 また、本発明の好ましい態様では、撥水層(r)表面の耐摩耗性が良好であるという効果を奏することができ、具体的には、撥水層(r)表面を、1.5cm×1.5cmの面積当たり200gの荷重を掛けて20,000回擦った後の、(i)水接触角が105°以上であること、及び(ii)水滑落角が45°未満であること、の少なくともいずれかの要件を満たす。 Further, in a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the effect that the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) has good wear resistance can be exhibited. After rubbing 20,000 times with a load of 200 g per 1.5 cm area, (i) the water contact angle is 105° or more, and (ii) the water slide angle is less than 45°. meet at least one of the requirements of
 上記(i)の水接触角は、より好ましくは108°以上であり、更に好ましくは110°以上であり、また120°以下であってもよい。また、上記(ii)の水滑落角は、より好ましくは40°以下であり、更に好ましくは35°以下であり、一層好ましくは20°以下であり、特に好ましくは15°以下であり、また5°以上であってもよい。 The water contact angle of (i) above is more preferably 108° or more, more preferably 110° or more, and may be 120° or less. In addition, the water sliding angle of (ii) is more preferably 40° or less, still more preferably 35° or less, still more preferably 20° or less, particularly preferably 15° or less, and 5 ° or more.
 耐摩耗試験で膜(r)を擦る際には、パルプ素材の紙で擦ることが好ましく、弾性体に取付けられたパルプ素材の紙で擦ることがより好ましい。パルプ素材の紙としては、例えばキムワイプワイパーS-200が挙げられる。本明細書における耐摩耗試験は、キムワイプワイパーS-200にて、ストローク距離を30mm、擦る速度を70往復/分として、ストローク領域の略中央で接触角及び滑落角を測定した。 When rubbing the film (r) in the abrasion resistance test, it is preferable to rub it with paper made of pulp material, and more preferably rub it with paper made of pulp material attached to an elastic body. Paper made of pulp material includes, for example, Kimwipe Wiper S-200. In the abrasion resistance test in this specification, the contact angle and the sliding angle were measured at approximately the center of the stroke area with a Kimwipe wiper S-200 at a stroke distance of 30 mm and a rubbing speed of 70 reciprocations/minute.
 撥水層(r)表面の初期の接触角、すなわち層形成後、耐摩耗試験を施さない状態での接触角は、例えば105°以上であり、好ましくは108°以上であり、より好ましくは110°以上であり、また125°以下であってもよい。また、撥水層(r)表面の初期の滑落角は、18°未満が好ましく、より好ましくは17°以下であり、また3°以上であってもよい。 The initial contact angle on the surface of the water-repellent layer (r), that is, the contact angle after formation of the layer but not subjected to an abrasion resistance test is, for example, 105° or more, preferably 108° or more, and more preferably 110°. ° or more, and may be 125° or less. The initial sliding angle of the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) is preferably less than 18°, more preferably 17° or less, and may be 3° or more.
 上記した初期及び耐摩耗試験後のいずれの接触角も、撥水層(r)上に1μLの水滴を滴下し、液滴法によりθ/2法で測定されたものであり、また初期及び耐摩耗試験後のいずれの滑落角も、撥水層(r)上に20μLの水滴を滴下し、滑落法(解析方法:接線法、傾斜方法:連続傾斜、滑落検出:滑落後、移動判定:前進角、滑落判定距離:5dot)により測定されたものである。前記「dot」は、後述の実施例で用いるDM700に付属するカメラで撮影した際の解像度における画素を意味し、後述の実施例では1dotは0.01mmである。 Both the initial contact angle and the contact angle after the abrasion resistance test were measured by dropping 1 μL of water droplets on the water-repellent layer (r) and using the droplet method using the θ/2 method. For any sliding angle after the abrasion test, 20 μL of water droplets are dropped on the water-repellent layer (r), and the sliding method (analysis method: tangential method, tilt method: continuous inclination, sliding detection: after sliding, movement judgment: forward angle, sliding judgment distance: 5 dots). The "dot" means a pixel at the resolution when photographing with a camera attached to DM700 used in the examples described later, and 1 dot is 0.01 mm in the examples described later.
 撥水層(r)は、好ましい態様において上記のような水接触角を満たしており、このような撥水層(r)は撥油性も良好である。また撥水層(r)の厚さは、例えば1nm~1000nmである。 In a preferred embodiment, the water-repellent layer (r) satisfies the water contact angle as described above, and such a water-repellent layer (r) also has good oil repellency. The thickness of the water-repellent layer (r) is, for example, 1 nm to 1000 nm.
 撥水層(r)は、後述の通り、フルオロポリエーテル構造を有する有機ケイ素化合物(A)、アミノ基又はアミン骨格を有する有機ケイ素化合物(C)及び溶剤の混合組成物であって、前記混合組成物100質量%に対する前記有機ケイ素化合物(A)の質量比が1質量%超であり、前記有機ケイ素化合物(C)の質量比が0.1質量%以上である混合組成物を、基材(s)または基材(s)の上に形成された層(X)に蒸着して硬化させることによって形成することが好ましく、一工程(一液)で簡便に耐摩耗性に優れた撥水層(r)を形成可能である。従って、撥水層(r)は、有機ケイ素化合物(A)由来の構造を有していることが好ましい。後述の通り、好ましい態様において、有機ケイ素化合物(A)はケイ素原子に結合した(連結基を介して結合していてもよい)加水分解性基又はヒドロキシ基を有しており、有機ケイ素化合物(A)が有する-SiOH又は加水分解で生じた有機ケイ素化合物(A)の-SiOH基(SiとOHが連結基を介して結合していてもよい)同士が脱水縮合するため、撥水層(r)は、通常有機ケイ素化合物(A)同士の縮合構造を有することが好ましい。また、撥水層(r)には、有機ケイ素化合物(A)由来の-SiOH基が、他の化合物由来の-SiOH基、又は撥水層(r)が形成される面の活性水素(水酸基など)と脱水縮合して形成される縮合構造が含まれることも好ましい。後述する通り、有機ケイ素化合物(A)は、好ましい態様において有するフルオロポリエーテル構造の酸素原子を結合手側の末端に有する1価の基(以下、FPE基と呼ぶ)が、連結基を介して又は連結基を介さずにケイ素原子に結合しており、FPE基の他方の末端はパーフルオロアルキル基を有する含フッ素基である。つまり、有機ケイ素化合物(A)同士の縮合構造は、フルオロポリエーテル構造の酸素原子を結合手側の末端に有する1価の基(以下、FPE基と呼ぶ)が、連結基を介して又は連結基を介さずにケイ素原子に結合した構造であって、FPE基の他方の末端はパーフルオロアルキル基を有する含フッ素基である構造を含んでいることが好ましい。 The water-repellent layer (r) is, as described later, a mixed composition of an organosilicon compound (A) having a fluoropolyether structure, an organosilicon compound (C) having an amino group or an amine skeleton, and a solvent. A mixture composition in which the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (A) to 100% by mass of the composition is more than 1% by mass and the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (C) is 0.1% by mass or more is used as a base material. (s) or the layer (X) formed on the substrate (s) is preferably formed by vapor deposition and curing. Layer (r) can be formed. Therefore, the water-repellent layer (r) preferably has a structure derived from the organosilicon compound (A). As described below, in a preferred embodiment, the organosilicon compound (A) has a hydrolyzable group or a hydroxy group bonded to a silicon atom (which may be bonded via a linking group), and the organosilicon compound ( Since the —SiOH groups of A) or the —SiOH groups of the organosilicon compound (A) (Si and OH may be bonded via a linking group) formed by hydrolysis undergo dehydration condensation, the water-repellent layer ( r) generally preferably has a condensed structure between the organosilicon compounds (A). In addition, the water-repellent layer (r) contains —SiOH groups derived from the organosilicon compound (A), —SiOH groups derived from other compounds, or active hydrogen (hydroxyl groups) on the surface on which the water-repellent layer (r) is formed. etc.) are also preferably included. As will be described later, the organosilicon compound (A), in a preferred embodiment, has a fluoropolyether structure in which a monovalent group (hereinafter referred to as an FPE group) having an oxygen atom at the terminal on the bond side is linked via a linking group. Alternatively, it is bonded to the silicon atom without a linking group, and the other end of the FPE group is a fluorine-containing group having a perfluoroalkyl group. That is, the condensed structure between the organosilicon compounds (A) is such that the monovalent group (hereinafter referred to as the FPE group) having an oxygen atom at the end of the bond side of the fluoropolyether structure (hereinafter referred to as an FPE group) is linked via a linking group or It preferably contains a structure that is bonded to a silicon atom without a group intervening, and that the other end of the FPE group is a fluorine-containing group having a perfluoroalkyl group.
 また、撥水層(r)は、有機ケイ素化合物(C)由来の構造を有していることが好ましい。後述の通り、好ましい態様においては、有機ケイ素化合物(C)のケイ素原子には加水分解性基が結合しており、加水分解性基の加水分解で生じた有機ケイ素化合物(C)の-SiOH基同士が脱水縮合するため、撥水層(r)は、有機ケイ素化合物(C)由来の縮合構造を有することが好ましい。また、撥水層(r)には、有機ケイ素化合物(C)由来の-SiOH基(SiとOHが連結基を介して結合していてもよい。以下同様。)が、他の化合物由来の-SiOH基、又は撥水層(r)が形成される面の活性水素(水酸基など)と脱水縮合して形成される縮合構造が含まれることも好ましい。具体的には、撥水層(r)は、有機ケイ素化合物(C)同士の縮合物;及び前記有機ケイ素化合物(C)と前記有機ケイ素化合物(A)の縮合物;の少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。 In addition, the water-repellent layer (r) preferably has a structure derived from the organosilicon compound (C). As described later, in a preferred embodiment, a hydrolyzable group is bonded to the silicon atom of the organosilicon compound (C), and the -SiOH group of the organosilicon compound (C) generated by hydrolysis of the hydrolyzable group Since they undergo dehydration condensation, the water-repellent layer (r) preferably has a condensed structure derived from the organosilicon compound (C). In addition, in the water-repellent layer (r), —SiOH groups (Si and OH may be bonded via a linking group; hereinafter the same) derived from the organosilicon compound (C) are It is also preferable to include a —SiOH group or a condensed structure formed by dehydration condensation with active hydrogen (such as a hydroxyl group) on the surface on which the water-repellent layer (r) is formed. Specifically, the water-repellent layer (r) contains at least one of a condensate of the organosilicon compounds (C) and a condensate of the organosilicon compound (C) and the organosilicon compound (A). is preferred.
 すなわち、撥水層(r)は、後述の式(a1)で表されるフルオロポリエーテル構造を有する有機ケイ素化合物(A)同士の縮合物を含むと共に、後述の式(c1)~(c3)のいずれかで表されるアミノ基又はアミン骨格を有する有機ケイ素化合物(C)同士の縮合物;及び前記有機ケイ素化合物(C)と前記有機ケイ素化合物(A)の縮合物;の少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。 That is, the water-repellent layer (r) contains a condensate of organosilicon compounds (A) having a fluoropolyether structure represented by the formula (a1) described later, and the following formulas (c1) to (c3) At least one condensate of organosilicon compounds (C) having an amino group or amine skeleton represented by any of preferably included.
 更に、前記混合組成物に、後述する有機ケイ素化合物(B)が混合される場合、下記式(b1)で表される有機ケイ素化合物(B)は、A2で表される加水分解性基又はヒドロキシ基を有しており、有機ケイ素化合物(B)が有する-SiOH又は加水分解で生じた有機ケイ素化合物(B)の-SiOH基が、有機ケイ素化合物(A)由来の-SiOH基、有機ケイ素化合物(B)由来の他の-SiOH基、又は撥水層(r)が形成される面の活性水素(水酸基など)と脱水縮合するため、好ましい態様において、撥水層(r)は有機ケイ素化合物(A)由来の縮合構造と共に、有機ケイ素化合物(B)由来の縮合構造を有する。 Furthermore, when the mixed composition is mixed with an organosilicon compound (B) described later, the organosilicon compound (B) represented by the following formula (b1) is a hydrolyzable group represented by A 2 or Having a hydroxy group, the —SiOH of the organosilicon compound (B) or the —SiOH group of the organosilicon compound (B) generated by hydrolysis is a —SiOH group derived from the organosilicon compound (A), an organosilicon Since dehydration condensation occurs with other —SiOH groups derived from the compound (B) or active hydrogen (such as a hydroxyl group) on the surface on which the water-repellent layer (r) is formed, in a preferred embodiment, the water-repellent layer (r) is an organic silicon It has a condensed structure derived from the organosilicon compound (B) together with the condensed structure derived from the compound (A).
 2.混合組成物
 2-1.有機ケイ素化合物(A)
 有機ケイ素化合物(A)は、フルオロポリエーテル構造を含む。前記フルオロポリエーテル構造は、フルオロオキシアルキレン基ともいうことができ、両端が酸素原子である構造を意味する。フルオロポリエーテル構造は、撥水性又は撥油性などの撥液性を有する。フルオロポリエーテル 構造は、パーフルオロポリエーテル構造であることが好ましい。
フルオロポリエーテル構造の最も長い直鎖部分に含まれる炭素数は、例えば5以上であることが好ましく、10以上がより好ましく、更により好ましくは20以上である。前記炭素数の上限は特に限定されず、例えば200であり、好ましくは150である。前記有機ケイ素化合物(A)1分子中のケイ素原子の数は1~10であることが好ましく、より好ましくは1~6である。
2. Mixed composition 2-1. Organosilicon compound (A)
The organosilicon compound (A) contains a fluoropolyether structure. The fluoropolyether structure can also be referred to as a fluorooxyalkylene group, and means a structure in which both ends are oxygen atoms. Fluoropolyether structures have liquid repellency, such as water repellency or oil repellency. The fluoropolyether structure is preferably a perfluoropolyether structure.
The number of carbon atoms contained in the longest linear portion of the fluoropolyether structure is, for example, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 10 or more, and even more preferably 20 or more. The upper limit of the number of carbon atoms is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 200, preferably 150. The number of silicon atoms in one molecule of the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-6.
 有機ケイ素化合物(A)は、フルオロポリエーテル構造とケイ素原子に加えて、加水分解性基又はヒドロキシ基(以下、両者を合わせて、反応性基(k)と呼ぶ)を含むことが好ましく、該反応性基(k)は、連結基を介して又は連結基を介さずに前記ケイ素原子に結合していることがより好ましい。前記反応性基(k)は、加水分解・脱水縮合反応を通じて、有機ケイ素化合物(A)同士;有機ケイ素化合物(A)と他の単量体;又は有機ケイ素化合物(A)と上記混合組成物が塗布される面の活性水素(水酸基など);と共に縮合反応を通じて結合する作用を有する。前記加水分解性基としては、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、アセトキシ基、イソシアネート基等が挙げられる。前記反応性基(k)は、アルコキシ基又はハロゲン原子であることが好ましく、炭素数が1~4であるアルコキシ基又は塩素原子であることがより好ましく、メトキシ基又はエトキシ基が特に好ましい。 The organosilicon compound (A) preferably contains a hydrolyzable group or a hydroxy group (hereinafter both are collectively referred to as a reactive group (k)) in addition to a fluoropolyether structure and a silicon atom, and the More preferably, the reactive group (k) is bonded to the silicon atom via a linking group or not via a linking group. The reactive group (k) is formed between the organosilicon compounds (A) through a hydrolysis/dehydration condensation reaction; the organosilicon compound (A) and another monomer; or the organosilicon compound (A) and the mixture composition has the function of bonding with active hydrogen (hydroxyl group, etc.) on the surface to which is applied through a condensation reaction. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an acetoxy group and an isocyanate group. The reactive group (k) is preferably an alkoxy group or a halogen atom, more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a chlorine atom, and particularly preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group.
 有機ケイ素化合物(A)がフルオロポリエーテル構造とケイ素原子と反応性基(k)を含む態様において、フルオロポリエーテル構造の酸素原子を結合手側の末端に有する1価の基(以下、FPE基と呼ぶ)と、ケイ素原子が、連結基を介して又は連結基を介さずに結合しており、かつ、ケイ素原子と反応性基(k)が連結基を介して又は連結基を介さずに結合していることが好ましい。前記 FPE基とケイ素原子が連結基を介して結合している場合、前記反応性基(k)が連結基を介して又は連結基を介さずに結合したケイ素原子は、有機ケイ素化合物(A)の一分子中に1又は複数存在していてもよく、その数は例えば1以上、10以下である。 In the embodiment in which the organosilicon compound (A) contains a fluoropolyether structure, a silicon atom and a reactive group (k), a monovalent group having an oxygen atom of the fluoropolyether structure at the terminal on the bond side (hereinafter referred to as an FPE group ) and the silicon atom is bonded via a linking group or not, and the silicon atom and the reactive group (k) are bonded via a linking group or not Bonding is preferred. When the FPE group and the silicon atom are bonded via a linking group, the silicon atom bonded to the reactive group (k) via the linking group or not via the linking group is the organosilicon compound (A) may be present in one molecule, and the number thereof is, for example, 1 or more and 10 or less.
 前記FPE基は、直鎖状であってもよいし、側鎖を有していてもよく、側鎖を有していることが好ましい。側鎖を有している態様として特に、FPE基中のフルオロポリエーテル構造が側鎖を有していることが好ましい。側鎖としてフルオロアルキル基を有することが好ましく、該フルオロアルキル基は、より好ましくはパーフルオロアルキル基であり、更に好ましくはトリフルオロメチル基である。前記FPE基とケイ素原子を連結する連結基の炭素数は、例えば1以上、20以下であり、好ましくは2以上、15以下である。前記したFPE基は、末端にフルオロアルキル基を有する含フッ素基とパーフルオロポリエーテル構造が直接結合した基であることが好ましい。含フッ素基は、フルオロアルキル基であってもよく、フルオロアルキル基に2価の芳香族炭化水素基等の連結基が結合した基であってもよいが、フルオロアルキル基であることが好ましい。該フルオロアルキル基は、パーフルオロアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1~20のパーフルオロアルキル基であることがより好ましい。 The FPE group may be linear or may have a side chain, and preferably has a side chain. As an aspect having a side chain, it is particularly preferable that the fluoropolyether structure in the FPE group has a side chain. It preferably has a fluoroalkyl group as a side chain, and the fluoroalkyl group is more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group, still more preferably a trifluoromethyl group. The carbon number of the linking group linking the FPE group and the silicon atom is, for example, 1 or more and 20 or less, preferably 2 or more and 15 or less. The FPE group described above is preferably a group in which a fluorine-containing group having a fluoroalkyl group at its end and a perfluoropolyether structure are directly bonded. The fluorine-containing group may be a fluoroalkyl group or a group in which a linking group such as a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group is bonded to a fluoroalkyl group, but is preferably a fluoroalkyl group. The fluoroalkyl group is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group, more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
 前記含フッ素基としては、例えば、CF(CF-(pは、例えば1~19であり、好ましくは1~10である)、CF(CF-(CH-、CF(CF-C-(mはいずれも1~10であり、好ましくは3~7であり、nはいずれも1~5であり、好ましくは2~4である)が挙げられ、CF(CF-又はCF(CF-(CH-が好ましい。 Examples of the fluorine-containing group include CF 3 (CF 2 ) p — (p is, for example, 1 to 19, preferably 1 to 10), CF 3 (CF 2 ) m —(CH 2 ) n -, CF 3 (CF 2 ) m -C 6 H 4 - (m is 1 to 10, preferably 3 to 7; n is 1 to 5, preferably 2 to 4; and CF 3 (CF 2 ) p — or CF 3 (CF 2 ) m —(CH 2 ) n — are preferred.
 前記反応性基(k)は連結基を介してケイ素原子に結合していてもよいし、連結基を介さずに直接ケイ素原子に結合していてもよく、直接ケイ素原子に結合していることが好ましい。1つのケイ素原子に結合する反応性基(k)の数は、1つ以上であればよく、2又は3であってもよいが、2又は3であるのが好ましく、3であるのが特に好ましい。2つ以上の反応性基(k)がケイ素原子に結合している場合、異なる反応性基(k)がケイ素原子に結合していてもよいが、同じ反応性基(k)がケイ素原子に結合しているのが好ましい。1つのケイ素原子に結合する反応性基(k)の数が2以下の場合、残りの結合手には、反応性基(k)以外の1価の基が結合していてもよく、例えば、アルキル基(特に炭素数が1~4のアルキル基)、H、NCOなどが結合できる。 The reactive group (k) may be bonded to the silicon atom via a linking group, or may be directly bonded to the silicon atom without the linking group, and is directly bonded to the silicon atom. is preferred. The number of reactive groups (k) bonded to one silicon atom may be 1 or more, and may be 2 or 3, preferably 2 or 3, particularly 3 preferable. When two or more reactive groups (k) are attached to the silicon atom, different reactive groups (k) may be attached to the silicon atom, but the same reactive group (k) may be attached to the silicon atom. preferably combined. When the number of reactive groups (k) bonded to one silicon atom is 2 or less, the remaining bonds may be bonded with a monovalent group other than the reactive group (k), for example, An alkyl group (especially an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms), H, NCO, etc. can be bonded.
 前記有機ケイ素化合物(A)は、下記式(a1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 The organosilicon compound (A) is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (a1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 上記式(a1)中、
 Rfa26、Rfa27、Rfa28、及びRfa29は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のフッ化アルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfa26が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa26がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfa27が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa27がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfa28が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa28がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfa29が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa29がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 R25及びR26は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又は1個以上の水素原子がハロゲン原子に置換された炭素数1~4のハロゲン化アルキル基であり、一つの炭素原子に結合するR25及びR26の少なくとも一方は水素原子であり、R25が複数存在する場合は複数のR25がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R26が複数存在する場合は複数のR26がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 R27及びR28は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又は単結合であり、R27が複数存在する場合は複数のR27がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R28が複数存在する場合は複数のR28がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 R29及びR30は、それぞれ独立して、炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R29が複数存在する場合は複数のR29がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R30が複数存在する場合は複数のR30がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Mは、-O-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-、-NR-、-NRC(=O)-、-C(=O)NR-、-CH=CH-、又は-C-(フェニレン基)であり、前記Rは水素原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基又は炭素数1~4の含フッ素アルキル基であり、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Mは、水素原子、フッ素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基であり、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 M10は、水素原子、又はハロゲン原子であり、
 M及びMは、それぞれ独立して、加水分解性基、ヒドロキシ基、又は-(CHe7-Si(OR14であり、e7は1~5であり、R14はメチル基又はエチル基であり、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 f21、f22、f23、f24、及びf25はそれぞれ独立して0~600の整数であり、f21、f22、f23、f24、及びf25の合計値は13以上であり、
 f26は、0~20の整数であり、
 f27は、それぞれ独立して、0~2の整数であり、
 g21は1~3の整数、g22は0~2の整数、g21+g22≦3であり、
 g31は1~3の整数、g32は0~2の整数、g31+g32≦3であり、
 M10-、-Si(Mg31(H)g32(R303-g31-g32、f21個の-{C(R25)(R26)}-単位(Ua1)、f22個の-{C(Rfa26)(Rfa27)}-単位(Ua2)、f23個の-{Si(R27)(R28)}-単位(Ua3)、f24個の-{Si(Rfa28)(Rfa29)}-単位(Ua4)、f25個の-M-単位(Ua5)、及びf26個の-[C(M){(CHf27-Si(Mg21(H)g22(R293-g21-g22}]-単位(Ua6)は、M10-が式(a1)における一方の末端であり、-Si(Mg31(H)g32(R303-g31-g32が他方の末端であり、少なくとも一部でフルオロポリエーテル構造を形成する順で並び、-O-が-O-と連続しない限り、それぞれの単位が任意の順で並んで結合する。任意の順で並んで結合するとは、各繰り返し単位が連続して上記式(a1)に記載の通りの順に並ぶ意味に限定されないことを意味し、またf21個の-{C(R25)(R26)}-単位(Ua1)が連続して結合している必要はなく、途中に他の単位を介して結合していてもよく、合計でf21個あればよいことを意味する。f22~f26で括られる単位(Ua2)~(Ua6)についても同様である。
In the above formula (a1),
Rf a26 , Rf a27 , Rf a28 , and Rf a29 are each independently a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom ; When a plurality of Rf a26 are present, the plurality of Rf a26 may be different, when there are a plurality of Rf a27, the plurality of Rf a27 may be different, and when a plurality of Rf a28 are present, a plurality of Rf a28 may be different from each other, and when a plurality of Rf a29 are present, the plurality of Rf a29 may be different,
R 25 and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a halogenated alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with halogen atoms group, at least one of R 25 and R 26 bonded to one carbon atom is a hydrogen atom ; When doing, multiple R 26 may be different,
R 27 and R 28 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a single bond ; When a plurality of R 28 are present, the plurality of R 28 may be different,
R 29 and R 30 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R 29 are present, the plurality of R 29 may be different, and when a plurality of R 30 are present may have different R 30s ,
M7 is -O-, -C(=O)-O-, -OC(=O)-, -NR-, -NRC (=O)-, -C(=O)NR-, - CH═CH— or —C 6 H 4 — (phenylene group), R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and M 7 is When a plurality of M7 are present, the plurality of M7 may be different,
M 5 is a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when multiple M 5 are present, the multiple M 5 may be different,
M 10 is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom,
M 8 and M 9 are each independently a hydrolyzable group, a hydroxy group, or —(CH 2 ) e7 —Si(OR 14 ) 3 , e7 is 1 to 5, and R 14 is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and when a plurality of M 8 are present, the plurality of M 8 may be different, and when a plurality of M 9 is present, the plurality of M 9 may be different,
f21, f22, f23, f24, and f25 are each independently an integer of 0 to 600, and the total value of f21, f22, f23, f24, and f25 is 13 or more,
f26 is an integer from 0 to 20,
each f27 is independently an integer of 0 to 2,
g21 is an integer of 1 to 3, g22 is an integer of 0 to 2, g21 + g22 ≤ 3,
g31 is an integer of 1 to 3, g32 is an integer of 0 to 2, g31 + g32 ≤ 3,
M 10 -, -Si (M 9 ) g31 (H) g32 (R 30 ) 3-g31-g32 , f21 -{C(R 25 )(R 26 )}-units (U a1 ), f22 -{C(Rf a26 )(Rf a27 )}-unit (U a2 ), f23 -{Si(R 27 )(R 28 )}-unit (U a3 ), f24-{Si(Rf a28 )(Rf a29 )}-units (U a4 ), f25 -M 7 -units (U a5 ), and f26 -[C(M 5 ){(CH 2 ) f27 -Si(M 8 ) g21 (H) g22 (R 29 ) 3-g21-g22 }]-unit (U a6 ) has M 10 - at one end in formula (a1), and -Si(M 9 ) g31 (H) g32 ( R 30 ) 3-g31-g32 are the other ends, and are arranged in an order that forms a fluoropolyether structure at least in part, and each unit can be in any order as long as —O— is not continuous with —O— Join side by side. “Arranged in any order and bonded” means that the repeating units are not limited to being arranged consecutively in the order as described in formula (a1) above, and f21 -{C(R 25 )( R 26 )}-units (U a1 ) do not need to be continuously bonded, and may be bonded via other units along the way. The same applies to the units (U a2 ) to (U a6 ) enclosed by f22 to f26.
 また、R27及びR28の少なくとも一方が単結合である場合には、f23で括られる単位の単結合部分と、Mにおける-O-とが、繰り返し結合して、分岐鎖状又は環状のシロキサン結合を形成することができる。 Further, when at least one of R 27 and R 28 is a single bond, the single bond portion of the unit enclosed by f23 and —O— in M 7 are repeatedly bonded to form a branched or cyclic It can form siloxane bonds.
 Rfa26、Rfa27、Rfa28、及びRfa29は、好ましくはそれぞれ独立して、フッ素原子、又は1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~2のフッ化アルキル基であることが好ましく、フッ素原子、又は全ての水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~2のフッ化アルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 R25及びR26は、好ましくはそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、又はフッ素原子であり、一つの炭素原子に結合するR25及びR26の少なくとも一方は水素原子である。
 R27及びR28は、好ましくはそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、又は炭素数1~2のアルキル基であり、より好ましくはすべて炭素数1~2のアルキル基である。
 R29及びR30は、炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましく、より好ましくは炭素数1~2のアルキル基である。
 Mは、好ましくは、-C(=O)-O-、-O-、-O-C(=O)-、-CH=CH-、又は-C-(フェニレン基)である。 Mは、好ましくは水素原子又は炭素数1~2のアルキル基であり、より好ましくはすべて水素原子である。
 M10は、より好ましくはフッ素原子である。
 M及びMは、より好ましくはそれぞれ独立して、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子であり、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、塩素原子がより好ましく、特にメトキシ基、又はエトキシ基が好ましい。
 好ましくは、f21、f23、及びf24は、それぞれf22の1/2以下であり、より好ましくは1/4以下であり、さらに好ましくはf23又はf24は0であり、特に好ましくはf24は0である。
 f25は、好ましくはf21、f22、f23、f24の合計値の1/5以上であり、f21、f22、f23、f24の合計値以下である。
 f21は0~20が好ましく、より好ましくは0~15であり、更に好ましくは1~15であり、特に1~10が好ましい。f22は、5~600が好ましく、8~600がより好ましく、更に好ましくは20~200であり、一層好ましくは30~200であり、より一層好ましくは35~180であり、最も好ましくは40~180である。f23及びf24は、0~5が好ましく、より好ましくは0~3であり、更に好ましくは0である。f25は4~600が好ましく、より好ましくは4~200であり、更に好ましくは10~200であり、一層好ましくは30~60である。f21、f22、f23、f24、f25の合計値は、20~600が好ましく、20~250がより好ましく、50~230が更に好ましい。f26は、好ましくは0~18であり、より好ましくは0~15であり、更に好ましくは0~10であり、一層好ましくは0~5である。f27は、好ましくは0~1であり、好ましくは0である。g21及びg31は、それぞれ独立して2~3が好ましく、3がより好ましい。g22及びg32は、それぞれ独立して0又は1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
Rf a26 , Rf a27 , Rf a28 , and Rf a29 are preferably each independently a fluorine atom or a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms. More preferably, it is a fluorine atom or a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms in which all hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms.
R 25 and R 26 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, and at least one of R 25 and R 26 bonded to one carbon atom is a hydrogen atom.
R 27 and R 28 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably all alkyl groups having 1 to 2 carbon atoms.
R 29 and R 30 are preferably C 1-5 alkyl groups, more preferably C 1-2 alkyl groups.
M 7 is preferably -C(=O)-O-, -O-, -O-C(=O)-, -CH=CH- or -C 6 H 4 - (phenylene group) . M5 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably all hydrogen atoms.
M10 is more preferably a fluorine atom.
M8 and M9 are more preferably each independently an alkoxy group or a halogen atom, more preferably a methoxy group, an ethoxy group or a chlorine atom, particularly preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group.
Preferably, f21, f23, and f24 are each 1/2 or less of f22, more preferably 1/4 or less, still more preferably f23 or f24 is 0, and particularly preferably f24 is 0 .
f25 is preferably 1/5 or more of the total value of f21, f22, f23, and f24 and less than or equal to the total value of f21, f22, f23, and f24.
f21 is preferably 0-20, more preferably 0-15, even more preferably 1-15, and particularly preferably 1-10. f22 is preferably 5 to 600, more preferably 8 to 600, still more preferably 20 to 200, still more preferably 30 to 200, still more preferably 35 to 180, most preferably 40 to 180 is. f23 and f24 are preferably 0 to 5, more preferably 0 to 3, still more preferably 0. f25 is preferably 4-600, more preferably 4-200, even more preferably 10-200, still more preferably 30-60. The total value of f21, f22, f23, f24 and f25 is preferably 20-600, more preferably 20-250, even more preferably 50-230. f26 is preferably 0-18, more preferably 0-15, even more preferably 0-10, still more preferably 0-5. f27 is preferably 0 to 1, preferably 0. g21 and g31 are each independently preferably 2 to 3, more preferably 3. g22 and g32 are each independently preferably 0 or 1, more preferably 0.
 上記式(a1)において、R25及びR26が水素原子、又はフッ素原子であり(一つの炭素原子に結合するR25及びR26の少なくとも一方は水素原子)、R27、R28、R29及びR30がそれぞれ独立に炭素数1~2のアルキル基であり、Rfa26及びRfa27がフッ素原子又は全ての水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~2のフッ化アルキル基であり、Mが-C(=O)-O-、-O-、-CH=CH-、又は-C-(フェニレン基)であり、M及びMが全てメトキシ基、エトキシ基又は塩素原子(特にメトキシ基又はエトキシ基)であり、Mが水素原子であり、M10がフッ素原子であり、f21が1~10(好ましくは1~5)、f22が30~200(より好ましくは40~180)、f23が0~3、f24が0、f25が30~60、f26が0~6(特に0)であり、f27が0~1(特に好ましくは0)であり、g21及びg31が1~3であり、g22及びg32が0~2(いずれも好ましくは0又は1であり、より好ましくは0)である化合物(a11)を有機ケイ素化合物(A)として用いることが好ましい。 In formula (a1) above, R 25 and R 26 are hydrogen atoms or fluorine atoms (at least one of R 25 and R 26 bonded to one carbon atom is a hydrogen atom), and R 27 , R 28 and R 29 and R 30 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, and Rf a26 and Rf a27 are a fluorine atom or a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms in which all hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms; , M 7 is -C(=O)-O-, -O-, -CH=CH-, or -C 6 H 4 - (phenylene group), and M 8 and M 9 are all methoxy and ethoxy groups or a chlorine atom (especially a methoxy group or an ethoxy group), M5 is a hydrogen atom, M10 is a fluorine atom, f21 is 1 to 10 (preferably 1 to 5 ), f22 is 30 to 200 (more preferably 40 to 180), f23 is 0 to 3, f24 is 0, f25 is 30 to 60, f26 is 0 to 6 (especially 0), f27 is 0 to 1 (especially preferably 0), g21 and g31 are 1 to 3, and g22 and g32 are 0 to 2 (both are preferably 0 or 1, more preferably 0) are preferably used as the organosilicon compound (A). .
 上記式(a1)において、R25及びR26がいずれも水素原子であり、f21が1~15であり、Rfa26及びRfa27がいずれもフッ素原子であり、f22が40~180(特に50~100)であり、f23及びf24がいずれも0であり、Mが-O-であり、f25が30~60であり、Mが水素原子であり、M及びMが全てメトキシ基、エトキシ基又は塩素原子(特にメトキシ基又はエトキシ基)であり、f26が0~10であり、f27が0であり、M10がフッ素原子であり、g21及びg31がいずれも3である化合物(a12)を有機ケイ素化合物(A)として用いることも好ましい。 In the above formula (a1), both R 25 and R 26 are hydrogen atoms, f21 is 1 to 15, both Rf a26 and Rf a27 are fluorine atoms, and f22 is 40 to 180 (especially 50 to 100), f23 and f24 are both 0 , M7 is —O—, f25 is 30 to 60 , M5 is a hydrogen atom, M8 and M9 are all methoxy groups, compound ( a12 ) as the organosilicon compound (A).
 有機ケイ素化合物(A)は下記式(a2)で表されることが好ましい。 The organosilicon compound (A) is preferably represented by the following formula (a2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 上記式(a2)中、
 Rfa1は、両端が酸素原子である2価のフルオロポリエーテル構造であり、
 R11、R12、及びR13は、それぞれ独立して炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R11が複数存在する場合は複数のR11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R12が複数存在する場合は複数のR12がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R13が複数存在する場合は複数のR13がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 E、E、E、E、及びEは、それぞれ独立して水素原子又はフッ素原子であり、Eが複数存在する場合は複数のEがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Eが複数存在する場合は複数のEがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Eが複数存在する場合は複数のEがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Eが複数存在する場合は複数のEがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Eが複数存在する場合は複数のEがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 G及びGは、それぞれ独立して、シロキサン結合を有する2~10価のオルガノシロキサン基であり、
 J、J、及びJは、それぞれ独立して、加水分解性基、ヒドロキシ基又は-(CHe7-Si(OR14であり、e7は1~5であり、R14はメチル基又はエチル基であり、Jが複数存在する場合は複数のJがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Jが複数存在する場合は複数のJがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Jが複数存在する場合は複数のJがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 L及びLは、それぞれ独立して、酸素原子、窒素原子、ケイ素原子又はフッ素原子を含んでいてもよい炭素数1~12の2価の連結基であって、-{C(R25)(R26)}-単位(Ua1)、-{C(Rfa26)(Rfa27)}-単位(Ua2)、-{Si(R27)(R28)}-単位(Ua3)又は-M-単位(Ua5)の一つ以上が任意の順で並んで結合した連結基であり(R25、R26、R27、R28、Rfa26、Rfa27、Mは上記式(a1)におけるものと同じ)、
 a10及びa14は、それぞれ独立して0又は1であり、
 a11及びa15は、それぞれ独立して0又は1であり、
 a12及びa16は、それぞれ独立して0~9であり、
 a13は、0~4であり、
 a11が0の時、又はa11が1であってGが2価の時はd11が1であり、a11が1であってGが3~10価のときは、d11はGの価数より一つ少ない数であり、
 a15が0の時、又はa15が1であってGが2価の時はd12が1であり、a15が1であってGが3~10価のときは、d12はGの価数より一つ少ない数であり、
 a21及びa23は、それぞれ独立して0~2であり、
 e11は1~3、e12は0~2であり、e11+e12≦3であり、
 e21は1~3、e22は0~2であり、e21+e22≦3であり、
 e31は1~3、e32は0~2であり、e31+e32≦3である。
In the above formula (a2),
Rf a1 is a divalent fluoropolyether structure having oxygen atoms at both ends,
R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when there are a plurality of R 11 , the plurality of R 11 may be different, and the plurality of R 12 may be When present, multiple R 12 may be different, and when multiple R 13 are present, multiple R 13 may be different,
E 1 , E 2 , E 3 , E 4 , and E 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, and when a plurality of E 1 are present, the plurality of E 1 may be different, and E When a plurality of 2 are present, a plurality of E 2 may be different, when a plurality of E 3 are present, a plurality of E 3 may be different, and when a plurality of E 4 is present, a plurality of E 4 may be different, and when multiple E 5 are present, the multiple E 5 may be different,
G 1 and G 2 are each independently a divalent to decavalent organosiloxane group having a siloxane bond,
J 1 , J 2 , and J 3 are each independently a hydrolyzable group, a hydroxy group, or —(CH 2 ) e7 —Si(OR 14 ) 3 , e7 is 1 to 5, and R 14 is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and when there are a plurality of J 1s , the plurality of J 1s may be different, and when there are a plurality of J 2s , the plurality of J 2s may be different, and J When there are a plurality of 3 , the plurality of J 3 may be different,
L 1 and L 2 are each independently a divalent linking group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a silicon atom or a fluorine atom, and -{C(R 25 )(R 26 )}-unit (U a1 ),-{C(Rf a26 )(Rf a27 )}-unit (U a2 ),-{Si(R 27 )(R 28 )}-unit (U a3 ) Or, at least one -M 7 - unit (U a5 ) is a linking group that is arranged in any order (R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 28 , Rf a26 , Rf a27 and M 7 are the same as in formula (a1)),
a10 and a14 are each independently 0 or 1,
a11 and a15 are each independently 0 or 1,
a12 and a16 are each independently 0 to 9;
a13 is 0 to 4;
When a11 is 0, or when a11 is 1 and G1 has a valence of 2, d11 is 1, and when a11 is 1 and G1 has a valence of 3 to 10, d11 is the value of G1 is a number one less than the number,
When a15 is 0, or when a15 is 1 and G2 has a valence of 2 , d12 is 1, and when a15 is 1 and G2 has a valence of 3 to 10, d12 is the value of G2. is a number one less than the number,
a21 and a23 are each independently 0 to 2,
e11 is 1 to 3, e12 is 0 to 2, e11 + e12 ≤ 3,
e21 is 1 to 3, e22 is 0 to 2, e21 + e22 ≤ 3,
e31 is 1 to 3, e32 is 0 to 2, and e31+e32≦3.
 なお、a10が0であるとは、a10を付して括られた部分が単結合であることを意味し、a11、a12、a13、a14、a15、a16、a21又はa23が0である場合も同様である。 Note that a10 is 0 means that the portion enclosed with a10 is a single bond, and even if a11, a12, a13, a14, a15, a16, a21 or a23 is 0 It is the same.
 Rfa1は、-O-(CFCFO)e4-、-O-(CFCFCFO)e5-、-O-(CF-CF(CF)O)e6-が好ましい。e4、及びe5は、いずれも15~80であり、e6は3~60(より好ましくは25~55)である。また、Rfa1は、pモルのパーフルオロプロピレングリコールとqモルのパーフルオロメタンジオールがランダムに脱水縮合した構造の両末端の水酸基から水素原子が外れて残った基であることも好ましく、p+qが15~80である。Rfa1は、-O-(CFCFCFO)e5-であってe5が15~80(好ましくは20~40)であること、又は-O-(CF-CF(CF)O)e6-であってe6が25~55であることがより好ましい。 Rf a1 is preferably -O-(CF 2 CF 2 O) e4 -, -O-(CF 2 CF 2 CF 2 O) e5 -, -O-(CF 2 -CF(CF 3 )O) e6 - . Both e4 and e5 are 15 to 80, and e6 is 3 to 60 (more preferably 25 to 55). Rf a1 is also preferably a group in which hydrogen atoms are removed from hydroxyl groups at both ends of a structure obtained by randomly dehydrating and condensing p mol of perfluoropropylene glycol and q mol of perfluoromethanediol, and p + q is 15-80. Rf a1 is —O—(CF 2 CF 2 CF 2 O) e5 — and e5 is 15 to 80 (preferably 20 to 40), or —O—(CF 2 —CF(CF 3 ) O) more preferably e6- and e6 is from 25 to 55;
 R11、R12、及びR13は、それぞれ独立して、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、より好ましくは炭素数1~2のアルキル基である。 R 11 , R 12 and R 13 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms.
 E、E、E及びEはいずれも水素原子であることが好ましく、Eはフッ素原子であることが好ましい。 Each of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is preferably a hydrogen atom, and E 5 is preferably a fluorine atom.
 L及びLは、それぞれ独立して、-{C(R25)(R26)}-単位(Ua1)、-{C(Rfa26)(Rfa27)}-単位(Ua2)、-{Si(R27)(R28)}-単位(Ua3)又は-M-単位(Ua5)の一つ以上が任意の順で並んで結合したフッ素原子又は酸素原子を含んだ炭素数1~12(好ましくは1~10)の2価の連結基が好ましい。Lは、x1が1~5(好ましくは1~3)である-(CFx1-又は下記(L1-1)~(L1-5)で表される基であることが好ましい。なお、下記(L1-1)~(L1-5)における*は結合手を表す。Lは、x2が1~5(好ましくは1~3)である-(CFx2-が好ましい。 L 1 and L 2 each independently represent -{C(R 25 )(R 26 )}-unit (U a1 ), -{C(Rf a26 )(Rf a27 )}-unit (U a2 ), -{Si(R 27 )(R 28 )}-units (U a3 ) or -M 7 -units (U a5 ), one or more of which are aligned in any order and bonded to carbon containing a fluorine atom or an oxygen atom A divalent linking group of numbers 1 to 12 (preferably 1 to 10) is preferred. L 1 is preferably -(CF 2 ) x1 - in which x1 is 1 to 5 (preferably 1 to 3) or a group represented by the following (L1-1) to (L1-5). Note that * in (L1-1) to (L1-5) below represents a bond. L 2 is preferably -(CF 2 ) x2 - where x2 is 1 to 5 (preferably 1 to 3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 G1及びG2は、それぞれ独立して、シロキサン結合を有する2~5価のオルガノシロキサン基が好ましい。 G 1 and G 2 are each independently preferably a divalent to pentavalent organosiloxane group having a siloxane bond.
 J、J、及びJは、それぞれ独立して、メトキシ基、エトキシ基又は-(CHe7-Si(OR14が好ましく、より好ましくはメトキシ基又はエトキシ基である。 J 1 , J 2 and J 3 are each independently preferably methoxy, ethoxy or —(CH 2 ) e7 —Si(OR 14 ) 3 , more preferably methoxy or ethoxy.
 a10は1が好ましく、a11は0が好ましく、a12は0~7が好ましく、より好ましくは0~5であり、a13は0~3が好ましく、a14は1が好ましく、a15は0が好ましく、a16は0~6が好ましく、より好ましくは0~3であり、a21及びa23はいずれも0又は1が好ましく(より好ましくはいずれも0)、d11は1が好ましく、d12は1が好ましく、e11、e21及びe31はいずれも1~3が好ましい。e12、e22、e32はいずれも0または1が好ましく、より好ましくは0である。これらの好ましい範囲は、単独で満たしていてもよいし、2つ以上組み合わせて満たしていてもよい。 a10 is preferably 1, a11 is preferably 0, a12 is preferably 0 to 7, more preferably 0 to 5, a13 is preferably 0 to 3, a14 is preferably 1, a15 is preferably 0, a16 is preferably 0 to 6, more preferably 0 to 3, both a21 and a23 are preferably 0 or 1 (more preferably both are 0), d11 is preferably 1, d12 is preferably 1, e11, Both e21 and e31 are preferably 1-3. Each of e12, e22 and e32 is preferably 0 or 1, more preferably 0. These preferred ranges may be satisfied singly or in combination of two or more.
 化合物(A)としては、上記式(a2)のRfa1が、O-(CF-CF(CF)O)e6-(e6が25~55)であり、R12及びR13がそれぞれ独立して炭素数1~2のアルキル基であり、Lが上記(L1-1)~(L1-5)のいずれかで表される基であり、Lが炭素数1~5(好ましくは1~3)のパーフルオロアルキレン基であり、a12及びa13が0であり、Eが水素原子であり、Eがフッ素原子であり、J、及びJがいずれもメトキシ基又はエトキシ基(特にメトキシ基)であり、a10が1であり、a11が0であり、a14が1であり、a15が0であり、a16が0~6(特に0)であり、a23が0又は1であり(好ましくは0)、d11が1であり、d12が1であり、e21及びe31がそれぞれ独立して1~3であり、e22及びe32がいずれも0又は1(特に0)である化合物(a21)を用いることが好ましい。 As the compound (A), Rf a1 in the above formula (a2) is O—(CF 2 —CF(CF 3 )O) e6 — (e6 is 25 to 55), and R 12 and R 13 are each independent is an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, L 1 is a group represented by any one of the above (L1-1) to (L1-5), and L 2 is a group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 3), wherein a12 and a13 are 0, E 4 is a hydrogen atom, E 5 is a fluorine atom, and J 2 and J 3 are both a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. (especially a methoxy group), a10 is 1, a11 is 0, a14 is 1, a15 is 0, a16 is 0 to 6 (especially 0), and a23 is 0 or 1 Yes (preferably 0), d11 is 1, d12 is 1, e21 and e31 are each independently 1 to 3, e22 and e32 are both 0 or 1 (especially 0) ( a21) is preferably used.
 また、化合物(A)としては、上記式(a2)のRfa1が、-O-(CFCFCFO)e5-であってe5が15~80(好ましくは20~40)であり、e11、e21及びe31がいずれも3であり、E~Eがいずれも水素原子であり、Eがフッ素原子であり、a11及びa15が0であり、L及びLが、いずれもxが1~5(好ましくは1~3)である-(CF-であり、a10及びa14が1であり、J及びJがいずれもメトキシ基であり、a12が0~9であり、a21が0であり、a13が2であり、a16が0であり、d11及びd12がいずれも1である化合物(a22)を用いることも好ましい。 As the compound (A), Rf a1 in formula (a2) above is —O—(CF 2 CF 2 CF 2 O) e5 — and e5 is 15 to 80 (preferably 20 to 40). , e11, e21 and e31 are all 3, E 1 to E 4 are all hydrogen atoms, E 5 is a fluorine atom, a11 and a15 are 0, L 1 and L 2 are is -(CF 2 ) x - in which x is 1 to 5 (preferably 1 to 3), a10 and a14 are 1, both J 1 and J 2 are methoxy groups, and a12 is 0 to 9, a21 is 0, a13 is 2, a16 is 0, and d11 and d12 are both 1. It is also preferred to use the compound (a22).
 化合物(A)としては、上記式(a2)のRfa1が-O-(CFCFCFO)e5-であり、e5が25~40であり、Lがフッ素原子及び酸素原子を含む炭素数3~6の2価の連結基であり、Lが炭素数2~10のパーフルオロアルキレン基であり、E、Eがいずれも水素原子であり、Eがフッ素原子であり、J2が-(CH2e7-Si(OCH33であり、e7が2~4であり、a10が1であり、a11が0であり、a12が0であり、a13が2であり、a14が1であり、a15が0であり、a16が0であり、d11が1であり、d12が1であり、e21が3である化合物(a23)を用いることも好ましい。 As the compound (A), Rf a1 in the above formula (a2) is —O—(CF 2 CF 2 CF 2 O) e5 —, e5 is 25 to 40, and L 1 is a fluorine atom and an oxygen atom. a divalent linking group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, L 2 is a perfluoroalkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, both E 2 and E 3 are hydrogen atoms, and E 5 is a fluorine atom. , J 2 is —(CH 2 ) e7 —Si(OCH 3 ) 3 , e7 is 2 to 4, a10 is 1, a11 is 0, a12 is 0, a13 is 2 , a14 is 1, a15 is 0, a16 is 0, d11 is 1, d12 is 1 and e21 is 3 (a23) is also preferably used.
 有機ケイ素化合物(A)として、より具体的には下記式(a3)の化合物が挙げられる。 More specifically, the organosilicon compound (A) includes compounds of the following formula (a3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 上記式(a3)中、R30は炭素数が1~6のパーフルオロアルキル基であり、R31は炭素数が1~5であるパーフルオロオキシアルキレン基が25~55繰り返されたパーフルオロポリエーテル構造(両末端は酸素原子)であり、R32は上記(L1-1)~(L1-5)のいずれかで表される基であり、R33は炭素数1~5のアルキル基であり、R34はアルコキシ基であり、y11は1~3であり、y12は0~2であり、y11+y12≦3である。R30は炭素数1~3のパーフルオロアルキル基であることが好ましく、R31は炭素数が1~3である分岐鎖状パーフルオロオキシアルキレン基が25~55繰り返されたパーフルオロポリエーテル構造(両末端は酸素原子)であることが好ましい。y11+y12は3であることが好ましい。 In the above formula (a3), R 30 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and R 31 is a perfluoropolyethylene group having 25 to 55 repeated perfluorooxyalkylene groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. It has an ether structure (both ends are oxygen atoms), R 32 is a group represented by any one of the above (L1-1) to (L1-5), and R 33 is an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. , R 34 is an alkoxy group, y11 is 1 to 3, y12 is 0 to 2, and y11+y12≦3. R 30 is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and R 31 is a perfluoropolyether structure in which 25 to 55 branched perfluorooxyalkylene groups having 1 to 3 carbon atoms are repeated. (Both ends are oxygen atoms). y11+y12 is preferably three.
 前記有機ケイ素化合物(A)としては、下記式(a4)で表される化合物も挙げることができる。 Examples of the organosilicon compound (A) include compounds represented by the following formula (a4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 上記式(a4)中、R40は炭素数が2~5のパーフルオロアルキル基であり、R41は炭素数が2~5のパーフルオロアルキレン基であり、R42は炭素数2~5のアルキレン基の水素原子の一部がフッ素に置換されたフルオロアルキレン基であり、R43、R44はそれぞれ独立に炭素数が2~5のアルキレン基であり、R45はメチル基又はエチル基である。k1は1~5の整数である。k2は1~3の整数であり、2以上であることが好ましく、3であってもよい。 In the above formula (a4), R 40 is a C 2-5 perfluoroalkyl group, R 41 is a C 2-5 perfluoroalkylene group, and R 42 is a C 2-5 a fluoroalkylene group in which some of the hydrogen atoms of the alkylene group are substituted with fluorine, R 43 and R 44 are each independently an alkylene group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 45 is a methyl group or an ethyl group; be. k1 is an integer of 1-5. k2 is an integer of 1 to 3, preferably 2 or more, and may be 3.
 更に、前記有機ケイ素化合物(A)としては、下記式(a5)で表される化合物も挙げることができる。 Furthermore, as the organosilicon compound (A), a compound represented by the following formula (a5) can also be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 上記式(a5)中、R50は炭素数が2~6のパーフルオロアルキル基であり、R51は炭素数が2~6のパーフルオロアルキレン基であり、R52は炭素数が2~30のパーフルオロアルキレン基であり、R53は炭素数が2~6の3価の飽和炭化水素基であり、R54は炭素数が1~3のアルキル基である。R50、R51、及びR53の炭素数は、それぞれ独立に2~4が好ましく、2~3がより好ましい。R52の炭素数は、2~16が好ましく、より好ましくは2~10である。h1は5~50であり、h2は1~10である。h1は10~40が好ましい。 In the above formula (a5), R 50 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, R 51 is a perfluoroalkylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and R 52 has 2 to 30 carbon atoms. is a perfluoroalkylene group, R 53 is a trivalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and R 54 is an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms in R 50 , R 51 and R 53 is each independently preferably 2-4, more preferably 2-3. The carbon number of R 52 is preferably 2-16, more preferably 2-10. h1 is 5-50 and h2 is 1-10. h1 is preferably 10-40.
 上記式(a5)で表される化合物としてより具体的には、下記式(1)で示される化合物、又は該化合物の類似構造を有する化合物が挙げられ、ダイキン工業株式会社製のオプツール(登録商標)DSXにおける有機ケイ素化合物(A)は下記式(1)で表される。 More specifically, the compound represented by the above formula (a5) includes a compound represented by the following formula (1), or a compound having a similar structure to the compound. OPTOOL (registered trademark) manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd. ) The organosilicon compound (A) in DSX is represented by the following formula (1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 上記式(1)においてrは24、sは1~10の整数であり、数平均分子量は約5000である。 In the above formula (1), r is 24, s is an integer of 1 to 10, and the number average molecular weight is about 5,000.
 前記類似構造としては、上記式(1)の炭化水素基の炭素数又はフッ素原子で置換された炭化水素基の炭素数が異なる構造、パーフルオロポリエーテル構造とケイ素原子が連結基を介さずに結合している構造、パーフルオロポリエーテル構造とケイ素原子の間の連結基の任意の位置に他の炭化水素基(少なくとも一部の水素原子がフッ素原子で置換された炭化水素基も含む)が介在する構造、ケイ素原子と加水分解性基が連結基を介して結合する構造、r及びsの値が異なる構造、などが挙げられるが、これらの構造に限定されない。 As the similar structure, a structure in which the number of carbon atoms in the hydrocarbon group of the above formula (1) or the number of carbon atoms in the hydrocarbon group substituted with a fluorine atom is different, a perfluoropolyether structure and a silicon atom without a linking group Other hydrocarbon groups (including hydrocarbon groups in which at least some of the hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms) are present at arbitrary positions of the linking group between the bonding structure, the perfluoropolyether structure and the silicon atom Intervening structures, structures in which a silicon atom and a hydrolyzable group are bonded via a linking group, structures in which the values of r and s are different, and the like are included, but are not limited to these structures.
 前記有機ケイ素化合物(A)の数平均分子量は、2,000以上が好ましく、より好ましくは4,000以上であり、更に好ましくは5,000以上、一層好ましくは5,300以上であり、また40,000以下が好ましく、より好ましくは20,000以下であり、更に好ましくは15,000以下である。 The number average molecular weight of the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably 2,000 or more, more preferably 4,000 or more, even more preferably 5,000 or more, still more preferably 5,300 or more, and 40 ,000 or less, more preferably 20,000 or less, and even more preferably 15,000 or less.
 有機ケイ素化合物(A)としては1種のみ用いてもよいし、2種以上用いてもよい。 As the organosilicon compound (A), only one type may be used, or two or more types may be used.
 前記混合組成物100質量%に対する有機ケイ素化合物(A)の質量比(固形分)は、1質量%超であり、このような範囲とすることで、蒸着で好適に撥水層(r)を形成可能である。有機ケイ素化合物(A)の質量比は、好ましくは3質量%以上であり、より好ましくは5質量%以上であり、更に好ましくは10質量%以上であり、更に一層好ましくは13質量%以上である。また、有機ケイ素化合物(A)の質量比は、30質量%以下であることが好ましく、このような範囲とすることで、撥水層(r)の外観が良好となる。有機ケイ素化合物(A)の質量比は、25質量%以下であってもよい。有機ケイ素化合物(A)及び後述する他の化合物の量は、組成物の調製時に調整でき、また組成物の分析結果から算出してもよい。組成物の分析結果から特定する方法としては、例えば、組成物に含まれる各化合物の種類は、組成物をガスクロマトグラフィー質量分析法や液体クロマトグラフィー質量分析法等により分析し、得られた分析結果をライブラリ検索することで特定でき、また組成物に含まれる各化合物の量は、検量線法を用いて上記分析結果から算出することができる。また、有機ケイ素化合物(A)の質量比は、好ましくは有機ケイ素化合物(A)と有機ケイ素化合物(C)と溶剤の混合組成物を100質量%とした時の割合で計算され、後述の有機ケイ素化合物(C)の質量比についても同様である。 The mass ratio (solid content) of the organosilicon compound (A) to 100% by mass of the mixed composition is more than 1% by mass. Formable. The mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, still more preferably 10% by mass or more, and even more preferably 13% by mass or more. . Moreover, the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably 30% by mass or less, and by setting it in such a range, the appearance of the water-repellent layer (r) is improved. The mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (A) may be 25% by mass or less. The amounts of the organosilicon compound (A) and other compounds described later can be adjusted during preparation of the composition, or can be calculated from the analysis results of the composition. As a method of specifying from the analysis results of the composition, for example, the type of each compound contained in the composition is analyzed by gas chromatography mass spectrometry, liquid chromatography mass spectrometry, etc., and the obtained analysis The results can be identified by library searching, and the amount of each compound contained in the composition can be calculated from the above analytical results using the calibration curve method. Further, the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (A) is preferably calculated as a ratio when the mixed composition of the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C) and the solvent is taken as 100% by mass, and the organic The same applies to the mass ratio of the silicon compound (C).
 上記混合組成物は、上述した通り、有機ケイ素化合物(A)、有機ケイ素化合物(C)と、好ましくは溶剤(特にフッ素系溶剤(D1)及び非フッ素系溶剤(D2))を混合した後に、反応が進んだものも含み、反応が進んだ例としては、前記混合組成物が、有機ケイ素化合物(A)のケイ素原子に結合した(連結基を介して結合していてもよい)加水分解性基が加水分解により-SiOH基(SiとOHが連結基を介して結合していてもよい)となった化合物を含むことが挙げられる。また、前記混合組成物が有機ケイ素化合物(A)の縮合物を含むことも挙げられ、該縮合物としては、有機ケイ素化合物(A)が有する-SiOH基又は加水分解で生じた有機ケイ素化合物(A)の-SiOH基(SiとOHが連結基を介して結合していてもよい)が、有機ケイ素化合物(A)由来の-SiOH基(SiとOHが連結基を介して結合していてもよい)、又は他の化合物由来の-SiOH基と脱水縮合して形成された縮合物が挙げられる。 As described above, the mixed composition is obtained by mixing the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C), and preferably the solvent (especially the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2)), Including those in which the reaction has progressed, examples in which the reaction has progressed include the mixed composition having a hydrolyzable hydrolyzable compound bonded to the silicon atom of the organosilicon compound (A) (which may be bonded via a linking group). Examples include compounds in which a group is hydrolyzed to a —SiOH group (Si and OH may be bonded via a linking group). Further, the mixed composition may contain a condensate of the organosilicon compound (A), and the condensate may be a —SiOH group possessed by the organosilicon compound (A) or an organosilicon compound produced by hydrolysis ( The -SiOH group (Si and OH may be bonded via a linking group) of A) is a -SiOH group derived from the organosilicon compound (A) (Si and OH are bonded via a linking group may be used), or condensates formed by dehydration condensation with —SiOH groups derived from other compounds.
 2-2.有機ケイ素化合物(C)
 有機ケイ素化合物(C)は、アミノ基又はアミン骨格を有する化合物であり、アミノ基及びアミン骨格の両方を有していてもよい。アミン骨格とは、-NR100-で表され、R100は水素原子又はアルキル基である。前記有機ケイ素化合物(C)のケイ素原子には加水分解性基又はヒドロキシ基が結合していることが好ましい。有機ケイ素化合物(C)のケイ素原子に結合する加水分解性基としては、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、アセトキシ基、イソシアネート基等が挙げられる。前記有機ケイ素化合物(C)のケイ素原子には、炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基又はヒドロキシ基が結合していることが好ましく、炭素数1~2のアルコキシ基又はヒドロキシ基がより好ましく、メトキシ基が特に好ましい。有機ケイ素化合物(C)としては、少なくともアミン骨格を有していることが好ましく、アミン骨格とアミノ基の両方を有していることがより好ましい。本発明の混合組成物に有機ケイ素化合物(C)が用いられていることにより、混合組成物から得られる皮膜が基材に形成された積層体において、該皮膜の基材への密着性が良好となり、その結果積層体の耐摩耗性が向上し得る。
2-2. Organosilicon compound (C)
The organosilicon compound (C) is a compound having an amino group or an amine skeleton, and may have both an amino group and an amine skeleton. The amine skeleton is represented by —NR 100 —, where R 100 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. A hydrolyzable group or a hydroxy group is preferably bonded to the silicon atom of the organosilicon compound (C). The hydrolyzable groups bonded to the silicon atoms of the organosilicon compound (C) include alkoxy groups, halogen atoms, cyano groups, acetoxy groups, isocyanate groups and the like. The silicon atom of the organosilicon compound (C) is preferably bonded to an alkoxy group or a hydroxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkoxy group or a hydroxy group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, and a methoxy group. is particularly preferred. The organosilicon compound (C) preferably has at least an amine skeleton, and more preferably has both an amine skeleton and an amino group. By using the organosilicon compound (C) in the mixed composition of the present invention, in a laminate in which a film obtained from the mixed composition is formed on a substrate, the film has good adhesion to the substrate. As a result, the wear resistance of the laminate can be improved.
 有機ケイ素化合物(C)としては、以下の式(c1)~(c3)で表される化合物が例示できる。 Examples of the organosilicon compound (C) include compounds represented by the following formulas (c1) to (c3).
 2-2-1.式(c1)で表される有機ケイ素化合物(C)(以下、有機ケイ素化合物(C1)) 2-2-1. Organosilicon compound (C) represented by formula (c1) (hereinafter, organosilicon compound (C1))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 上記式(c1)中、
 Rx11、Rx12、Rx13、Rx14は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であり、Rx11が複数存在する場合は複数のRx11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx12が複数存在する場合は複数のRx12がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx13が複数存在する場合は複数のRx13がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx14が複数存在する場合は複数のRx14がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rfx11、Rfx12、Rfx13、Rfx14は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfx11が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx12が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx12がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx13が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx13がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx14が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx14がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rx15は、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であり、Rx15が複数存在する場合は複数のRx15がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 X11は、加水分解性基であり、X11が複数存在する場合は複数のX11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Y11は、-NH-、又は-S-であり、Y11が複数存在する場合は複数のY11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Z11は、ビニル基、α-メチルビニル基、スチリル基、メタクリロイル基、アクリロイル基、アミノ基、イソシアネート基、イソシアヌレート基、エポキシ基、ウレイド基、又はメルカプト基であり、
 p1は、1~20の整数であり、p2、p3、p4は、それぞれ独立して、0~10の整数であり、p5は、0~10の整数であり、
 p6は、1~3の整数であり、
 Z11がアミノ基でない場合は-NH-であるY11を少なくとも1つ有し、Y11が全て-S-である場合又はp5が0である場合はZ11がアミノ基であり、
 Z11-、-Si(X11p6(Rx153-p6、p1個の-{C(Rx11)(Rx12)}-単位(Uc11)、p2個の-{C(Rfx11)(Rfx12)}-単位(Uc12)、p3個の-{Si(Rx13)(Rx14)}-単位(Uc13)、p4個の-{Si(Rfx13)(Rfx14)}-単位(Uc14)、p5個の-Y11-単位(Uc15)は、Z11-が式(c1)で表される化合物の一方の末端となり、-Si(X11p6(Rx153-p6が他方の末端となり、-O-が-O-と連結しない限り、それぞれの単位が任意の順で並んで結合する。
In the above formula (c1),
R x11 , R x12 , R x13 , and R x14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when multiple R x11 are present, the multiple R x11 are different may be different when there are a plurality of R x12 ; when there are a plurality of R x13 , a plurality of R x13 may be different ; and when there are a plurality of R x14 may be different from each other in a plurality of R x14 ,
Rf x11 , Rf x12 , Rf x13 , and Rf x14 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf x11 are present When there is a plurality of Rf x11 may be different, when there are a plurality of Rf x12 , a plurality of Rf x12 may be different, and when there are a plurality of Rf x13 , a plurality of Rf x13 may be different may be different, and if there are a plurality of Rf x14 , the plurality of Rf x14 may be different,
R x15 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R x15 are present, the plurality of R x15 may be different,
X 11 is a hydrolyzable group, and when a plurality of X 11 are present, the plurality of X 11 may be different,
Y 11 is -NH- or -S-, and when a plurality of Y 11 are present, the plurality of Y 11 may be different,
Z 11 is a vinyl group, α-methylvinyl group, styryl group, methacryloyl group, acryloyl group, amino group, isocyanate group, isocyanurate group, epoxy group, ureido group, or mercapto group;
p1 is an integer of 1 to 20, p2, p3, and p4 are each independently an integer of 0 to 10, p5 is an integer of 0 to 10,
p6 is an integer from 1 to 3,
having at least one Y 11 which is —NH— if Z 11 is not an amino group, and Z 11 is an amino group if all Y 11 are —S— or p5 is 0;
Z 11 -, -Si(X 11 ) p6 (R x15 ) 3-p6 , p1 -{C(R x11 )(R x12 )}-units (U c11 ), p2 -{C(Rf x11 ) (Rf x12 )}-unit (U c12 ), p3-{Si(R x13 )(R x14 )}-unit (U c13 ), p4-{Si(Rf x13 )(Rf x14 )} The -unit (U c14 ) and p5 -Y 11 -units (U c15 ) form one end of the compound represented by the formula (c1), and -Si(X 11 ) p6 (R x15 ) Unless 3-p6 is the other end and —O— is not linked to —O—, each unit is linked in any order.
 Rx11、Rx12、Rx13、及びRx14は、水素原子であることが好ましい。 R x11 , R x12 , R x13 and R x14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 Rfx11、Rfx12、Rfx13、及びRfx14は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~10のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であることが好ましい。 Rf x11 , Rf x12 , Rf x13 and Rf x14 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom.
 Rx15は、炭素数が1~5のアルキル基であることが好ましい。 R x15 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
 X11は、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又はイソシアネート基であることが好ましく、アルコキシ基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基であることが更に好ましく、メトキシ基又はエトキシ基であることが一層好ましく、メトキシ基が特に好ましい。 X 11 is preferably an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an isocyanate group, more preferably an alkoxy group, even more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a methoxy group or an ethoxy is more preferred, and a methoxy group is particularly preferred.
 Y11は、-NH-であることが好ましい。 Y 11 is preferably -NH-.
 Z11は、メタクリロイル基、アクリロイル基、メルカプト基又はアミノ基であることが好ましく、メルカプト基又はアミノ基がより好ましく、アミノ基が更に好ましい。 Z 11 is preferably a methacryloyl group, an acryloyl group, a mercapto group or an amino group, more preferably a mercapto group or an amino group, still more preferably an amino group.
 p1は1~15が好ましく、より好ましくは2~10である。p2、p3及びp4は、それぞれ独立して、0~5が好ましく、より好ましくは全て0~2である。p5は、0~5が好ましく、より好ましくは0~3である。p6は、2~3が好ましく、より好ましくは3である。 p1 is preferably 1-15, more preferably 2-10. Each of p2, p3 and p4 is independently preferably 0-5, more preferably 0-2. p5 is preferably 0-5, more preferably 0-3. p6 is preferably 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
 前記有機ケイ素化合物(C)としては、上記式(c1)において、Rx11及びRx12がいずれも水素原子であり、Y11が-NH-であり、X11がアルコキシ基(特にメトキシ基又はエトキシ基が好ましく、特にメトキシ基が好ましい)であり、Z11がアミノ基又はメルカプト基であり、p1が1~10であり、p2、p3及びp4がいずれも0であり、p5が0~5(特に1~3)であり、p6が3である化合物を用いることが好ましい。 As the organosilicon compound (C), in the above formula (c1), both R x11 and R x12 are hydrogen atoms, Y 11 is —NH—, and X 11 is an alkoxy group (especially a methoxy group or an ethoxy group). , Z 11 is an amino group or a mercapto group, p1 is 1 to 10, p2, p3 and p4 are all 0, p5 is 0 to 5 ( In particular, it is preferable to use a compound of 1 to 3) and p6 of 3.
 後記する実施例で化合物(C)として用いるKBM603(信越化学工業株式会社製)を上記式(c1)で表すと、Z11がアミノ基であり、Rx11及びRx12がいずれも水素原子であり、Y11が-NH-であり、p1が5であり、p2~p4がいずれも0であり、p5が1であり、X11が全てメトキシ基であり、p6が3である。 When KBM603 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) used as compound (C) in the examples described later is represented by the above formula (c1), Z 11 is an amino group, and both R x11 and R x12 are hydrogen atoms. , Y 11 is —NH—, p1 is 5, p2 to p4 are all 0, p5 is 1, X 11 are all methoxy groups, and p6 is 3.
 なお、p1個の-{C(Rx11)(Rx12)}-は、-{C(Rx11)(Rx12)}-が連続して結合している必要はなく、途中に他の単位を介して結合していてもよく、合計でp1個であればよい。p2~p5で括られる単位についても同様である。 In addition, p1 pieces of -{C(R x11 )(R x12 )}- do not need to be continuously bonded to -{C(R x11 )(R x12 )}-, and other units may be linked via , and p1 pieces in total may be used. The same applies to units enclosed by p2 to p5.
 有機ケイ素化合物(C1)は、下記式(c1-2)で表されることが好ましい。 The organosilicon compound (C1) is preferably represented by the following formula (c1-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 上記式(c1-2)中、
 X12は、加水分解性基であり、X12が複数存在する場合は複数のX12がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Y12は、-NH-であり、
 Z12は、アミノ基、又はメルカプト基であり、
 Rx16は、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であり、Rx16が複数存在する場合は複数のRx16がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 pは、1~3の整数であり、qは2~5の整数であり、rは0~5の整数であり、sは0又は1であり、
 sが0である場合は、Z12はアミノ基である。
In the above formula (c1-2),
X 12 is a hydrolyzable group, and when a plurality of X 12 are present, the plurality of X 12 may be different,
Y 12 is -NH-,
Z 12 is an amino group or a mercapto group,
R x16 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R x16 are present, the plurality of R x16 may be different,
p is an integer of 1 to 3, q is an integer of 2 to 5, r is an integer of 0 to 5, s is 0 or 1,
When s is 0, Z 12 is an amino group.
 X12は、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又はイソシアネート基であることが好ましく、アルコキシ基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基が更に好ましく、メトキシ基又はエトキシ基が一層好ましく、メトキシ基が最も好ましい。 X 12 is preferably an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an isocyanate group, more preferably an alkoxy group, still more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. Preferred are methoxy groups.
 Z12は、アミノ基であることが好ましい。 Z 12 is preferably an amino group.
 Rx16は、炭素数が1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1~5のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。 R x16 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
 pは、2~3の整数であることが好ましく、3であることがより好ましい。 p is preferably an integer of 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
 sが1である場合にはqが2~3の整数であり、rが2~4の整数であることが好ましく、sが0である場合には、qとrの合計が1~5であることが好ましい。sは1であることが好ましい。 When s is 1, q is preferably an integer of 2 to 3, r is preferably an integer of 2 to 4, and when s is 0, the sum of q and r is 1 to 5. Preferably. Preferably, s is 1.
 2-2-2.式(c2)で表される有機ケイ素化合物(C)(以下、有機ケイ素化合物(C2)) 2-2-2. Organosilicon compound (C) represented by formula (c2) (hereinafter referred to as organosilicon compound (C2))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 上記式(c2)中、
 Rx20及びRx21は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であり、Rx20が複数存在する場合は複数のRx20がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx21が複数存在する場合は複数のRx21がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rfx20及びRfx21は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfx20が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx20がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx21が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx21がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rx22及びRx23はそれぞれ独立して、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であり、Rx22及びRx23が複数存在する場合は複数のRx22及びRx23がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 X20及びX21はそれぞれ独立して、加水分解性基であり、X20及びX21が複数存在する場合は複数のX20及びX21がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 p20は、1~30の整数であり、p21は、0~30の整数であり、p20又はp21を付して括弧でくくられた繰り返し単位の少なくとも1つは、アミン骨格-NR100-に置き換わっており、前記アミン骨格におけるR100は水素原子又はアルキル基であり、
 p22及びp23はそれぞれ独立して、1~3の整数であり、
 p20個の-{C(Rx20)(Rx21)}-単位(Uc20)、p21個の-{C(Rfx20)(Rfx21)}-単位(Uc21)は、p20個の単位(Uc20)又はp21個の単位(Uc21)が連続である必要はなく、それぞれの単位(Uc21)及び単位(Uc20)が任意の順で並んで結合し、式(c2)で表される化合物の一方の末端が-Si(X20p22(Rx223-p22となり、他方の末端が-Si(X21p23(Rx233-p23となる。
In the above formula (c2),
R x20 and R x21 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms ; When a plurality of R x21 are present, the plurality of R x21 may be different,
Rf x20 and Rf x21 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and when there are multiple Rf x20 , multiple Rf x20 may be different, and when there are a plurality of Rf x21 , the plurality of Rf x21 may be different,
R x22 and R x23 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when there are a plurality of R x22 and R x23 , a plurality of R x22 and R x23 may be different,
X 20 and X 21 are each independently a hydrolyzable group, and when multiple X 20 and X 21 are present, multiple X 20 and X 21 may be different,
p20 is an integer of 1 to 30, p21 is an integer of 0 to 30, and at least one of the repeating units bracketed with p20 or p21 is replaced with an amine skeleton —NR 100 —. and R 100 in the amine skeleton is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group,
p22 and p23 are each independently an integer of 1 to 3,
p20-{C( Rx20 )( Rx21 )}-units ( Uc20 ), p21-{C( Rfx20 )( Rfx21 )}-units ( Uc21 ) are p20 units ( U c20 ) or p21 units (U c21 ) need not be contiguous, and each unit (U c21 ) and unit (U c20 ) can be arranged in any order and combined to form the formula (c2). One end of the compound is -Si(X 20 ) p22 (R x22 ) 3-p22 , and the other end is -Si(X 21 ) p23 (R x23 ) 3-p23 .
 Rx20及びRx21は、水素原子であることが好ましい。 R x20 and R x21 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 Rfx20及びRfx21は、は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~10のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であることが好ましい。 Rf x20 and Rf x21 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom.
 Rx22及びRx23は、炭素数が1~5のアルキル基であることが好ましい。 R x22 and R x23 are preferably alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
 X20及びX21は、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又はイソシアネート基であることが好ましく、アルコキシ基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基が更に好ましく、メトキシ基又はエトキシ基であることがより更に好ましく、メトキシ基が特に好ましい。 X 20 and X 21 are preferably an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an isocyanate group, more preferably an alkoxy group, still more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. group is even more preferred, and a methoxy group is particularly preferred.
 アミン骨格-NR100-は、上記の通り分子内に少なくとも1つ存在すればよく、p20又はp21を付して括弧でくくられた繰り返し単位のいずれかが前記アミン骨格に置き換わっていればよいが、p20を付して括弧でくくられた繰り返し単位の一部であることが好ましい。前記アミン骨格は、複数存在してもよく、その場合のアミン骨格の数は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、2~5であることがさらに好ましい。また、この場合、隣り合うアミン骨格の間に-{C(Rx20)(Rx21)}p200-を有することが好ましくp200は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましい。p200は、p20の総数に含まれる。 As described above, at least one amine skeleton —NR 100 — may be present in the molecule, and the amine skeleton may be replaced by either a repeating unit bracketed with p20 or p21. , p20 are preferably part of a bracketed repeating unit. A plurality of the amine skeletons may be present, and in that case, the number of amine skeletons is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, and even more preferably 2-5. In this case, it is preferable to have -{C(R x20 )(R x21 )} p200 - between adjacent amine skeletons, and p200 is preferably 1 to 10, preferably 1 to 5. more preferred. p200 is included in the total number of p20s.
 アミン骨格-NR100-において、R100がアルキル基である場合、炭素数は5以下であることが好ましく、3以下であることがより好ましい。アミン骨格-NR100-は、-NH-(R100が水素原子)であることが好ましい。 In the amine skeleton —NR 100 —, when R 100 is an alkyl group, the number of carbon atoms is preferably 5 or less, more preferably 3 or less. The amine skeleton -NR 100 - is preferably -NH- (R 100 is a hydrogen atom).
 p20は、アミン骨格に置き変わった繰り返し単位の数を除いて、1~15が好ましく、より好ましくは1~10である。 p20 is preferably 1-15, more preferably 1-10, excluding the number of repeating units replaced by the amine skeleton.
 p21は、アミン骨格に置き変わった繰り返し単位の数を除いて、0~5が好ましく、より好ましくは0~2である。 p21 is preferably 0 to 5, more preferably 0 to 2, excluding the number of repeating units replaced by the amine skeleton.
 p22及びp23は、2~3が好ましく、より好ましくは3である。 p22 and p23 are preferably 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
 有機ケイ素化合物(C2)としては、上記式(c2)において、Rx20及びRx21がいずれも水素原子であり、X20及びX21がアルコキシ基(特にメトキシ基又はエトキシ基が好ましく、特にメトキシ基が好ましい)であり、p20を付して括弧でくくられた繰り返し単位が、少なくとも1つアミン骨格-NR100-に置き換わっており、R100が水素原子であり、p20が1~10であり(ただし、アミン骨格に置き変わった繰り返し単位の数を除く)、p21が0であり、p22及びp23が3である化合物を用いることが好ましい。 As the organosilicon compound (C2), in the above formula (c2), both R x20 and R x21 are hydrogen atoms, and X 20 and X 21 are alkoxy groups (particularly preferably methoxy or ethoxy groups, particularly methoxy groups is preferred), at least one repeating unit bracketed with p20 is replaced with an amine skeleton —NR 100 —, R 100 is a hydrogen atom, p20 is 1 to 10 ( However, it is preferable to use a compound in which p21 is 0 and p22 and p23 are 3, except for the number of repeating units replaced by the amine skeleton.
 有機ケイ素化合物(C2)は、下記式(c2-2)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 The organosilicon compound (C2) is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (c2-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 上記式(c2-2)中、
 X22及びX23は、それぞれ独立して、加水分解性基であり、X22及びX23が複数存在する場合は複数のX22及びX23がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rx24及びRx25は、それぞれ独立して、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であり、Rx24及びRx25が複数存在する場合は複数のRx24及びRx25がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 -C2w-は、その一部のメチレン基の少なくとも1つがアミン骨格-NR100-に置き換わっており、R100は水素原子又はアルキル基であり、
 wは1~30の整数であり(ただし、アミン骨格に置き換わったメチレン基の数を除く)、
 p24及びp25は、それぞれ独立して、1~3の整数である。
In the above formula (c2-2),
X 22 and X 23 are each independently a hydrolyzable group, and when a plurality of X 22 and X 23 are present, the plurality of X 22 and X 23 may be different,
R x24 and R x25 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when there are a plurality of R x24 and R x25 , a plurality of R x24 and R x25 may be different,
—C w H 2w — has at least one of its methylene groups replaced with an amine skeleton —NR 100 —, and R 100 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
w is an integer of 1 to 30 (excluding the number of methylene groups substituted for the amine skeleton),
p24 and p25 are each independently an integer of 1-3.
 X22及びX23は、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又はイソシアネート基であることが好ましく、アルコキシ基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基であることが更に好ましく、メトキシ基又はエトキシ基であることがより更に好ましく、メトキシ基が特に好ましい。 X 22 and X 23 are preferably an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an isocyanate group, more preferably an alkoxy group, even more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, methoxy or an ethoxy group, particularly preferably a methoxy group.
 アミン骨格-NR100-は、複数存在してもよく、その場合のアミン骨格の数は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、2~5であることがさらに好ましい。また、この場合、隣り合うアミン骨格の間にアルキレン基を有することが好ましい。前記アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましい。隣り合うアミン骨格の間のアルキレン基の炭素数は、wの総数に含まれる。 A plurality of amine skeletons —NR 100 — may be present, and in that case, the number of amine skeletons is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and 2 to 5. More preferred. Moreover, in this case, it is preferable to have an alkylene group between adjacent amine skeletons. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene groups between adjacent amine skeletons is included in the total number of w.
 アミン骨格-NR100-において、R100がアルキル基である場合、炭素数は5以下であることが好ましく、3以下であることがより好ましい。アミン骨格-NR100-は、-NH-(R100が水素原子)であることが好ましい。 In the amine skeleton —NR 100 —, when R 100 is an alkyl group, the number of carbon atoms is preferably 5 or less, more preferably 3 or less. The amine skeleton -NR 100 - is preferably -NH- (R 100 is a hydrogen atom).
 Rx24及びRx25は、炭素数が1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1~5のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。 R x24 and R x25 are preferably alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
 p24及びp25は、2~3の整数であることが好ましく、3であることがより好ましい。 p24 and p25 are preferably integers of 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
 wは、1以上であることが好ましく、2以上であることがより好ましく、また20以下であることが好ましく、10以下であることがより好ましい。 w is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, and preferably 20 or less, more preferably 10 or less.
 2-2-3.式(c3)で表される有機ケイ素化合物(C)(以下、有機ケイ素化合物(C3)) 2-2-3. Organosilicon compound (C) represented by formula (c3) (hereinafter, organosilicon compound (C3))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 上記式(c3)中、
 Z31、Z32は、それぞれ独立に、加水分解性基及びヒドロキシ基以外の、反応性官能基である。反応性官能基としては、ビニル基、α-メチルビニル基、スチリル基、メタクリロイル基、アクリロイル基、アミノ基、エポキシ基、ウレイド基、又はメルカプト基が挙げられる。Z31、Z32としては、アミノ基、メルカプト基、又はメタクリロイル基が好ましく、特にアミノ基が好ましい。
In the above formula (c3),
Z 31 and Z 32 are each independently a reactive functional group other than a hydrolyzable group and a hydroxy group. Reactive functional groups include vinyl, α-methylvinyl, styryl, methacryloyl, acryloyl, amino, epoxy, ureido, or mercapto groups. Z 31 and Z 32 are preferably an amino group, a mercapto group, or a methacryloyl group, particularly preferably an amino group.
 Rx31、Rx32、Rx33、Rx34は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であり、Rx31が複数存在する場合は複数のRx31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx32が複数存在する場合は複数のRx32がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx33が複数存在する場合は複数のRx33がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx34が複数存在する場合は複数のRx34がそれぞれ異なっていてもよい。Rx31、Rx32、Rx33、Rx34は、水素原子又は炭素数が1~2のアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。 R x31 , R x32 , R x33 and R x34 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when there are multiple R x31 , the multiple R x31 are different may be different when there are a plurality of R x32 , and when there are a plurality of R x33, a plurality of R x33 may be different, and when there are a plurality of R x34 may be different from each other in a plurality of R x34 . R x31 , R x32 , R x33 and R x34 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 Rfx31、Rfx32、Rfx33、Rfx34は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfx31が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx32が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx32がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx33が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx33がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx34が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx34がそれぞれ異なっていてもよい。Rfx31、Rfx32、Rfx33、Rfx34は、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~10のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であることが好ましい。 Rf x31 , Rf x32 , Rf x33 , and Rf x34 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf x31 are present When there are multiple Rf x31, the plurality of Rf x31 may be different, and when there are multiple Rf x32 , the plurality of Rf x32 may be different, and when there are multiple Rf x33 , the plurality of Rf x33 may be different. When there are multiple Rf x34 , each of the multiple Rf x34 may be different. Rf x31 , Rf x32 , Rf x33 and Rf x34 are preferably C 1-10 alkyl groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or fluorine atoms.
 Y31は、-NH-、-N(CH)-又は-O-であり、Y31が複数存在する場合は複数のY31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよい。Y31は-NH-であることが好ましい。 Y 31 is —NH—, —N(CH 3 )—, or —O—, and when there are a plurality of Y 31 , the plurality of Y 31 may be different. Y 31 is preferably -NH-.
 X31、X32、X33、X34は、それぞれ独立に、-OR(Rは、水素原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又はアミノC1-3アルキルジC1-3アルコキシシリル基である)であり、X31が複数存在する場合は複数のX31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、X32が複数存在する場合は複数のX32がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、X33が複数存在する場合は複数のX33がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、X34が複数存在する場合は複数のX34がそれぞれ異なっていてもよい。X31、X32、X33、X34は、Rが水素原子、又は炭素数1~2のアルキル基である-ORであることが好ましく、Rは水素原子がより好ましい。 X 31 , X 32 , X 33 and X 34 are each independently —OR c (R c is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or amino-C 1-3 alkyldi-C 1-3 alkoxysilyl is a group), and when a plurality of X 31 are present, the plurality of X 31 may be different, when a plurality of X 32 are present, the plurality of X 32 may be different, and X 33 is When a plurality of X 33 are present, the plurality of X 33 may be different, and when a plurality of X 34 are present, the plurality of X 34 may be different. X 31 , X 32 , X 33 and X 34 are preferably —OR c in which R c is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 p31は、0~20の整数であり、p32、p33、p34は、それぞれ独立して、0~10の整数であり、p35は、0~5の整数であり、p36は、1~10の整数であり、p37は0又は1である。p31は1~15が好ましく、より好ましくは3~13であり、さらに好ましくは5~10である。p32、p33及びp34は、それぞれ独立して、0~5が好ましく、より好ましくは全て0~2である。p35は、0~3が好ましい。p36は、1~5が好ましく、より好ましくは1~3である。p37は1が好ましい。 p31 is an integer of 0 to 20, p32, p33, and p34 are each independently an integer of 0 to 10, p35 is an integer of 0 to 5, and p36 is an integer of 1 to 10 and p37 is 0 or 1. p31 is preferably 1-15, more preferably 3-13, still more preferably 5-10. p32, p33 and p34 are each independently preferably 0-5, more preferably 0-2. p35 is preferably 0-3. p36 is preferably 1-5, more preferably 1-3. p37 is preferably 1.
 有機ケイ素化合物(C3)は、Z31及びZ32の少なくとも一方がアミノ基であるか、又はY31の少なくとも一つが-NH-又は-N(CH)-であるという条件を満たし、かつ式(c3)で表される化合物の一方の末端がZ31-であり、他方の末端がZ32-であり、-O-が-O-と連結しない限り、p31個の-{C(Rx31)(Rx32)}-単位(Uc31)、p32個の-{C(Rfx31)(Rfx32)}-単位(Uc32)、p33個の-{Si(Rx33)(Rx34)}-単位(Uc33)、p34個の-{Si(Rfx33)(Rfx34)}-単位(Uc34)、p35個の-Y31-単位(Uc35)、p36個の-{Si(X31)(X32)-O}-単位(Uc36)、p37個の-{Si(X33)(X34)}-単位(Uc37)が、それぞれ任意の順で並んで結合して構成される。p31個の-{C(Rx31)(Rx32)}-単位(Uc31)は、-{C(Rx31)(Rx32)}-が連続して結合している必要はなく、途中に他の単位を介して結合していてもよく、合計でp31個であればよい。p32~p37で括られる単位(Uc32)~(Uc37)についても同様である。 The organosilicon compound (C3) satisfies the condition that at least one of Z 31 and Z 32 is an amino group, or at least one of Y 31 is —NH— or —N(CH 3 )—, and the formula p31 - {C(R x31 ) (R x32 )}-unit (U c31 ), p32-{C(Rf x31 )(Rf x32 )}-unit (U c32 ), p33-{Si(R x33 )(R x34 )} - unit (U c33 ), p34 -{Si(Rf x33 )(Rf x34 )} - unit (U c34 ), p35 -Y 31 - unit (U c35 ), p36 -{Si(X 31 ) (X 32 )-O}-unit (U c36 ) and p37 -{Si(X 33 )(X 34 )}-units (U c37 ) arranged in arbitrary order and bonded together be done. p31 -{C(R x31 )(R x32 )}-units (U c31 ) do not have to be continuously linked with -{C(R x31 )(R x32 )}- It may be bound via another unit, and the total number of p31 may be sufficient. The same applies to the units (U c32 ) to (U c37 ) enclosed by p32 to p37.
 有機ケイ素化合物(C3)としては、Z31及びZ32がアミノ基であり、Rx31及びRx32が水素原子であり、p31が3~13(好ましくは5~10)であり、Rx33及びRx34がいずれも水素原子であり、Rfx31~Rfx34がいずれも1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~10のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、p32~p34がいずれも0~5であり、Y31が-NH-であり、p35が0~5(好ましくは0~3)であり、X31~X34がいずれも-OHであり、p36が1~5(好ましくは1~3)であり、p37が1である化合物が好ましい。 As the organosilicon compound (C3), Z 31 and Z 32 are amino groups, R x31 and R x32 are hydrogen atoms, p31 is 3 to 13 (preferably 5 to 10), R x33 and R Each of x34 is a hydrogen atom, each of Rf x31 to Rf x34 is an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with a fluorine atom or a fluorine atom, and each of p32 to p34 is 0 to 5, Y 31 is —NH—, p35 is 0 to 5 (preferably 0 to 3), X 31 to X 34 are all —OH, and p36 is 1 to 5 (preferably is 1-3) and p37 is 1 is preferred.
 有機ケイ素化合物(C3)は、下記式(c3-2)で表されることが好ましい。 The organosilicon compound (C3) is preferably represented by the following formula (c3-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 前記式(c3-2)中、Z31、Z32、X31、X32、X33、X34、Y31は、式(c3)中のこれらと同義であり、p41~p44は、それぞれ独立に1~6の整数であり、p45、46はそれぞれ独立に0又は1である。 In formula (c3-2), Z 31 , Z 32 , X 31 , X 32 , X 33 , X 34 and Y 31 have the same meanings as those in formula (c3), and p41 to p44 are each independent is an integer of 1 to 6, and p45 and 46 are each independently 0 or 1.
 式(c3-2)において、Z31及びZ32は、アミノ基、メルカプト基、又はメタクリロイル基が好ましく、特にアミノ基が好ましい。X31、X32、X33、X34、は、Rが水素原子、又は炭素数1~2のアルキル基である-ORであることが好ましく、Rが水素原子であることがより好ましい。Y31は-NH-であることが好ましい。p41~p44は、1以上が好ましく、また5以下が好ましく、4以下がより好ましい。p45、p46はいずれも0であることが好ましい。 In formula (c3-2), Z 31 and Z 32 are preferably an amino group, a mercapto group, or a methacryloyl group, particularly preferably an amino group. X 31 , X 32 , X 33 and X 34 are preferably —OR c in which R c is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably R c is a hydrogen atom. preferable. Y 31 is preferably -NH-. p41 to p44 are preferably 1 or more, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 4 or less. Both p45 and p46 are preferably 0.
 前記混合組成物は、上記した通り、有機ケイ素化合物(A)、有機ケイ素化合物(C)、好ましくは溶剤(特にフッ素系溶剤(D1)及び非フッ素系溶剤(D2))を混合した後に、反応が進んだものも含み、反応が進んだ例としては、前記混合組成物が、有機ケイ素化合物(C)のケイ素原子に結合した加水分解性基が加水分解により-SiOH基となった化合物を含むことが挙げられる。また、反応が進んだ例としては、前記混合組成物が有機ケイ素化合物(C)の縮合物を含むことも挙げられる。該縮合物としては、有機ケイ素化合物(C)が有する-SiOH基又は加水分解で生じた有機ケイ素化合物(C)の-SiOH基が、有機ケイ素化合物(C)由来の-SiOH基、又は他の化合物由来の-SiOH基と脱水縮合して形成された縮合物が挙げられる。具体的に、有機ケイ素化合物(C)の縮合物としては、例えば有機ケイ素化合物(C3)が上記X31~X34の少なくともいずれかで縮合して結合した有機ケイ素化合物(C3’)が挙げられる。 As described above, the mixed composition is prepared by mixing the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C), preferably the solvent (especially the fluorinated solvent (D1) and the non-fluorinated solvent (D2)), and then reacting As an example in which the reaction has progressed, the mixed composition includes a compound in which the hydrolyzable group bonded to the silicon atom of the organosilicon compound (C) is hydrolyzed to become a —SiOH group. Things are mentioned. Further, as an example of the progress of the reaction, the mixed composition may include a condensate of the organosilicon compound (C). As the condensate, the —SiOH group of the organosilicon compound (C) or the —SiOH group of the organosilicon compound (C) generated by hydrolysis is a —SiOH group derived from the organosilicon compound (C), or another A condensate formed by dehydration condensation with a -SiOH group derived from a compound is exemplified. Specifically, the condensate of the organosilicon compound (C) includes, for example, the organosilicon compound (C3') in which the organosilicon compound (C3) is condensed and bonded with at least one of the above X 31 to X 34 . .
 前記有機ケイ素化合物(C3’)は、下記式(c31-1)で表される構造(c31-1)を2以上有し、前記構造(c31-1)同士が、下記*3又は*4で鎖状又は環状に結合した化合物であって、下記*3又は*4での結合は、2以上の前記有機ケイ素化合物(C3)の前記X31又はX32の縮合によるものであり、
 下記式(c31-1)の*1及び*2には、それぞれ、下記式(c31-2)のp31、p32、p33、p34、p35、(p36)-1、p37で括られた単位の少なくとも1種が任意の順で結合し末端がZ-である基が結合しており、複数の前記構造(c31-1)ごとに、*1及び*2に結合する基は異なっていてもよく、
 複数の前記構造(c31-1)が鎖状に結合しているときの末端となる*3は水素原子であり、*4はヒドロキシ基である。
The organosilicon compound (C3′) has two or more structures (c31-1) represented by the following formula (c31-1), and the structures (c31-1) are represented by *3 or *4 below. A chain or ring-bonded compound, wherein the bond in *3 or *4 below is due to the condensation of two or more of the organosilicon compounds (C3) above X 31 or X 32 ,
*1 and *2 in the following formula (c31-1) are, respectively, at least the units enclosed by p31, p32, p33, p34, p35, (p36)-1, and p37 in the following formula (c31-2) One type is bonded in any order and a group having a terminal Z- is bonded, and the groups bonded to *1 and *2 may be different for each of the plurality of structures (c31-1),
When a plurality of structures (c31-1) are bonded in a chain, *3, which is the terminal, is a hydrogen atom, and *4 is a hydroxy group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 前記式(c31-2)中、
 Zは、加水分解性基及びヒドロキシ基以外の、反応性官能基であり、
 Rx31、Rx32、Rx33、Rx34、Rfx31、Rfx32、Rfx33、Rfx34、Y31、X31、X32、X33、X34、p31~p37は、前記式(c3)中のこれら符号と同義である。
In the formula (c31-2),
Z is a reactive functional group other than a hydrolyzable group and a hydroxy group;
R x31 , R x32 , R x33 , R x34 , Rf x31 , Rf x32 , Rf x33 , Rf x34 , Y 31 , X 31 , X 32 , X 33 , X 34 , p31 to p37 are are synonymous with these signs of
 有機ケイ素化合物(C3)が前記式(c3-2)で表される化合物である場合、有機ケイ素化合物(C3’)としては、例えば下記式(c31-3)で表される構造が下記*3又は*4で鎖状又は環状に結合した化合物が挙げられる。下記式(c31-3)で表される構造が鎖状に結合する場合には、末端となる*3は水素原子であり、末端となる*4はヒドロキシ基である。 When the organosilicon compound (C3) is a compound represented by the above formula (c3-2), the organosilicon compound (C3′) is, for example, a structure represented by the following formula (c31-3) *3 below. or *4 may be a chain or ring-bonded compound. When the structure represented by the following formula (c31-3) is linked in a chain, the terminal *3 is a hydrogen atom and the terminal *4 is a hydroxy group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 前記式(c31-3)中の符号は、全て前記式(c3-2)の符号と同義である。 All the symbols in the above formula (c31-3) have the same meanings as the symbols in the above formula (c3-2).
 有機ケイ素化合物(C3’)は、前記式(c31-3)で表される構造が2~10(好ましくは3~8)結合した化合物であることが好ましい。 The organosilicon compound (C3') is preferably a compound in which 2 to 10 (preferably 3 to 8) structures represented by the formula (c31-3) are bonded.
 有機ケイ素化合物(C)としては1種のみ用いてもよいし、2種以上用いてもよい。有機ケイ素化合物(C)として、有機ケイ素化合物(C1)を用いることが好ましい。 As the organosilicon compound (C), only one type may be used, or two or more types may be used. As the organosilicon compound (C), the organosilicon compound (C1) is preferably used.
 前記混合組成物100質量%に対する有機ケイ素化合物(C)の質量比は、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.7質量%以上がより好ましく、更に好ましくは1質量%以上であり、一層好ましくは1.5質量%以上であり、特に好ましくは2質量%以上であり、また10質量%以下であってもよく、より8質量%以下であってもよく、6質量%以下であってもよい。 The mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (C) to 100% by mass of the mixed composition is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.7% by mass or more, still more preferably 1% by mass or more, and still more preferably. is 1.5% by mass or more, particularly preferably 2% by mass or more, may be 10% by mass or less, may be 8% by mass or less, or may be 6% by mass or less good.
 また、有機ケイ素化合物(C)に対する有機ケイ素化合物(A)の質量比(固形分)は(以下、(A)/(C)と表す)、0.2以上が好ましく、このような範囲にすることで、撥水層(r)の外観が良好になる。(A)/(C)は、より好ましくは0.5以上、更に好ましくは1.0以上、一層好ましくは1.5以上であり、特に好ましくは2.0以上である。また、(A)/(C)は9.5以下が好ましく、このような範囲にすることで、撥水層(r)の密着性が良好になる。(A)/(C)は、より好ましくは8.0以下であり、更に好ましくは7.0以下である。 Further, the mass ratio (solid content) of the organosilicon compound (A) to the organosilicon compound (C) (hereinafter expressed as (A)/(C)) is preferably 0.2 or more, and is set within this range. Thus, the appearance of the water-repellent layer (r) is improved. (A)/(C) is more preferably 0.5 or more, still more preferably 1.0 or more, still more preferably 1.5 or more, and particularly preferably 2.0 or more. In addition, (A)/(C) is preferably 9.5 or less, and by setting it in such a range, the adhesion of the water-repellent layer (r) is improved. (A)/(C) is more preferably 8.0 or less, still more preferably 7.0 or less.
 2-3.溶剤
 前記混合組成物は、更に溶剤が混合されていることが好ましい。溶剤の量(質量比)は、有機ケイ素化合物(A)、有機ケイ素化合物(C)及び溶剤の混合組成物100質量%に対して、60質量%以上が好ましく、より好ましくは65質量%以上であり、さらに好ましくは70質量%以上であり、98質量%以下であってもよく、95質量%以下であってもよく、90質量%以下であってもよい。溶剤は、フッ素系溶剤(D1)及び非フッ素系溶剤(D2)を含むことが好ましい。溶剤が、フッ素系溶剤(D1)及び非フッ素系溶剤(D2)を含む場合、前記した溶剤の量とは、フッ素系溶剤(D1)及び非フッ素系溶剤(D2)の合計量を意味する。
2-3. Solvent It is preferable that the mixed composition further contains a solvent. The amount (mass ratio) of the solvent is preferably 60% by mass or more, more preferably 65% by mass or more, based on 100% by mass of the mixed composition of the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C) and the solvent. more preferably 70 mass % or more, may be 98 mass % or less, may be 95 mass % or less, or may be 90 mass % or less. The solvent preferably contains a fluorinated solvent (D1) and a non-fluorinated solvent (D2). When the solvent contains the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2), the amount of the solvent means the total amount of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2).
 2-3-1.フッ素系溶剤(D1)
 フッ素系溶剤には、特に有機ケイ素化合物(A)が溶解しやすい。フッ素系溶剤(D1)として、例えばフッ素化エーテル系溶剤、フッ素化アミン系溶剤、フッ素化炭化水素系溶剤、フッ素化アルコール系溶剤等を用いることができ、特に沸点が100℃以上であるフッ素系溶剤を用いることが好ましい。
 フッ素化エーテル系溶剤としては、炭素数3~8のハイドロフルオロエーテルを挙げることができ、例えばCOCH(3M社製、Novec(登録商標)7000)、COCH(3M社製、Novec(登録商標)7100)、COC(3M社製、Novec(登録商標)7200)、CCF(OCH)C(3M社製、Novec(登録商標)7300)等を用いることができる。
 フッ素化アミン系溶剤としては、アンモニアの水素原子の少なくとも1つがフルオロアルキル基で置換されたアミンが好ましく、アンモニアの全ての水素原子がフルオロアルキル基(特にパーフルオロアルキル基)で置換された第三級アミンが好ましく、具体的にはトリス(ヘプタフルオロプロピル)アミンが挙げられ、フロリナート(登録商標)FC-3283(3M社製)がこれに該当する。
 フッ素化炭化水素系溶剤としては、1,1,1,3,3-ペンタフルオロブタン、パーフルオロヘキサンなどのフッ素化脂肪族炭化水素系溶剤、1,3-ビス(トリフルオロメチルベンゼン)などのフッ素化芳香族炭化水素系溶剤が挙げられる。1,1,1,3,3-ペンタフルオロブタンとしては、例えばソルブ55(ソルベックス社製)等が挙げられる。
 フッ素化アルコール系溶剤としては、1,1,1,3,3,3-ヘキサフルオロ-2-プロパノール、2,2,3,3-テトラフルオロ-1-プロパノール、2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5-オクタフルオロ-1-ペンタノール、2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,7,7-ドデカフルオロ-1-ヘプタノール、パーフルオロオクチルエタノール、1H,1H,2H,2H-トリデカフルオロ-1-n-オクタノール等が挙げられる。
2-3-1. Fluorinated solvent (D1)
The organosilicon compound (A) is particularly easy to dissolve in fluorine-based solvents. As the fluorinated solvent (D1), for example, a fluorinated ether solvent, a fluorinated amine solvent, a fluorinated hydrocarbon solvent, a fluorinated alcohol solvent, or the like can be used. Solvents are preferably used.
Examples of fluorinated ether-based solvents include hydrofluoroethers having 3 to 8 carbon atoms, such as C 3 F 7 OCH 3 (manufactured by 3M, Novec (registered trademark) 7000), C 4 F 9 OCH 3 ( 3M Novec (registered trademark) 7100), C 4 F 9 OC 2 H 5 (3M Novec (registered trademark) 7200), C 2 F 5 CF (OCH 3 ) C 3 F 7 (3M , Novec (registered trademark) 7300) and the like can be used.
As the fluorinated amine-based solvent, an amine in which at least one hydrogen atom of ammonia is substituted with a fluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a third A class amine is preferred, specifically tris(heptafluoropropyl)amine, and Fluorinert (registered trademark) FC-3283 (manufactured by 3M) corresponds to this.
Fluorinated hydrocarbon solvents include fluorinated aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents such as 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluorobutane and perfluorohexane, and 1,3-bis(trifluoromethylbenzene). Examples include fluorinated aromatic hydrocarbon solvents. Examples of 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluorobutane include Solv 55 (manufactured by Solvex).
Fluorinated alcohol solvents include 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-propanol, 2,2,3,3-tetrafluoro-1-propanol, 2,2,3,3, 4,4,5,5-octafluoro-1-pentanol, 2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,7,7-dodecafluoro-1-heptanol, perfluorooctyl ethanol, 1H,1H,2H,2H-tridecafluoro-1-n-octanol and the like.
 前記フッ素系溶剤としては、上記の他、アサヒクリン(登録商標)AK225(AGC社製)などのハイドロクロロフルオロカーボン、アサヒクリン(登録商標)AC2000(AGC社製)などのハイドロフルオロカーボンなどを用いることができる。 As the fluorine-based solvent, in addition to the above, hydrochlorofluorocarbons such as Asahiklin (registered trademark) AK225 (manufactured by AGC) and hydrofluorocarbons such as Asahiklin (registered trademark) AC2000 (manufactured by AGC) can be used. can.
 フッ素系溶剤(D1)としては1種のみ用いてもよいし、2種以上用いてもよい。フッ素系溶剤(D1)として、少なくともフッ素化エーテル系溶剤又はフッ素化炭化水素系溶剤を用いることが好ましい。 As the fluorine-based solvent (D1), only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. As the fluorinated solvent (D1), it is preferable to use at least a fluorinated ether solvent or a fluorinated hydrocarbon solvent.
 前記混合組成物100質量%に対するフッ素系溶剤(D1)の量(質量比)は、40質量%以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは50質量%以上であり、更に好ましくは60質量%以上であり、またフッ素系溶剤(D1)の質量比は例えば90質量%以下であってもよいし、85質量%以下であってもよいし、80質量%以下であってもよい。フッ素系溶剤(D1)として複数種用いる場合には、合計量が前記範囲となればよい。 The amount (mass ratio) of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) with respect to 100% by mass of the mixed composition is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and still more preferably 60% by mass or more. Also, the mass ratio of the fluorinated solvent (D1) may be, for example, 90% by mass or less, 85% by mass or less, or 80% by mass or less. When using a plurality of types as the fluorine-based solvent (D1), the total amount should be within the above range.
 2-3-2.非フッ素系溶剤(D2)
 有機ケイ素化合物(C)は非フッ素系溶剤(D2)に溶解しやすいため、有機ケイ素化合物(C)同士が集まって縮合することを抑制できると考えられ、前記混合組成物は、保存安定性に優れるという効果を奏することもできる。
2-3-2. Non-fluorinated solvent (D2)
Since the organosilicon compound (C) is easily dissolved in the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2), it is thought that the aggregation and condensation of the organosilicon compounds (C) can be suppressed. The effect of being superior can also be produced.
 非フッ素系溶剤、すなわちF原子を含まない溶剤(D2)としては、水、アルコール系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、炭化水素系溶剤、エステル系溶剤などを用いることができる。 As the non-fluorine-based solvent, that is, the solvent (D2) containing no F atom, water, alcohol-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, ether-based solvents, hydrocarbon-based solvents, ester-based solvents, and the like can be used.
 アルコール系溶剤としては、メタノール、エタノール、1-プロパノール、2-プロパノール(イソプロピルアルコール)、1-ブタノールなどが挙げられる。
 ケトン系溶剤としては、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトンなどが挙げられる。
 エーテル系溶剤としては、ジエチルエーテル、ジプロピルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、1,4-ジオキサンなどが挙げられる。
 炭化水素系溶剤としては、ペンタン、ヘキサンなどの脂肪族炭化水素系溶剤、シクロヘキサンなどの脂環式炭化水素系溶剤、ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレンなどの芳香族炭化水素系溶剤などが挙げられる。
 エステル系溶剤としては、酢酸エチル、酢酸プロピル、酢酸ブチル、酢酸アミル、酢酸イソアミルなどが挙げられる。
Examples of alcohol solvents include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol (isopropyl alcohol), 1-butanol and the like.
Ketone solvents include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, and the like.
Ether solvents include diethyl ether, dipropyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane and the like.
Examples of hydrocarbon solvents include aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents such as pentane and hexane, alicyclic hydrocarbon solvents such as cyclohexane, and aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as benzene, toluene, and xylene.
Ester-based solvents include ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, amyl acetate, and isoamyl acetate.
 非フッ素系溶剤(D2)としては、1種のみ用いてもよいし、2種以上用いてもよい。非フッ素系溶剤(D2)は、アルコール系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、及びエステル系溶剤の少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、アルコール系溶剤を含むことがより好ましく、アルコール系溶剤と共に、エステル系溶剤及び/又はケトン系溶剤を含むことが更に好ましい。非フッ素系溶剤(D2)がアルコール系溶剤を含むことにより、有機ケイ素化合物(C)同士の縮合が抑制しやすい。また、非フッ素系溶剤(D2)がアルコール系溶剤及びエステル系溶剤を含むことにより、外観のよい均一な膜が得られる、又は得られる膜の耐摩耗性が向上するという効果を得ることができる。また、非フッ素系溶剤(D2)がアルコール系溶剤及びケトン系溶剤を含むことにより、得られる膜の耐摩耗性が向上する。更に、非フッ素系溶剤(D2)がアルコール系溶剤、エステル系溶剤及びケトン系溶剤を含むことにより、外観のよい均一な膜が得られる。
 非フッ素系溶剤(D2)がアルコール系溶剤を含む場合、非フッ素系溶剤(D2)100質量%に対する、アルコール系溶剤の量(質量比)が50質量%以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは60質量%以上であり、更に好ましくは75質量%以上であり、100質量%であってもよいし、90質量%以下であってもよい。
 非フッ素系溶剤(D2)がエステル系溶剤を含む場合、非フッ素系溶剤(D2)100質量%に対する、エステル系溶剤の量(質量比)が3質量%以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは5質量%以上であり、更に好ましくは8質量%以上であり、15質量%以下であってもよく、13質量%以下であってもよい。
 非フッ素系溶剤(D2)がケトン系溶剤を含む場合、非フッ素系溶剤(D2)100質量%に対する、ケトン系溶剤の量(質量比)が3質量%以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは5質量%以上であり、更に好ましくは8質量%以上であり、15質量%以下であってもよく、13質量%以下であってもよい。
As the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2), only one type may be used, or two or more types may be used. The non-fluorine solvent (D2) preferably contains at least one of an alcohol solvent, a ketone solvent, and an ester solvent, and more preferably contains an alcohol solvent. Along with the alcohol solvent, the ester solvent and / Or it is more preferable to contain a ketone solvent. When the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) contains an alcohol-based solvent, condensation between the organosilicon compounds (C) can be easily suppressed. In addition, when the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) contains an alcohol-based solvent and an ester-based solvent, it is possible to obtain the effect of obtaining a uniform film with a good appearance or improving the abrasion resistance of the obtained film. . In addition, since the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) contains an alcohol-based solvent and a ketone-based solvent, the abrasion resistance of the obtained film is improved. Further, by containing an alcohol solvent, an ester solvent and a ketone solvent in the non-fluorine solvent (D2), a uniform film with good appearance can be obtained.
When the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) contains an alcohol solvent, the amount (mass ratio) of the alcohol-based solvent with respect to 100% by mass of the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably It is 60% by mass or more, more preferably 75% by mass or more, and may be 100% by mass or 90% by mass or less.
When the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) contains an ester solvent, the amount (mass ratio) of the ester-based solvent with respect to 100% by mass of the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably It is 5% by mass or more, more preferably 8% by mass or more, and may be 15% by mass or less, or may be 13% by mass or less.
When the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) contains a ketone-based solvent, the amount (mass ratio) of the ketone-based solvent with respect to 100% by mass of the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably It is 5% by mass or more, more preferably 8% by mass or more, and may be 15% by mass or less, or may be 13% by mass or less.
 前記混合組成物100質量%に対する非フッ素系溶剤(D2)の量(質量比)は、5質量%以上が好ましく、より好ましくは10質量%以上であり、更に好ましくは13質量%以上であり、上限は例えば30質量%であってもよいし、25質量%であってもよい。非フッ素系溶剤(D2)として複数種用いる場合には、合計量が前記範囲となればよい。 The amount (mass ratio) of the non-fluorinated solvent (D2) with respect to 100% by mass of the mixed composition is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, and still more preferably 13% by mass or more, The upper limit may be, for example, 30% by mass or 25% by mass. When using a plurality of types as the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2), the total amount should be within the above range.
 下記式(E.1)で求められるフッ素系溶剤(D1)と非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータ(Hansen solubility parameter、HSP。以下、「HSP」と略記する場合がある)の距離Raが所定以上の値であることが好ましい。 The distance Ra between the Hansen solubility parameter (HSP, hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "HSP") of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) obtained by the following formula (E.1) is preferably a predetermined value or more.
 ハンセン(Hansen)溶解度パラメータは、ヒルデブランド(Hildebrand)によって導入された溶解度パラメータを、分散項(δD),極性項(δP),水素結合項(δH)の3成分に分割し、3次元空間に表したものである。分散項(δD)は分散力による効果、極性項(δP)は双極子間力による効果、水素結合項(δH)は水素結合力の効果を示す。 The Hansen solubility parameter divides the solubility parameter introduced by Hildebrand into three components: the dispersion term (δD), the polar term (δP), and the hydrogen bonding term (δH). It is represented. The dispersion term (δD) indicates the effect of the dispersion force, the polar term (δP) indicates the effect of the dipole force, and the hydrogen bond term (δH) indicates the effect of the hydrogen bond force.
 なお、ハンセン溶解度パラメータの定義と計算は、Charles M.Hansen著、Hansen Solubility Parameters: A Users Handbook(CRCプレス,2007年)に記載されている。また、コンピュータソフトウエアHansen Solubility Parameters in Practice(HSPiP)を用いることにより、文献値等が知られていない化合物に関しても、その化学構造から簡便にハンセン溶解度パラメータを推算することができる。さらに、文献値等が知られていない化合物については、後述の溶解球法を用いることによっても、ハンセン溶解度パラメータを算出することが可能である。本発明では、フッ素系溶剤(D1)及び非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータを決定する際、HSPiPバージョン5.2.05を用いて、データベースに登録されている溶剤に関しては登録されたハンセン溶解度パラメータの値を用い、登録されていない溶剤に関しては後述の溶解球法を用いることによりハンセン溶解度パラメータを算出した。 The definition and calculation of the Hansen Solubility Parameters are described in Charles M. Hansen, Hansen Solubility Parameters: A Users Handbook (CRC Press, 2007). In addition, by using the computer software Hansen Solubility Parameters in Practice (HSPiP), the Hansen Solubility Parameters can be easily estimated from the chemical structure of compounds for which literature values are not known. Furthermore, for compounds for which literature values are unknown, it is possible to calculate the Hansen solubility parameter by using the melting sphere method described later. In the present invention, when determining the Hansen solubility parameters of fluorine-based solvents (D1) and non-fluorine-based solvents (D2), HSPiP version 5.2.05 was used for solvents registered in the database. Hansen Solubility Parameters were calculated using the values of Hansen Solubility Parameters, and for unregistered solvents, the dissolving ball method described later was used.
 溶解球法とは、目的物のハンセン溶解度パラメータを算出する方法であって、目的物を、ハンセン溶解度パラメータが確定している数多くの異なる溶剤に溶解又は分散させて、目的物の特定の溶剤に対する溶解性又は分散性を評価する溶解度試験によってハンセン溶解度パラメータを決定する方法である。溶解度試験に用いる溶剤の種類は、各溶剤のHSPの分散項、極性項及び水素結合項の合計の値が、溶剤間で幅広く異なるように選ばれることが好ましく、より具体的には、好ましくは10種以上、より好ましくは15種以上、更に好ましくは17種以上の溶剤を用いて評価することが好ましい。具体的には、上記溶解度試験に用いた溶剤のうち、目的物を溶解又は分散した溶剤の3次元上の点をすべて球の内側に内包し、溶解しない溶剤の点は球の外側になるような球であり、且つ半径が最小となる球(溶解度球)を探し出し、その球の中心座標を目的物のハンセン溶解度パラメータとする。溶解性及び分散性の評価は、それぞれ対象とする目的物が溶剤に溶解したか否か及び分散したか否かを目視で判定して行う。目的物と溶剤の混合物が白濁したり、目的物が沈殿したり、目的物と溶剤が層分離した場合に、対象とする目的物が溶剤に溶解しない、若しくは分散しないと判断すればよい。溶解度試験の具体的な方法については、実施例の欄で詳述する。 The dissolving sphere method is a method for calculating the Hansen solubility parameter of a target substance, in which the target substance is dissolved or dispersed in many different solvents whose Hansen solubility parameters A method for determining the Hansen Solubility Parameters by a solubility test that evaluates solubility or dispersibility. The type of solvent used in the solubility test is preferably selected so that the total value of the HSP dispersion term, polar term and hydrogen bonding term of each solvent varies widely between solvents, more specifically, preferably It is preferable to evaluate using 10 or more solvents, more preferably 15 or more solvents, and still more preferably 17 or more solvents. Specifically, among the solvents used in the solubility test, all the three-dimensional points of the solvent that dissolved or dispersed the target substance were included inside the sphere, and the points of the solvent that did not dissolve were outside the sphere. A sphere (solubility sphere) that is a sphere with a minimum radius is searched for, and the central coordinates of the sphere are used as the Hansen solubility parameter of the object. Evaluation of solubility and dispersibility is carried out by visually determining whether or not the target substance is dissolved in the solvent and whether or not it is dispersed. If the mixture of the target substance and the solvent becomes cloudy, the target substance precipitates, or the target substance and the solvent separate into layers, it can be determined that the target substance is not dissolved or dispersed in the solvent. A specific method for the solubility test will be described in detail in the Examples section.
 例えば、目的物のハンセン溶解度パラメータの測定に用いられなかったある別の溶剤のハンセン溶解度パラメータが(δd,δp,δh)であった場合、その座標で示される点が目的物の溶解度球の内側に内包されれば、その溶剤は、目的物を溶解又は分散すると考えられる。一方、その座標点が目的物の溶解度球の外側にあれば、この溶剤は目的物を溶解及び分散することができないと考えられる。 For example, if the Hansen Solubility Parameters of some other solvent that was not used to determine the Hansen Solubility Parameters of the object was (δd, δp, δh), then the point indicated by the coordinates would be inside the solubility sphere of the object. , the solvent is believed to dissolve or disperse the object. On the other hand, if the coordinate point is outside the solubility sphere of the target, the solvent is considered incapable of dissolving and dispersing the target.
 下記式(E.1)で求められるフッ素系溶剤(D1)と非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの距離Ra1は5.2(J/cm0.5以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは5.5(J/cm0.5以上であり、更に好ましくは7(J/cm0.5以上であり、また前記距離Ra1は例えば25(J/cm0.5以下である。 The distance Ra1 between the fluorinated solvent (D1) and the non-fluorinated solvent (D2) in the Hansen solubility parameter obtained by the following formula (E.1) is preferably 5.2 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more. , more preferably 5.5 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more, still more preferably 7 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more, and the distance Ra1 is, for example, 25 (J/cm 3 ). 0.5 or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000025
[式中、
 δD1:フッ素系溶剤(D1)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの分散項(J/cm0.5
 δD2:非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの分散項(J/cm0.5
 δP1:フッ素系溶剤(D1)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの極性項(J/cm0.5
 δP2:非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの極性項(J/cm0.5
 δH1:フッ素系溶剤(D1)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの水素結合項(J/cm0.5
 δH2:非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの水素結合項(J/cm0.5である]
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000025
[In the formula,
δD1: dispersion term (J/cm 3 ) of Hansen solubility parameter of fluorine-based solvent (D1) 0.5 ,
δD2: dispersion term (J/cm 3 ) of Hansen solubility parameter of non-fluorine solvent (D2) 0.5 ,
δP1: the polar term of the Hansen solubility parameter (J/cm 3 ) of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) 0.5 ,
δP2: the polar term of the Hansen solubility parameter (J/cm 3 ) of the non-fluorinated solvent (D2) 0.5 ,
δH1: Hydrogen bond term (J/cm 3 ) of Hansen solubility parameter of fluorine-based solvent (D1) 0.5 ,
δH2: Hydrogen bond term (J/cm 3 ) of Hansen solubility parameter of non-fluorinated solvent (D2) is 0.5 ]
 本発明において、フッ素系溶剤(D1)として複数種用いる場合、又は非フッ素系溶剤(D2)として複数種用いる場合には、前記したハンセン溶解度パラメータの距離Ra1が、フッ素系溶剤(D1)と非フッ素系溶剤(D2)から1種ずつ選んだ組み合わせにおいて、どの組み合わせにおいても前記した範囲を満足すればよい。 In the present invention, when a plurality of types of fluorine-based solvents (D1) are used, or when a plurality of types of non-fluorine-based solvents (D2) are used, the distance Ra1 of the Hansen solubility parameter described above is the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D1). Any of the combinations selected one by one from the fluorinated solvent (D2) may satisfy the above range.
 また、フッ素系溶剤(D1)として複数種用いる場合に、各フッ素系溶剤のδD1、δP1、δH1と、各フッ素系溶剤の全フッ素系溶剤に対する体積分率から、フッ素系溶剤全体のδD1total、δP1total及びδH1totalを求めることができる。δD1totalは下記式(E.2)に基づいて求めることができ、δP1total及びδH1totalについても同様に求めることができる。 Further, when a plurality of types of fluorine-based solvents (D1) are used, δD1, δP1, and δH1 of each fluorine-based solvent and the volume fraction of each fluorine-based solvent with respect to the total fluorine-based solvent are used to determine δD1total and δP1total of the entire fluorine-based solvent. and δH1total can be determined. δD1total can be obtained based on the following formula (E.2), and δP1total and δH1total can also be obtained in the same manner.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000026
 上記式において、δD1は、フッ素系溶剤(D1)が複数種である場合の、各フッ素系溶剤のδD1の値であり、nはフッ素系溶剤(D1)の種類の数であり、Xは各フッ素系溶剤の全フッ素系溶剤に対する体積分率である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000026
In the above formula, δD1 i is the value of δD1 for each fluorine-based solvent when there are multiple types of fluorine-based solvents (D1), n is the number of types of fluorine-based solvents (D1), and X i is the volume fraction of each fluorinated solvent to the total fluorinated solvent.
 また、非フッ素系溶剤(D2)として複数種用いる場合にも、同様に非フッ素系溶剤全体のδD2total、δP2total、δH2totalを求めることができる。そして、δD1total、δP1total、δH1totalと、δD2total、δP2total、δH2totalから、フッ素系溶剤全体のHSPと非フッ素系溶剤全体のHSPの距離Ra’を求めることができる。距離Ra’は、15(J/cm0.5以下であることが好ましく、また11(J/cm0.5以上であってもよい。 Further, even when a plurality of types of non-fluorine-based solvents (D2) are used, δD2total, δP2total, and δH2total of the entire non-fluorine-based solvent can be obtained in the same manner. Then, from δD1total, δP1total, δH1total, δD2total, δP2total, and δH2total, the distance Ra′ between the HSP of the entire fluorine-based solvent and the HSP of the entire non-fluorine-based solvent can be obtained. The distance Ra' is preferably 15 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or less, and may be 11 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more.
 また、下記式(E.3)で求められる有機ケイ素化合物(C)と非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの距離Ra2は0.5(J/cm0.5以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは1.0(J/cm0.5以上、さらに好ましくは2.0(J/cm0.5以上であり、また、例えば10(J/cm0.5以下であり、8(J/cm0.5以下が好ましく、より好ましくは7(J/cm0.5以下である。 In addition, the distance Ra2 of the Hansen solubility parameter between the organosilicon compound (C) and the non-fluorine solvent (D2) obtained by the following formula (E.3) is 0.5 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more. is preferably 1.0 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more, more preferably 2.0 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or more, and for example 10 (J/cm 3 ) 0 0.5 or less, preferably 8 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or less, more preferably 7 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000027
[式中、
 δDC:有機ケイ素化合物(C)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの分散項(J/cm0.5
 δD2:非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの分散項(J/cm0.5
 δPC:有機ケイ素化合物(C)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの極性項(J/cm0.5
 δP2:非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの極性項(J/cm0.5
 δHC:有機ケイ素化合物(C)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの水素結合項(J/cm0.5
 δH2:非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータの水素結合項((J/cm0.5である]
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000027
[In the formula,
δDC: dispersion term (J/cm 3 ) of the Hansen solubility parameter of the organosilicon compound (C) 0.5 ,
δD2: dispersion term (J/cm 3 ) of Hansen solubility parameter of non-fluorine solvent (D2) 0.5 ,
δPC: the polar term of the Hansen solubility parameter of the organosilicon compound (C) (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 ,
δP2: the polar term of the Hansen solubility parameter (J/cm 3 ) of the non-fluorinated solvent (D2) 0.5 ,
δHC: hydrogen bond term of Hansen solubility parameter of organosilicon compound (C) (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 ,
δH2: Hydrogen bonding term of Hansen solubility parameter of non-fluorinated solvent (D2) ((J/cm 3 ) is 0.5 )
 有機ケイ素化合物(C)のハンセン溶解度パラメータは、上記で説明したフッ素系溶剤(D1)及び非フッ素系溶剤(D2)のハンセン溶解度パラメータを決定する方法と同様の手法にて決定することができるが、本発明では、上述の溶解球法を用いることにより、有機ケイ素化合物(C)のハンセン溶解度パラメータを算出する。 The Hansen solubility parameter of the organosilicon compound (C) can be determined by the same method as the method for determining the Hansen solubility parameter of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) described above. In the present invention, the Hansen solubility parameter of the organosilicon compound (C) is calculated by using the above-described dissolving ball method.
 なお、有機ケイ素化合物(C)として単独の化合物を用いる場合は、溶解球法により算出された有機ケイ素化合物(C)のHSP値(δDC、δPC、δHC)をそのまま用いるが、有機ケイ素化合物(C)として複数種用いる場合には、各有機ケイ素化合物(C)のHSP値(δDC、δPC、δHC)と、全有機ケイ素化合物(C)に対する各有機ケイ素化合物(C)の体積分率から算出された、有機ケイ素化合物(C)全体のδDC、δPC及びδHCを用いる。有機ケイ素化合物(C)を複数種用いる場合のδDCは、下記式(E.4)に基づいて求めることができ、有機ケイ素化合物(C)を複数種用いる場合のδPC及びδHCについても同様に求めることができる。 When a single compound is used as the organosilicon compound (C), the HSP values (δDC, δPC, δHC) of the organosilicon compound (C) calculated by the melting ball method are used as they are, but the organosilicon compound (C ), it is calculated from the HSP values (δDC, δPC, δHC) of each organosilicon compound (C) and the volume fraction of each organosilicon compound (C) with respect to all the organosilicon compounds (C). In addition, .delta.DC, .delta.PC and .delta.HC of the entire organosilicon compound (C) are used. δDC when multiple types of organosilicon compounds (C) are used can be determined based on the following formula (E.4), and δPC and δHC when multiple types of organosilicon compounds (C) are used are similarly determined. be able to.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000028
 上記式において、δDCiは、有機ケイ素化合物(C)が複数種である場合の、各有機ケイ素化合物(C)の分散項(δD)の値であり、nは有機ケイ素化合物(C)の種類の数であり、XCiは各有機ケイ素化合物(C)の全有機ケイ素化合物(C)に対する体積分率である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000028
In the above formula, δDCi is the value of the dispersion term (δD) of each organosilicon compound (C) when there are multiple types of organosilicon compounds (C), and n is the type of the organosilicon compound (C). and XCi is the volume fraction of each organosilicon compound (C) to all organosilicon compounds (C).
 非フッ素系溶剤(D2)として複数種用いる場合には、式(E.3)におけるδD2、δP2、及びδH2として、δD2total、δP2total、及びδH2totalを用いることとする。 When using multiple types of non-fluorine-based solvents (D2), δD2total, δP2total, and δH2total are used as δD2, δP2, and δH2 in formula (E.3).
 非フッ素系溶剤(D2)に対するフッ素系溶剤(D1)の質量比は、1質量%以上が好ましく、より好ましくは50質量%以上であり、更に好ましくは100質量%以上であり、200質量%以上、240質量%以上、280質量%以上、又は300質量%以上であることも好ましい。また、非フッ素系溶剤(D2)に対する前記フッ素系溶剤(D1)の質量比は、例えば3000質量%以下、2000質量%以下、1000質量%以下、800質量%以下、700質量%以下、600質量%以下、又は500質量%以下であってもよい。非フッ素系溶剤(D2)に対する前記フッ素系溶剤(D1)の質量比は、240質量%以上800質量%以下、280質量%以上700質量%以下、又は300質量%以上600質量%以下が特に好ましい。非フッ素系溶剤(D2)に対する前記フッ素系溶剤(D1)の質量比の値が小さすぎると、耐摩耗性が低下する場合があり、一方、大きすぎると外観を損ねる場合がある。 The mass ratio of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) to the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, still more preferably 100% by mass or more, and 200% by mass or more. , 240% by mass or more, 280% by mass or more, or 300% by mass or more. Further, the mass ratio of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) to the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is, for example, 3000% by mass or less, 2000% by mass or less, 1000% by mass or less, 800% by mass or less, 700% by mass or less, 600% by mass. % or less, or 500% by mass or less. The mass ratio of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) to the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is particularly preferably 240% by mass or more and 800% by mass or less, 280% by mass or more and 700% by mass or less, or 300% by mass or more and 600% by mass or less. . If the mass ratio of the fluorine-based solvent (D1) to the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2) is too small, the wear resistance may decrease, whereas if it is too large, the appearance may be impaired.
 2-4.有機ケイ素化合物(B)
 前記混合組成物は、更に下記式(b1)で表される有機ケイ素化合物(B)が混合されていてもよい。前記混合組成物に有機ケイ素化合物(B)が混合される場合、前記混合組成物は、有機ケイ素化合物(A)、有機ケイ素化合物(B)、有機ケイ素化合物(C)と、好ましくは溶剤を混合することにより得られ、これらを混合した後、例えば保管中に反応が進んだものも含む。有機ケイ素化合物(B)は、皮膜中で有機ケイ素化合物(A)の間に存在することで水滴などの滑落性を向上する作用を有する。有機ケイ素化合物(B)は、後述する通り、Aで表される加水分解性基又はヒドロキシ基を有している。前記加水分解性基としては、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、アセトキシ基、イソシアネート基等が挙げられる。
2-4. Organosilicon compound (B)
The mixed composition may further contain an organosilicon compound (B) represented by the following formula (b1). When the organic silicon compound (B) is mixed in the mixed composition, the mixed composition contains the organic silicon compound (A), the organic silicon compound (B), the organic silicon compound (C), and preferably a solvent. It includes those obtained by mixing them and undergoing reaction during storage, for example. The organosilicon compound (B) is present between the organosilicon compounds (A) in the film and has the effect of improving the slideability of water droplets and the like. The organosilicon compound (B) has a hydrolyzable group or a hydroxy group represented by A2 , as described later. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an acetoxy group and an isocyanate group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 上記式(b1)中、
 Rfb10は、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、
 Rb11、Rb12、Rb13、Rb14は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であり、Rb11が複数存在する場合は複数のRb11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rb12が複数存在する場合は複数のRb12がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rb13が複数存在する場合は複数のRb13がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rb14が複数存在する場合は複数のRb14がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rfb11、Rfb12、Rfb13、Rfb14は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfb11が複数存在する場合は複数のRfb11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfb12が複数存在する場合は複数のRfb12がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfb13が複数存在する場合は複数のRfb13がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfb14が複数存在する場合は複数のRfb14がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Rb15は、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であり、Rb15が複数存在する場合は複数のRb15がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Aは、-O-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-、-NR-、-NRC(=O)-、又は-C(=O)NR-であり、前記Rは水素原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基又は炭素数1~4の含フッ素アルキル基であり、Aが複数存在する場合は複数のAがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 Aは、加水分解性基またはヒドロキシ基であり、Aが複数存在する場合は複数のAがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
 b11、b12、b13、b14、b15は、それぞれ独立して0~100の整数であり、
 cは、1~3の整数であり、
 Rfb10-、-Si(A(Rb153-c、b11個の-{C(Rb11)(Rb12)}-単位(Ub1)、b12個の-{C(Rfb11)(Rfb12)}-単位(Ub2)、b13個の-{Si(Rb13)(Rb14)}-単位(Ub3)、b14個の-{Si(Rfb13)(Rfb14)}-単位(Ub4)、b15個の-A-単位(Ub5)は、Rfb10-が式(b1)における一方の末端であり、-Si(A(Rb153-cが他方の末端となり、フルオロポリエーテル構造を形成せず、かつ-O-が-O-乃至-Fと連結しない限り、任意の順で並んで結合する。
In the above formula (b1),
Rf b10 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom,
R b11 , R b12 , R b13 , and R b14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R b11 are present, the plurality of R b11 are different from each other. When there are a plurality of R b12 , the plurality of R b12 may be different, when there are a plurality of R b13 , a plurality of R b13 may be different, and when there is a plurality of R b14 a plurality of R b14 may be different,
Rf b11 , Rf b12 , Rf b13 and Rf b14 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf b11 are present When there is a plurality of Rf b11, the plurality of Rf b11 may be different, when there are a plurality of Rf b12 , the plurality of Rf b12 may be different, and when there is a plurality of Rf b13 , the plurality of Rf b13 may be different. may be present, and if there are multiple Rf b14 , the plurality of Rf b14 may be different,
R b15 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R b15 are present, the plurality of R b15 may be different,
A 1 is -O-, -C(=O)-O-, -OC(=O)-, -NR-, -NRC(=O)-, or -C(=O)NR- wherein R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when there are a plurality of A 1 , the plurality of A 1 may be different,
A 2 is a hydrolyzable group or a hydroxy group, and when a plurality of A 2 are present, the plurality of A 2 may be different,
b11, b12, b13, b14, and b15 are each independently an integer of 0 to 100,
c is an integer from 1 to 3,
Rf b10 -, -Si(A 2 ) c (R b15 ) 3-c , b11 -{C(R b11 )(R b12 )}-unit (U b1 ), b12 -{C(Rf b11 ) (Rf b12 )}-unit (U b2 ), b13-{Si(R b13 )(R b14 )}-unit (U b3 ), b14-{Si(Rf b13 )(Rf b14 )} -unit (U b4 ), b15 -A 1 -units (U b5 ), Rf b10 - is one terminal in formula (b1), and -Si(A 2 ) c (R b15 ) 3-c becomes the other end, and are linked in any order as long as they do not form a fluoropolyether structure and -O- is not linked to -O- to -F.
 Rfb10は、それぞれ独立して、フッ素原子又は炭素数1~10(より好ましくは炭素数1~5)のパーフルオロアルキル基が好ましい。 Each Rf b10 is independently preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms).
 Rb11、Rb12、Rb13、及びRb14は、水素原子が好ましい。 R b11 , R b12 , R b13 and R b14 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 Rb15は、炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましい。 R b15 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
 Aは、-O-、-C(=O)-O-、又は-O-C(=O)-が好ましい。 A 1 is preferably -O-, -C(=O)-O-, or -OC(=O)-.
 Aは、炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基、又はハロゲン原子が好ましく、より好ましくはメトキシ基、エトキシ基、塩素原子である。 A2 is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a halogen atom, more preferably a methoxy group, an ethoxy group or a chlorine atom.
 b11は1~30が好ましく、1~25がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましく、1~5が特に好ましく、最も好ましくは1~2である。 b11 is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-25, still more preferably 1-10, particularly preferably 1-5, most preferably 1-2.
 b12は、0~15が好ましく、より好ましくは0~10である。 b12 is preferably 0-15, more preferably 0-10.
 b13は、0~5が好ましく、より好ましくは0~2である。 b13 is preferably 0-5, more preferably 0-2.
 b14は、0~4が好ましく、より好ましくは0~2である。 b14 is preferably 0-4, more preferably 0-2.
 b15は、0~4が好ましく、より好ましくは0~2である。 b15 is preferably 0-4, more preferably 0-2.
 cは、2~3が好ましく、より好ましくは3である。 c is preferably 2 to 3, more preferably 3.
 b11、b12、b13、b14、及びb15の合計値は、2以上が好ましく、3以上がより好ましく、5以上が更に好ましく、また80以下が好ましく、より好ましくは50以下であり、更に好ましくは20以下である。 The total value of b11, b12, b13, b14, and b15 is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, still more preferably 5 or more, and preferably 80 or less, more preferably 50 or less, and still more preferably 20. It is below.
 特に、Rfb10がフッ素原子又は炭素数1~5のパーフルオロアルキル基であり、Rb11、Rb12がいずれも水素原子であり、Aがメトキシ基又はエトキシ基であると共に、b11が1~5、b12が0~5であり、b13、b14、及びb15が全て0であり、cが3であることが好ましい。 In particular, Rf b10 is a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, both R b11 and R b12 are hydrogen atoms, A2 is a methoxy group or an ethoxy group, and b11 is 1 to 5, b12 is 0 to 5, b13, b14, and b15 are all 0, and c is 3.
 上記式(b1)で表される化合物としては、具体的に、C2j+1-Si-(OCH、C2j+1-Si-(OC(jは1~12の整数)が挙げられ、この中で特にC-Si-(OC、C13-Si-(OC、C15-Si-(OC、C17-Si-(OCが好ましい。また、CFCHO(CHSiCl、CFCHO(CHSi(OCH、CFCHO(CHSi(OC、CF(CHSi(CH(CHSiCl、CF(CHSi(CH(CHSi(OCH、CF(CHSi(CH(CHSi(OC、CF(CHSi(CH(CHSiCl、CF(CHSi(CH(CHSi(OCH、CF(CHSi(CH(CHSi(OC、CFCOO(CHSiCl、CFCOO(CHSi(OCH、CFCOO(CHSi(OCが挙げられる(kはいずれも5~20であり、好ましくは8~15である)。また、CF(CF-(CHSiCl、CF(CF-(CHSi(OCH、CF(CF-(CHSi(OCを挙げることもできる(mはいずれも0~10であり、好ましくは0~7であり、nはいずれも1~5であり、好ましくは2~4である)。CF(CF-(CH-Si-(CHCH=CHを挙げることもできる(pはいずれも2~10であり、好ましくは2~8であり、qはいずれも1~5であり、好ましくは2~4である)。更に、CF(CF-(CHSiCHCl、CF(CF-(CHSiCH(OCH、CF(CF-(CHSiCH(OCが挙げられる(pはいずれも2~10であり、好ましくは3~7であり、qはいずれも1~5であり、好ましくは2~4である)。 Specific examples of the compounds represented by the above formula (b1) include C j F 2j+1 -Si-(OCH 3 ) 3 and C j F 2j+1 -Si-(OC 2 H 5 ) 3 (where j is 1 to 12). integers), among which C 4 F 9 —Si—(OC 2 H 5 ) 3 , C 6 F 13 —Si—(OC 2 H 5 ) 3 , C 7 F 15 —Si—(OC 2H5 ) 3 , C8F17 - Si- ( OC2H5 ) 3 are preferred. Also, CF3CH2O ( CH2 ) kSiCl3 , CF3CH2O ( CH2 ) kSi ( OCH3 ) 3 , CF3CH2O ( CH2 ) kSi ( OC2H5 ) 3 , CF3 ( CH2 )2Si( CH3 ) 2 ( CH2 ) kSiCl3 , CF3 ( CH2 ) 2Si(CH3)2 ( CH2 ) kSi ( OCH3) 3 , CF3 ( CH2 )2Si( CH3 ) 2 ( CH2 ) kSi ( OC2H5 ) 3 , CF3 ( CH2 ) 6Si ( CH3 ) 2 ( CH2 ) kSiCl3 , CF3 ( CH2 ) 6Si ( CH3 ) 2 ( CH2 ) kSi (OCH3) 3 , CF3 ( CH2 ) 6Si ( CH3 ) 2 ( CH2 ) kSi ( OC2H5 ) 3 , CF3COO (CH 2 ) k SiCl 3 , CF 3 COO(CH 2 ) k Si(OCH 3 ) 3 , CF 3 COO(CH 2 ) k Si(OC 2 H 5 ) 3 (k is 5 to 20 and preferably 8 to 15). Also, CF 3 (CF 2 ) m —(CH 2 ) n SiCl 3 , CF 3 (CF 2 ) m — (CH 2 ) n Si(OCH 3 ) 3 , CF 3 (CF 2 ) m —(CH 2 ) n Si(OC 2 H 5 ) 3 may also be mentioned (where m is 0 to 10, preferably 0 to 7, n is 1 to 5, preferably 2 to 4). ). CF 3 (CF 2 ) p —(CH 2 ) q —Si—(CH 2 CH=CH 2 ) 3 may also be mentioned, where p is 2 to 10, preferably 2 to 8, q are all 1 to 5, preferably 2 to 4). Furthermore, CF 3 (CF 2 ) p —(CH 2 ) q SiCH 3 Cl 2 , CF 3 (CF 2 ) p —(CH 2 ) q SiCH 3 (OCH 3 ) 2 , CF 3 (CF 2 ) p —( CH 2 ) q SiCH 3 (OC 2 H 5 ) 2 (where p is 2 to 10, preferably 3 to 7, q is 1 to 5, preferably 2 to 4 is).
 上記式(b1)で表される化合物の中で、下記式(b2)で表される化合物が好ましい。 Among the compounds represented by the above formula (b1), the compounds represented by the following formula (b2) are preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 上記式(b2)中、R60は炭素数1~8のパーフルオロアルキル基であり、R61は炭素数1~5のアルキレン基であり、R62は炭素数1~3のアルキル基である。 In the above formula (b2), R 60 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, R 61 is an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 62 is an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. .
 有機ケイ素化合物(B)としては1種のみ用いてもよいし、2種以上用いてもよい。前記混合組成物100質量%に対する、有機ケイ素化合物(B)の量(質量比)は、例えば0.1質量%以上であり、好ましくは0.5質量%以上であり、また15質量%以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは10質量%以下である。 As the organosilicon compound (B), only one type may be used, or two or more types may be used. The amount (mass ratio) of the organosilicon compound (B) with respect to 100% by mass of the mixed composition is, for example, 0.1% by mass or more, preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and 15% by mass or less. It is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or less.
 本発明の混合組成物は、上述した通り、有機ケイ素化合物(A)、有機ケイ素化合物(C)、好ましくは溶剤(フッ素系溶剤(D1)及び非フッ素系溶剤(D2))と、必要に応じて用いられる有機ケイ素化合物(B)を混合した後に、反応が進んだものも含み、反応が進んだ例としては、前記混合組成物が、上記有機ケイ素化合物(B)のケイ素原子に結合した加水分解性基が加水分解により-SiOH基となった化合物を含むことが挙げられる。また、前記混合組成物が有機ケイ素化合物(B)の縮合物を含むことも挙げられ、該縮合物としては、有機ケイ素化合物(B)が有する-SiOH基又は加水分解で生じた有機ケイ素化合物(B)の-SiOH基が、有機ケイ素化合物(B)由来の-SiOH基、又は他の化合物由来の-SiOH基と脱水縮合して形成された縮合物が挙げられる。 As described above, the mixed composition of the present invention comprises an organosilicon compound (A), an organosilicon compound (C), preferably a solvent (fluorinated solvent (D1) and non-fluorinated solvent (D2)), and optionally After mixing the organosilicon compound (B) used in the above, the reaction may have progressed. For example, it includes a compound whose degradable group is a —SiOH group by hydrolysis. Further, the mixed composition may contain a condensate of the organosilicon compound (B), and the condensate may be a —SiOH group possessed by the organosilicon compound (B) or an organosilicon compound produced by hydrolysis ( Condensates formed by dehydration condensation of —SiOH groups of B) with —SiOH groups derived from the organosilicon compound (B) or —SiOH groups derived from other compounds are exemplified.
 有機ケイ素化合物(A)及び有機ケイ素化合物(C)の合計量は、前記混合組成物100質量%に対して、2質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、更に好ましくは7質量%以上であり、また40質量%以下であってもよいし、30質量%以下であってもよい。 The total amount of the organosilicon compound (A) and the organosilicon compound (C) is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and still more preferably 7% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the mixed composition. or more, and may be 40% by mass or less, or may be 30% by mass or less.
 前記混合組成物は、本発明の効果を阻害しない範囲で、有機ケイ素化合物(A)、有機ケイ素化合物(C)及び好ましく用いられる溶剤、有機ケイ素化合物(B)以外の添加剤が混合されていてもよく、例えば、シラノール縮合触媒、酸化防止剤、防錆剤、紫外線吸収剤、光安定剤、防カビ剤、抗菌剤、抗ウイルス剤、生物付着防止剤、消臭剤、顔料、難燃剤、帯電防止剤、樹脂等、各種の添加剤が混合されていてもよい。前記添加剤の量(質量比)は、前記混合組成物100質量%に対して、5質量%以下が好ましく、より好ましくは1質量%以下である。前記添加剤の中で、特に樹脂については、前記混合組成物(溶剤も含まれる)100質量%に対して、その量(質量比)が1質量%未満であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.5質量%以下であり、0質量%であってもよい。前記添加剤量(質量比)は、前記混合組成物における固形分の合計量100質量%に対して、30質量%以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは20質量以下であり、更に好ましくは10質量%以下であり、特に好ましくは4質量%以下である。また、添加剤の中でも特に樹脂の量(質量比)が、前記混合組成物における固形分の合計量100質量%に対して、30質量%以下、20質量%以下、10質量%以下、4質量%以下、4質量%未満又は2質量%以下であることが好ましく、0質量%であってもよい。前記した固形分の合計量に対する添加剤及び樹脂の割合は、すなわち撥水層におけるそれら割合に等しい。 The mixed composition contains the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C), a preferably used solvent, and additives other than the organosilicon compound (B) within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. For example, silanol condensation catalysts, antioxidants, rust inhibitors, UV absorbers, light stabilizers, anti-mold agents, antibacterial agents, antiviral agents, anti-biofouling agents, deodorants, pigments, flame retardants, Various additives such as antistatic agents and resins may be mixed. The amount (mass ratio) of the additive is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, relative to 100% by mass of the mixed composition. Among the additives, the amount (mass ratio) of the resin is preferably less than 1% by mass, more preferably 0% with respect to 100% by mass of the mixed composition (including the solvent). .5% by mass or less, and may be 0% by mass. The amount of the additive (mass ratio) is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and still more preferably 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the total solid content in the mixed composition. % by mass or less, particularly preferably 4% by mass or less. In addition, among the additives, the amount (mass ratio) of the resin in particular is 30% by mass or less, 20% by mass or less, 10% by mass or less, or 4% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the total solid content in the mixed composition. % or less, preferably less than 4% by mass or 2% by mass or less, and may be 0% by mass. The ratios of the additives and the resin to the total amount of solids mentioned above are equal to those ratios in the water-repellent layer.
 前記混合組成物を調製する際、各化合物の混合順序は限定されないが、有機ケイ素化合物(A)及びフッ素系溶剤(D1)を混合した溶液(r1)と、有機ケイ素化合物(C)及び非フッ素系溶剤(D2)を混合した溶液(p1)をそれぞれ用意しておき、該溶液(r1)と(p1)を混合することが好ましい。 When preparing the mixed composition, the mixing order of each compound is not limited. It is preferable to prepare each solution (p1) in which the system solvent (D2) is mixed, and to mix the solutions (r1) and (p1).
 3.基材(s)
 本発明は、前記撥水層(r)と基材(s)とを含む積層体であり、本発明の基材(s)の材質は特に限定されず、有機系材料、無機系材料のいずれでもよく、また基材の形状は平面、曲面のいずれであってもよいし、これらが組み合わさった形状でもよい。有機系材料としては、アクリル樹脂、アクリロニトリル樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂(例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート等)、スチレン樹脂、セルロース樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、ビニル系樹脂(例えば、ポリエチレン、ポリ塩化ビニル(つまり、塩化ビニル樹脂)、ビニルベンジルクロライド系樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール等)、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリエーテルイミド樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール樹脂、ポリビニルアセタール樹脂及びこれら共重合体などの熱可塑性樹脂;フェノール樹脂、ユリア樹脂、メラミン樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル、シリコーン樹脂、ウレタン樹脂等の熱硬化性樹脂等の樹脂が挙げられる。無機系材料としては、鉄、シリコン、銅、亜鉛、アルミニウム等の金属、又はこれら金属を含む合金、セラミックス、ガラスなどが挙げられる。この中でも特に無機系材料が好ましく、ガラスがより好ましい。
3. base material (s)
The present invention is a laminate comprising the water-repellent layer (r) and the base material (s), and the material of the base material (s) of the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be either an organic material or an inorganic material. Also, the shape of the substrate may be flat, curved, or a combination of these. Examples of organic materials include acrylic resins, acrylonitrile resins, polycarbonate resins, polyester resins (such as polyethylene terephthalate), styrene resins, cellulose resins, polyolefin resins, vinyl resins (such as polyethylene, polyvinyl chloride (that is, vinyl chloride resin), vinylbenzyl chloride resin, polyvinyl alcohol, etc.), polyvinylidene chloride resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, polyetherimide resin, polyethersulfone resin, polysulfone resin, polyvinyl alcohol resin, polyvinyl acetal resin and thermoplastic resins such as these copolymers; resins such as thermosetting resins such as phenolic resins, urea resins, melamine resins, epoxy resins, unsaturated polyesters, silicone resins and urethane resins. Examples of inorganic materials include metals such as iron, silicon, copper, zinc, and aluminum, alloys containing these metals, ceramics, and glass. Among these, inorganic materials are particularly preferable, and glass is more preferable.
 基材(s)には、無機粒子、有機粒子、ゴム粒子を分散させることも好ましく、また顔料や染料のような着色剤、蛍光増白剤、分散剤、可塑剤、熱安定剤、光安定剤、赤外線吸収剤、紫外線吸収剤、帯電防止剤、酸化防止剤、滑剤、溶剤などの配合剤を含有させてもよい。 It is also preferable to disperse inorganic particles, organic particles, rubber particles in the substrate (s), and also colorants such as pigments and dyes, fluorescent brighteners, dispersants, plasticizers, heat stabilizers, light stabilizers. Ingredients such as agents, infrared absorbers, ultraviolet absorbers, antistatic agents, antioxidants, lubricants and solvents may also be incorporated.
 基材(s)の厚みは、例えば5μm以上であり、10μm以上が好ましく、より好ましくは20μm以上であり、更に好ましくは30μm以上であり、8mm以下であってよく、好ましくは7mm以下であり、より好ましくは6.5mm以下であり、更に好ましくは6mm以下である。 The thickness of the substrate (s) is, for example, 5 μm or more, preferably 10 μm or more, more preferably 20 μm or more, still more preferably 30 μm or more, and may be 8 mm or less, preferably 7 mm or less, It is more preferably 6.5 mm or less, still more preferably 6 mm or less.
 4.層(X)
 本発明の積層体において、基材(s)及び撥水層(r)が、基材(s)及び撥水層(r)とは異なる層(X)を介して積層されていることが好ましい。層(X)としては、活性エネルギー線硬化型樹脂及び熱硬化型の樹脂よりなる群(X1)から選択される少なくとも1種から形成される層が挙げられる。前記活性エネルギー線とは、活性種を発生する化合物を分解して活性種を発生させることができるエネルギー線と定義される。活性エネルギー線としては、可視光、紫外線、赤外線、X線、α線、β線、γ線及び電子線などを挙げることができる。前記活性エネルギー硬化型樹脂には、アクリル系樹脂、エポキシ系樹脂、オキセタン系樹脂、ウレタン系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂、ビニルベンジルクロライド系樹脂、ビニル系樹脂(ポリエチレン、塩化ビニル系樹脂など)、スチレン系樹脂、フェノール系樹脂、ビニルエーテル系樹脂もしくはシリコーン系樹脂又はこれらの混合樹脂等の紫外線硬化型樹脂や、電子線硬化型樹脂が含まれ、特に紫外線硬化型樹脂が好ましい。また、層(X)としては、チタン酸化物、ジルコニウム酸化物、アルミニウム酸化物、ニオブ酸化物、タンタル酸化物、ランタン酸化物、及びSiOよりなる群(X2)から選択される少なくとも1種から形成される層を挙げることもできる。群(X1)としては、特にアクリル系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂、スチレン系樹脂、塩化ビニル系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂、フェノール系樹脂、及びエポキシ系樹脂が好ましい。群(X2)としてはSiOが好ましい。層(X)の厚みは、例えば0.1nm以上、100μm以下であり、好ましくは1nm以上、60μm以下であり、より好ましくは1nm以上、10μm以下である。
4. Layer (X)
In the laminate of the present invention, it is preferable that the substrate (s) and the water-repellent layer (r) are laminated via a layer (X) different from the substrate (s) and the water-repellent layer (r). . Examples of the layer (X) include layers formed from at least one selected from the group (X1) consisting of active energy ray-curable resins and thermosetting resins. The active energy ray is defined as an energy ray capable of decomposing a compound that generates active species to generate active species. Active energy rays include visible light, ultraviolet rays, infrared rays, X-rays, α rays, β rays, γ rays, electron beams, and the like. The active energy curable resins include acrylic resins, epoxy resins, oxetane resins, urethane resins, polyamide resins, vinylbenzyl chloride resins, vinyl resins (polyethylene, vinyl chloride resins, etc.), and styrene resins. UV-curable resins such as resins, phenolic resins, vinyl ether-based resins, silicone-based resins, or mixed resins thereof, and electron beam-curable resins are included, and UV-curable resins are particularly preferred. In addition, as the layer (X), at least one selected from the group (X2) consisting of titanium oxide, zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, niobium oxide, tantalum oxide, lanthanum oxide, and SiO2 Layers that are formed can also be mentioned. As group (X1), acrylic resins, silicone resins, styrene resins, vinyl chloride resins, polyamide resins, phenol resins, and epoxy resins are particularly preferred. SiO 2 is preferred for group (X2). The thickness of the layer (X) is, for example, 0.1 nm or more and 100 μm or less, preferably 1 nm or more and 60 μm or less, more preferably 1 nm or more and 10 μm or less.
 4-1.ハードコート層(hc)
 層(X)が、前記群(X1)から選択される少なくとも1種から形成される場合、層(X)は表面硬度を有するハードコート層(hc)として機能することができ、基材(s)に耐擦傷性を付与することができる。ハードコート層(hc)の硬度は通常、鉛筆硬度でB以上であり、好ましくはHB以上、さらに好ましくはH以上、ことさら好ましくは2H以上である。層(X)がハードコート層(hc)を含む場合、すなわち層(X)がハードコート層の機能を有する場合、ハードコート層(hc)は単層構造であってもよく、多層構造であってもよい。ハードコート層(hc)は、例えば前記した紫外線硬化型樹脂を含むことが好ましく、特にアクリル系樹脂またはシリコーン系樹脂を含むことが好ましく、高硬度を発現するためには、アクリル系樹脂を含むことが好ましい。また、基材(s)と膜(r)の密着性が良好となる傾向が見られることから、エポキシ系樹脂を含むことも好ましい。なお、群(X1)を構成する活性エネルギー線硬化型樹脂及び熱硬化型の樹脂を形成する具体的な方法については、後述の表示装置の欄で説明する。
4-1. Hard coat layer (hc)
When the layer (X) is formed from at least one selected from the group (X1), the layer (X) can function as a hard coat layer (hc) having surface hardness, and the substrate (s ) can be imparted with scratch resistance. The hard coat layer (hc) generally has a pencil hardness of B or higher, preferably HB or higher, more preferably H or higher, and even more preferably 2H or higher. When the layer (X) contains the hard coat layer (hc), that is, when the layer (X) has the function of a hard coat layer, the hard coat layer (hc) may have a single layer structure or a multilayer structure. may The hard coat layer (hc) preferably contains, for example, the above-described UV-curable resin, and particularly preferably contains an acrylic resin or a silicone resin. is preferred. It is also preferable to contain an epoxy-based resin, since there is a tendency that the adhesion between the substrate (s) and the film (r) is improved. A specific method for forming the active energy ray-curable resin and the thermosetting resin constituting the group (X1) will be described later in the column of the display device.
 層(X)がハードコート層(hc)を含む場合、ハードコート層(hc)は添加剤を含んでいてもよい。添加剤は限定されることはなく、無機系微粒子、有機系微粒子、またはこれらの混合物が挙げられる。添加剤としては、紫外線吸収剤、シリカ、アルミナ等の金属酸化物、ポリオルガノシロキサン等の無機フィラーを挙げることができる。無機フィラーを含むことによって、基材(s)と膜(r)のとの密着性を向上できる。ハードコート層(hc)の厚みは、例えば1μm以上100μm以下、好ましくは2μm以上100μm以下である。前記ハードコート層(hc)の厚みが1μm以上の場合、十分な耐擦傷性を確保することができ、100μm以下の場合、耐屈曲性を確保でき、その結果硬化収縮によるカール発生の抑制が可能となる。 When the layer (X) contains the hard coat layer (hc), the hard coat layer (hc) may contain additives. Additives are not limited and include inorganic microparticles, organic microparticles, or mixtures thereof. Examples of additives include ultraviolet absorbers, silica, metal oxides such as alumina, and inorganic fillers such as polyorganosiloxane. By including the inorganic filler, the adhesion between the substrate (s) and the film (r) can be improved. The thickness of the hard coat layer (hc) is, for example, 1 μm or more and 100 μm or less, preferably 2 μm or more and 100 μm or less. When the thickness of the hard coat layer (hc) is 1 μm or more, sufficient scratch resistance can be ensured, and when it is 100 μm or less, flex resistance can be ensured, and as a result, curling due to curing shrinkage can be suppressed. becomes.
 4-2.反射防止層(ar)
 層(X)が、前記群(X2)から選択される少なくとも1種から形成される場合、層(X)は入射した光の反射を防止する反射防止層(ar)として機能することができる。層(X)が反射防止層(ar)を含む場合、反射防止層(ar)は、380~780nmの可視光領域において、反射率が5.0%以下程度に低減された反射特性を示す層であることが好ましい。層(X)は、SiOから形成される層を含むことが好ましい。
4-2. Antireflection layer (ar)
When the layer (X) is formed from at least one selected from the group (X2), the layer (X) can function as an antireflection layer (ar) that prevents reflection of incident light. When the layer (X) contains an antireflection layer (ar), the antireflection layer (ar) is a layer exhibiting reflection characteristics in which the reflectance is reduced to about 5.0% or less in the visible light region of 380 to 780 nm. is preferably Layer (X) preferably comprises a layer formed from SiO2 .
 反射防止層(ar)の構造は特に限定されず、単層構造であってもよいし、多層構造であってもよい。多層構造の場合、低屈折率層と高屈折率層とを交互に積層した構造が好ましく、積層数は合計で2~20であることが好ましい。高屈折率層を構成する材料としては、チタン酸化物、ジルコニウム酸化物、アルミニウム酸化物、ニオブ酸化物、タンタル酸化物又はランタン酸化物が挙げられ、低屈折率層を構成する材料としてはシリカが挙げられる。多層構造の反射防止層としては、SiO2(シリカ)とZrO2、又は、SiO2とNb25が交互に積層され、基材(s)と反対側の最外層がSiOである構造が好ましい。反射防止層(ar)は、例えば蒸着法によって形成することができる。反射防止層(ar)の厚みは、例えば0.1nm~5μmである。 The structure of the antireflection layer (ar) is not particularly limited, and may be a single layer structure or a multilayer structure. In the case of a multilayer structure, a structure in which low refractive index layers and high refractive index layers are alternately laminated is preferable, and the number of laminated layers is preferably 2 to 20 in total. Materials constituting the high refractive index layer include titanium oxide, zirconium oxide, aluminum oxide, niobium oxide, tantalum oxide and lanthanum oxide, and silica is a material constituting the low refractive index layer. mentioned. The multi-layered antireflection layer has a structure in which SiO 2 (silica) and ZrO 2 or SiO 2 and Nb 2 O 5 are alternately laminated, and the outermost layer on the side opposite to the substrate (s) is SiO 2 . is preferred. The antireflection layer (ar) can be formed by vapor deposition, for example. The thickness of the antireflection layer (ar) is, for example, 0.1 nm to 5 μm.
 層(X)は、ハードコート層(hc)及び反射防止層(ar)の両方を含んでいてもよく、この場合、本発明の積層体は、基材側から、基材(s)、ハードコート層(hc)、反射防止層(ar)、膜(r)の順に積層されていることが好ましい。 The layer (X) may contain both the hard coat layer (hc) and the antireflection layer (ar). In this case, the laminate of the present invention comprises the substrate (s), the hard It is preferable that the coat layer (hc), the antireflection layer (ar), and the film (r) are laminated in this order.
 層(X)は、前記群(X1)から選択される少なくとも1種から形成される場合、基材(s)に例えば層(X)を構成する混合組成物を塗布し、熱や、紫外線などの活性エネルギー線で硬化させることによって、層(X)を形成できる。また、層(X)が、前記群(X2)から選択される少なくとも1種から形成される場合、例えば蒸着法によって層(X)を形成できる。 When the layer (X) is formed from at least one selected from the group (X1), for example, the mixture composition constituting the layer (X) is applied to the substrate (s), and heat, ultraviolet rays, etc. The layer (X) can be formed by curing with an active energy ray of . Moreover, when the layer (X) is formed from at least one selected from the group (X2), the layer (X) can be formed, for example, by a vapor deposition method.
 5.積層体の製造方法
 本発明の積層体は、基材(s)上に、必要に応じて上記した層(X)を形成した後、加熱後の前記混合組成物を蒸着して硬化させることによって形成できる。
5. Method for manufacturing a laminate The laminate of the present invention is produced by forming the above-described layer (X) on the substrate (s) as necessary, and then vapor-depositing and curing the mixed composition after heating. can be formed.
 前記混合組成物を、基材(s)又は基材(s)の上に設けられた層(X)に蒸着する条件は、公知の条件を採用することができる。真空度は、例えば2.0×10-3Pa以下程度である。また蒸着処理時の加熱方法としては、抵抗加熱方式、電子ビーム加熱方式のいずれを用いてもよく、加熱温度は、例えば100~400℃である。成膜時間は例えば1~90秒程度である。 Known conditions can be adopted as the conditions for vapor-depositing the mixed composition on the substrate (s) or the layer (X) provided on the substrate (s). The degree of vacuum is, for example, about 2.0×10 −3 Pa or less. As a heating method for vapor deposition, either a resistance heating method or an electron beam heating method may be used, and the heating temperature is, for example, 100 to 400.degree. The film formation time is, for example, about 1 to 90 seconds.
 真空蒸着の後は、空気中で、室温で静置するか又は加温(例えば35~150℃、好ましくは40~90℃で、5~90分、好ましくは30~80分)することで、空気中の水分を取り込んで、好ましい態様において有機ケイ素化合物(A)が有する加水分解性基が加水分解され、脱水縮合することで、又は好ましい態様において有機ケイ素化合物(A)が有する-SiOH基が脱水縮合することで、シロキサン結合が形成され、硬化した皮膜を得ることができる。また、室温での静置の際、または加温の際の湿度条件は50~90%RHとしてもよい。 After vacuum deposition, by standing in air at room temperature or heating (for example, 35 to 150° C., preferably 40 to 90° C., 5 to 90 minutes, preferably 30 to 80 minutes), In a preferred embodiment, the hydrolyzable group possessed by the organosilicon compound (A) is hydrolyzed by taking in moisture in the air, followed by dehydration condensation, or in a preferred embodiment, the —SiOH group possessed by the organosilicon compound (A). By dehydration condensation, siloxane bonds are formed and a cured film can be obtained. In addition, the humidity condition during standing at room temperature or during heating may be 50 to 90% RH.
 撥水層(r)を形成した後は、蒸着したままでもよいし、所定の後処理を行ってもよく、後処理をすることによって膜の耐摩耗性をより向上できる。後処理としては、加熱保持すること、加湿雰囲気に静置すること、超音波洗浄すること、溶媒を含む布や乾いた布で表面を拭くことなどが挙げられ、これらの後処理は単独で行ってもよいし、2種以上を組み合わせて行ってもよい。この中でも特に加熱保持すること、超音波洗浄すること、乾いた布で表面を拭くことが好ましい。加熱保持は、例えば100~200℃で10~60分保持すればよく、超音波洗浄は、例えば水、フッ素系溶媒、又はアルコールなどを洗浄液として1~5分程度行えばよく、乾いた布で表面を拭くのは、数回行えばよい。耐摩耗性をより高める観点からは、加熱保持の後、表面を乾いた布で拭くことや、超音波洗浄を行うことが好ましい。加熱保持を行うことにより、有機ケイ素化合物(A)、有機ケイ素化合物(C)、基材(s)または層(X)のいずれかの間での相互作用がより高い耐久力をもつ状態に変化することが期待される。また、表面を拭くことで、余剰分が除去され、より平滑で濁りのない膜が得られる。そのような膜上では、耐摩耗試験時の抵抗が低くなり、耐摩耗性がより高くなると予想される。 After forming the water-repellent layer (r), it may be left vapor-deposited, or it may be subjected to a predetermined post-treatment, and the abrasion resistance of the film can be further improved by the post-treatment. Post-treatments include heating and holding, standing in a humidified atmosphere, ultrasonic cleaning, and wiping the surface with a cloth containing a solvent or a dry cloth. These post-treatments are performed alone. may be used, or two or more may be used in combination. Among these, heating and holding, ultrasonic cleaning, and wiping the surface with a dry cloth are particularly preferred. Heating may be maintained at, for example, 100 to 200° C. for 10 to 60 minutes. Ultrasonic cleaning may be performed using, for example, water, a fluorinated solvent, or alcohol as a cleaning liquid for about 1 to 5 minutes. Wiping the surface can be done several times. From the viewpoint of further increasing wear resistance, it is preferable to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or perform ultrasonic cleaning after heating and holding. By heating and holding, the interaction between any of the organosilicon compound (A), the organosilicon compound (C), the substrate (s), or the layer (X) changes to a state with higher durability. expected to do so. Wiping the surface also removes the excess, resulting in a smoother, cleaner film. On such films, lower resistance during abrasion testing is expected and higher abrasion resistance is expected.
 前記混合組成物を蒸着する前に、基材(s)又は基材(s)上に設けられる層(X)に易接着処理を施しておくことが好ましい。易接着処理としては、コロナ処理、プラズマ処理、紫外線処理等の親水化処理が挙げられる。プラズマ処理等の易接着処理を行うことで、基材の表面にOH基(特に基材がエポキシ樹脂の場合)やCOOH基(特に基材がアクリル樹脂の場合)などの官能基を形成させることができ、基材(s)又は層(X)と、撥水層(r)との密着性がより向上する。特に、基材(s)又は前記群(X1)から形成される層(X)に易接着処理を行うことが好ましい。 It is preferable to subject the substrate (s) or the layer (X) provided on the substrate (s) to an easy-adhesion treatment before vapor-depositing the mixed composition. Hydrophilic treatment such as corona treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet treatment, etc., can be mentioned as the easy-adhesion treatment. Formation of functional groups such as OH groups (especially when the base material is an epoxy resin) or COOH groups (especially when the base material is an acrylic resin) on the surface of the base material by performing adhesion treatment such as plasma treatment. can be formed, and the adhesion between the substrate (s) or the layer (X) and the water-repellent layer (r) is further improved. In particular, it is preferable to subject the substrate (s) or the layer (X) formed from the group (X1) to an easy-adhesion treatment.
7.表示装置
 本発明の積層体は、表示装置に好適に用いられる。本発明の積層体は、好ましくは表示装置において前面板として用いることができ、該前面板はウインドウフィルムと称されることがある。
7. Display Device The laminate of the present invention is suitably used for a display device. The laminate of the present invention can preferably be used as a front panel in a display device, and the front panel is sometimes called a window film.
 該表示装置は、ウインドウフィルム(すなわち、本発明の積層体)を含む表示装置用積層体と、有機EL表示パネルとからなることが好ましく、有機EL表示パネルに対して視認側に表示装置用積層体が配置されている。また、フレキシブル表示装置においては、フレキシブルな特性を有するウインドウフィルムを含むフレキシブル表示装置用積層体と、有機EL表示パネルとからなることが好ましく、有機EL表示パネルに対して視認側にフレキシブル表示装置用積層体が配置され、折り曲げ可能に構成されている。表示装置用積層体(好ましくはフレキシブル表示装置用積層体)は、さらに偏光板(好ましくは円偏光板)、タッチセンサ等を含有してタッチパネルディスプレイを構成してもよく、それらの積層順は任意であるが、視認側からウインドウフィルム、偏光板、タッチセンサの順、又は、ウインドウフィルム、タッチセンサ、偏光板の順に積層されていることが好ましい。タッチセンサよりも視認側に偏光板が存在すると、タッチセンサのパターンが視認されにくくなり表示画像の視認性が良くなるので好ましい。それぞれの部材は接着剤、粘着剤等を用いて積層することができる。また、フレキシブル表示装置は、前記ウインドウフィルム、偏光板、タッチセンサのいずれかの層の少なくとも一方の面に形成された遮光パターンを具備することができる。 The display device preferably comprises a display device laminate containing a window film (that is, the laminate of the present invention) and an organic EL display panel. body is placed. In the flexible display device, it is preferable that the laminate for a flexible display device including a window film having flexible properties and an organic EL display panel are provided. A laminate is arranged and configured to be foldable. The laminate for a display device (preferably a laminate for a flexible display device) may further contain a polarizing plate (preferably a circularly polarizing plate), a touch sensor, etc. to constitute a touch panel display, and the order of lamination thereof is arbitrary. However, it is preferable that the layers are laminated in the order of the window film, the polarizing plate and the touch sensor, or in the order of the window film, the touch sensor and the polarizing plate from the viewing side. When the polarizing plate is present on the viewing side of the touch sensor, the pattern of the touch sensor becomes less visible and the visibility of the displayed image is improved, which is preferable. Each member can be laminated using an adhesive, a pressure-sensitive adhesive, or the like. Also, the flexible display device may include a light shielding pattern formed on at least one surface of any one of the window film, the polarizing plate, and the touch sensor.
(ウインドウフィルム)
 ウインドウフィルムは、表示装置(好ましくはフレキシブル画像表示装置)の視認側に配置され、その他の構成要素を外部からの衝撃または温湿度等の環境変化から保護する役割を担っている。このような保護層としてはガラスを使用してもよく、フレキシブル画像表示装置においては、ウインドウフィルムはガラスのようにリジッドで堅いものではなく、フレキシブルな特性を有する材料を使用してもよい。従って、本発明の積層体をフレキシブル表示装置におけるウインドウフィルムとして用いる場合には、基材(s)はフレキシブルな透明基材からなる層を有することが好ましく、基材(s)が、少なくとも一方の面にハードコート層が積層されている複層構造を有してもよい。
(window film)
The window film is arranged on the viewing side of the display device (preferably the flexible image display device) and plays a role of protecting other components from external shocks or environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. Glass may be used as such a protective layer, and in a flexible image display device, a material having flexible properties may be used for the window film instead of being rigid and hard like glass. Therefore, when the laminate of the present invention is used as a window film in a flexible display device, the substrate (s) preferably has a layer made of a flexible transparent substrate, and the substrate (s) is at least one of It may have a multi-layer structure in which a hard coat layer is laminated on the surface.
 前記透明基材は、可視光線の透過率が例えば70%以上、好ましくは80%以上である。前記透明基材は、透明性のある高分子フィルムなら、どのようなものでも使用可能である。具体的には、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリメチルペンテン、ノルボルネンまたはシクロオレフィンを含む単量体の単位を有するシクロオレフィン系誘導体等のポリオレフィン類、ジアセチルセルロース、トリアセチルセルロース、プロピオニルセルロース等の(変性)セルロース類、メチルメタクリレート(共)重合体等のアクリル類、スチレン(共)重合体等のポリスチレン類、アクリロニトリル・ブタジエン・スチレン共重合体類、アクリロニトリル・スチレン共重合体類、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体類、ポリ塩化ビニル類、ポリ塩化ビニリデン類、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリブチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、ポリアリレート等のポリエステル類、ナイロン等のポリアミド類、ポリイミド類、ポリアミドイミド類、ポリエーテルイミド類、ポリエーテルスルホン類、ポリスルホン類、ポリビニルアルコール類、ポリビニルアセタール類、ポリウレタン類、エポキシ樹脂類などの高分子で形成されたフィルムであってもよく、未延伸1軸または2軸延伸フィルムを使用することができる。これらの高分子はそれぞれ単独または2種以上混合して使用することができる。好ましくは、前記記載の透明基材の中でも透明性及び耐熱性に優れたポリアミドフィルム、ポリアミドイミドフィルムまたはポリイミドフィルム、ポリエステル系フィルム、オレフィン系フィルム、アクリルフィルム、セルロース系フィルムが好ましい。高分子フィルムの中には、シリカ等の無機粒子、有機微粒子、ゴム粒子等を分散させることも好ましい。さらに、顔料や染料のような着色剤、蛍光増白剤、分散剤、可塑剤、熱安定剤、光安定剤、赤外線吸収剤、紫外線吸収剤、帯電防止剤、酸化防止剤、滑剤、溶剤などの配合剤を含有させてもよい。前記透明基材の厚さは5μm以上200μm以下、好ましくは、20μm以上100μm以下である。特にフレキシブル画像表示装置に用いる場合、前記透明基材の厚さは5μm以上60μm以下が好ましい。 The transparent substrate has a visible light transmittance of, for example, 70% or more, preferably 80% or more. Any transparent polymer film can be used as the transparent substrate. Specifically, polyolefins such as polyethylene, polypropylene, polymethylpentene, norbornene, or cycloolefin derivatives having a monomer unit containing cycloolefin, (modified) cellulose such as diacetyl cellulose, triacetyl cellulose, and propionyl cellulose acrylics such as methyl methacrylate (co)polymers, polystyrenes such as styrene (co)polymers, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymers, acrylonitrile-styrene copolymers, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers Polyvinyl chlorides, polyvinylidene chlorides, polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polyesters such as polycarbonate and polyarylate, polyamides such as nylon, polyimides, polyamideimides, polyetherimides, Films formed of polymers such as polyethersulfones, polysulfones, polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinyl acetals, polyurethanes, and epoxy resins may be used, and unstretched uniaxially or biaxially stretched films may be used. can be done. These polymers can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among the transparent substrates described above, preferred are polyamide films, polyamideimide films, polyimide films, polyester films, olefin films, acrylic films, and cellulose films, which are excellent in transparency and heat resistance. It is also preferable to disperse inorganic particles such as silica, organic fine particles, rubber particles, etc. in the polymer film. In addition, colorants such as pigments and dyes, optical brighteners, dispersants, plasticizers, heat stabilizers, light stabilizers, infrared absorbers, ultraviolet absorbers, antistatic agents, antioxidants, lubricants, solvents, etc. may contain a compounding agent. The thickness of the transparent substrate is 5 μm or more and 200 μm or less, preferably 20 μm or more and 100 μm or less. Particularly when used in a flexible image display device, the thickness of the transparent substrate is preferably 5 μm or more and 60 μm or less.
 本発明の積層体がウインドウフィルムとして用いられる場合のハードコート層も、上記したハードコート層(hc)と同様である。上述の通り、ハードコート層(hc)は、活性エネルギー線硬化型樹脂及び熱硬化型の樹脂から形成されることが好ましく、このような樹脂は活性エネルギー線或いは熱エネルギーを照射して架橋構造を形成する反応性材料を含むハードコート組成物の硬化により形成することができる。前記ハードコート組成物は、ラジカル重合性化合物及びカチオン重合性化合物の少なくとも1種の重合物を含有する。 The hard coat layer when the laminate of the present invention is used as a window film is also the same as the hard coat layer (hc) described above. As described above, the hard coat layer (hc) is preferably formed from an active energy ray-curable resin and a thermosetting resin. It can be formed by curing a hardcoat composition containing the forming reactive material. The hard coat composition contains at least one polymer of a radically polymerizable compound and a cationic polymerizable compound.
 前記ラジカル重合性化合物とは、ラジカル重合性基を有する化合物である。前記ラジカル重合性化合物が有するラジカル重合性基としては、ラジカル重合反応を生じ得る官能基であればよく、炭素-炭素不飽和二重結合を含む基などが挙げられる。具体的には、ビニル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。なお、前記ラジカル重合性化合物が2個以上のラジカル重合性基を有する場合、これらのラジカル重合性基はそれぞれ同一であってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。前記ラジカル重合性化合物が1分子中に有するラジカル重合性基の数は、ハードコート層の硬度を向上する点から、2つ以上であることが好ましい。前記ラジカル重合性化合物としては、反応性の高さの点から、中でも(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する化合物が好ましく、1分子中に2~6個の(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する多官能アクリレートモノマーと称される化合物やエポキシ(メタ)アクリレート、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエステル(メタ)アクリレートと称される分子内に数個の(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する分子量が数百から数千のオリゴマーを好ましく使用できる。エポキシ(メタ)アクリレート、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート及びポリエステル(メタ)アクリレートから選択された1種以上を含むことが好ましい。 The radically polymerizable compound is a compound having a radically polymerizable group. The radically polymerizable group possessed by the radically polymerizable compound may be any functional group capable of causing a radical polymerization reaction, and examples thereof include a group containing a carbon-carbon unsaturated double bond. Specific examples include a vinyl group and a (meth)acryloyl group. When the radically polymerizable compound has two or more radically polymerizable groups, these radically polymerizable groups may be the same or different. The number of radically polymerizable groups in one molecule of the radically polymerizable compound is preferably two or more from the viewpoint of improving the hardness of the hard coat layer. The radically polymerizable compound is preferably a compound having a (meth)acryloyl group from the viewpoint of high reactivity, and a polyfunctional acrylate monomer having 2 to 6 (meth)acryloyl groups in one molecule. Compounds called epoxy (meth) acrylate, urethane (meth) acrylate, polyester (meth) acrylate and oligomers having several (meth) acryloyl groups in the molecule and having a molecular weight of several hundred to several thousand are preferred. Available. It preferably contains one or more selected from epoxy (meth)acrylate, urethane (meth)acrylate and polyester (meth)acrylate.
 前記カチオン重合性化合物とは、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ビニルエーテル基等のカチオン重合性基を有する化合物である。前記カチオン重合性化合物が1分子中に有するカチオン重合性基の数は、ハードコート層の硬度を向上する点から、2つ以上であることが好ましく、更に3つ以上であることが好ましい。また、前記カチオン重合性化合物としては、中でも、カチオン重合性基としてエポキシ基及びオキセタニル基の少なくとも1種を有する化合物が好ましい。エポキシ基、オキセタニル基等の環状エーテル基は、重合反応に伴う収縮が小さいという点から好ましい。また、環状エーテル基のうちエポキシ基を有する化合物は多様な構造の化合物が入手し易く、得られたハードコート層の耐久性に悪影響を与えず、ラジカル重合性化合物との相溶性もコントロールし易いという利点がある。また、環状エーテル基のうちオキセタニル基は、エポキシ基と比較して重合度が高くなりやすく、低毒性であり、得られたハードコート層のカチオン重合性化合物から得られるネットワーク形成速度を早め、ラジカル重合性化合物と混在する領域でも未反応のモノマーを膜中に残さずに独立したネットワークを形成する等の利点がある。 The cationically polymerizable compound is a compound having a cationically polymerizable group such as an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, or a vinyl ether group. The number of cationically polymerizable groups in one molecule of the cationically polymerizable compound is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, from the viewpoint of improving the hardness of the hard coat layer. As the cationically polymerizable compound, among others, a compound having at least one of an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group as a cationically polymerizable group is preferable. A cyclic ether group such as an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group is preferable from the viewpoint that shrinkage accompanying a polymerization reaction is small. In addition, among the cyclic ether groups, compounds having epoxy groups are readily available in various structures, do not adversely affect the durability of the resulting hard coat layer, and are easy to control compatibility with radically polymerizable compounds. There is an advantage. In addition, among the cyclic ether groups, the oxetanyl group tends to have a higher degree of polymerization than the epoxy group, is less toxic, accelerates the network formation rate obtained from the cationically polymerizable compound in the resulting hard coat layer, and radicals It has the advantage of forming an independent network without leaving unreacted monomers in the film even in a region where the polymerizable compound is mixed.
 エポキシ基を有するカチオン重合性化合物としては、例えば、脂環族環を有する多価アルコールのポリグリシジルエーテル又は、シクロヘキセン環、シクロペンテン環含有化合物を、過酸化水素、過酸等の適当な酸化剤でエポキシ化する事によって得られる脂環族エポキシ樹脂;脂肪族多価アルコール、又はそのアルキレンオキサイド付加物のポリグリシジルエーテル、脂肪族長鎖多塩基酸のポリグリシジルエステル、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレートのホモポリマー、コポリマーなどの脂肪族エポキシ樹脂;ビスフェノールA、ビスフェノールFや水添ビスフェノールA等のビスフェノール類、又はそれらのアルキレンオキサイド付加体、カプロラクトン付加体等の誘導体と、エピクロルヒドリンとの反応によって製造されるグリシジルエーテル、及びノボラックエポキシ樹脂等でありビスフェノール類から誘導されるグリシジルエーテル型エポキシ樹脂等が挙げられる。
 前記ハードコート組成物には重合開始剤をさらに含むことができる。重合開始剤としては、ラジカル重合開始剤、カチオン重合開始剤、ラジカル及びカチオン重合開始剤等であり、適宜選択して用いることができる。これらの重合開始剤は、活性エネルギー線照射及び加熱の少なくとも一種により分解されて、ラジカルもしくはカチオンを発生してラジカル重合とカチオン重合を進行させるものである。
Examples of cationic polymerizable compounds having an epoxy group include polyglycidyl ethers of polyhydric alcohols having an alicyclic ring, or compounds containing cyclohexene rings or cyclopentene rings, which are treated with a suitable oxidizing agent such as hydrogen peroxide or peracid. Alicyclic epoxy resin obtained by epoxidation; polyglycidyl ether of aliphatic polyhydric alcohol or its alkylene oxide adduct, polyglycidyl ester of aliphatic long-chain polybasic acid, homopolymer of glycidyl (meth)acrylate, Aliphatic epoxy resins such as copolymers; bisphenols such as bisphenol A, bisphenol F and hydrogenated bisphenol A, or derivatives such as alkylene oxide adducts and caprolactone adducts thereof, and glycidyl ethers produced by reaction with epichlorohydrin, and glycidyl ether type epoxy resins derived from bisphenols such as novolak epoxy resins.
The hard coat composition may further include a polymerization initiator. Examples of the polymerization initiator include radical polymerization initiators, cationic polymerization initiators, radical and cationic polymerization initiators, etc., and can be appropriately selected and used. These polymerization initiators are decomposed by at least one of active energy ray irradiation and heating to generate radicals or cations to promote radical polymerization and cationic polymerization.
 ラジカル重合開始剤は、活性エネルギー線照射及び加熱の少なくともいずれかによりラジカル重合を開始させる物質を放出することが可能であれば良い。例えば、熱ラジカル重合開始剤としては、過酸化水素、過安息香酸等の有機過酸化物、アゾビスブチロニトリル等のアゾ化合物等があげられる。
 活性エネルギー線ラジカル重合開始剤としては、分子の分解でラジカルが生成されるType1型ラジカル重合開始剤と、3級アミンと共存して水素引き抜き型反応でラジカルを生成するType2型ラジカル重合開始剤があり、それぞれ単独でまたは併用して使用することもできる。
Any radical polymerization initiator may be used as long as it can release a substance that initiates radical polymerization by at least one of active energy ray irradiation and heating. Examples of thermal radical polymerization initiators include organic peroxides such as hydrogen peroxide and perbenzoic acid, and azo compounds such as azobisbutyronitrile.
As active energy ray radical polymerization initiators, Type 1 type radical polymerization initiators that generate radicals by decomposition of molecules and Type 2 type radical polymerization initiators that generate radicals by hydrogen abstraction type reaction in coexistence with tertiary amines are used. Yes, they can be used alone or in combination.
 カチオン重合開始剤は、活性エネルギー線照射及び加熱の少なくともいずれかによりカチオン重合を開始させる物質を放出することが可能であれば良い。カチオン重合開始剤としては、芳香族ヨードニウム塩、芳香族スルホニウム塩、シクロペンタジエニル鉄(II)錯体等が使用できる。これらは、構造の違いによって活性エネルギー線照射または加熱のいずれかまたはいずれでもカチオン重合を開始することができる。 The cationic polymerization initiator should be capable of releasing a substance that initiates cationic polymerization by at least one of active energy ray irradiation and heating. As cationic polymerization initiators, aromatic iodonium salts, aromatic sulfonium salts, cyclopentadienyl iron (II) complexes and the like can be used. These can initiate cationic polymerization by either or both of active energy ray irradiation and heating depending on the difference in structure.
 前記重合開始剤は、前記ハードコート組成物全体100重量%に対して0.1~10重量%を含むことができる。前記重合開始剤の含量が0.1重量%未満の場合、硬化を十分に進行させることができず、最終的に得られた塗膜の機械的物性や密着力を具現することが難しく、10重量%を超える場合、硬化収縮による接着力不良や割れ現象及びカール現象が発生することがある。 The polymerization initiator can be included in an amount of 0.1 to 10% by weight with respect to 100% by weight of the hard coat composition as a whole. If the content of the polymerization initiator is less than 0.1% by weight, curing may not proceed sufficiently, and it may be difficult to realize the mechanical properties and adhesion of the finally obtained coating film. If the content is more than % by weight, adhesion failure, cracking, and curling may occur due to cure shrinkage.
 前記ハードコート組成物はさらに溶剤、添加剤からなる群から選択される一つ以上をさらに含むことができる。前記溶剤は、前記重合性化合物および重合開始剤を溶解または分散させることができるもので、本技術分野のハードコート組成物の溶剤として知られているものなら制限なく使用することができる。前記添加剤は、無機粒子、レベリング剤、安定剤、界面活性剤、帯電防止剤、潤滑剤、防汚剤などをさらに含むことができる。 The hard coat composition may further contain one or more selected from the group consisting of solvents and additives. The solvent is capable of dissolving or dispersing the polymerizable compound and the polymerization initiator, and any solvent known as a solvent for hard coat compositions in this technical field can be used without limitation. The additives may further include inorganic particles, leveling agents, stabilizers, surfactants, antistatic agents, lubricants, antifouling agents, and the like.
 (円偏光板)
 本発明の表示装置(好ましくはフレキシブル表示装置)は、上記の通り、偏光板、中でも円偏光板を備えることが好ましい。円偏光板は、直線偏光板にλ/4位相差板を積層することにより、右又は左円偏光成分のみを透過させる機能を有する機能層である。たとえば外光を右円偏光に変換して有機ELパネルで反射されて左円偏光となった外光を遮断し、有機ELの発光成分のみを透過させることで反射光の影響を抑制して画像を見やすくするために用いられる。円偏光機能を達成するためには、直線偏光板の吸収軸とλ/4位相差板の遅相軸は理論上45度である必要があるが、実用的には45±10度である。直線偏光板とλ/4位相差板は必ずしも隣接して積層される必要はなく、吸収軸と遅相軸の関係が前述の範囲を満足していればよい。全波長において完全な円偏光を達成することが好ましいが実用上は必ずしもその必要はないので本発明における円偏光板は楕円偏光板をも包含する。直線偏光板の視認側にさらにλ/4位相差フィルムを積層して、出射光を円偏光とすることで偏光サングラスをかけた状態での視認性を向上させることも好ましい。
(Circularly polarizing plate)
As described above, the display device (preferably flexible display device) of the present invention preferably includes a polarizing plate, especially a circularly polarizing plate. A circularly polarizing plate is a functional layer having a function of transmitting only a right-handed or left-handed circularly polarized light component by laminating a λ/4 retardation plate on a linearly polarizing plate. For example, by converting external light into right-handed circularly polarized light and blocking the left-handed circularly polarized light reflected by the organic EL panel, and allowing only the luminescent component of the organic EL to pass through, the effect of the reflected light is suppressed to create an image. used to make it easier to see. In order to achieve the circular polarization function, the absorption axis of the linear polarizer and the slow axis of the λ/4 retardation plate should theoretically be 45 degrees, but in practice they are 45±10 degrees. The linear polarizing plate and the λ/4 retardation plate do not necessarily have to be laminated adjacent to each other as long as the relationship between the absorption axis and the slow axis satisfies the above range. Although it is preferable to achieve perfect circular polarization at all wavelengths, it is not always necessary in practice, so the circularly polarizing plate in the present invention also includes an elliptically polarizing plate. It is also preferable to further laminate a λ/4 retardation film on the visible side of the linear polarizing plate to circularly polarize the emitted light, thereby improving the visibility when wearing polarized sunglasses.
 直線偏光板は、透過軸方向に振動している光は通すが、それとは垂直な振動成分の偏光を遮断する機能を有する機能層である。前記直線偏光板は、直線偏光子単独又は直線偏光子及びその少なくとも一方の面に貼り付けられた保護フィルムを備えた構成であってもよい。前記直線偏光板の厚さは、200μm以下であってもよく、好ましくは0.5μm以上、100μm以下である。直線偏光板の厚さが前記の範囲にあると直線偏光板の柔軟性が低下し難い傾向にある。 A linear polarizer is a functional layer that passes light oscillating in the direction of the transmission axis, but blocks the polarization of the oscillating component perpendicular to it. The linear polarizing plate may have a configuration including a linear polarizer alone or a linear polarizer and a protective film attached to at least one surface of the linear polarizer. The thickness of the linear polarizing plate may be 200 μm or less, preferably 0.5 μm or more and 100 μm or less. When the thickness of the linear polarizing plate is within the above range, the flexibility of the linear polarizing plate tends to be less likely to decrease.
 前記直線偏光子は、ポリビニルアルコール(以下、PVAと略すことがある)系フィルムを染色、延伸することで製造されるフィルム型偏光子であってもよい。延伸によって配向したPVA系フィルムに、ヨウ素等の二色性色素が吸着、又はPVAに吸着した状態で延伸されることで二色性色素が配向し、偏光性能を発揮する。前記フィルム型偏光子の製造においては、他に膨潤、ホウ酸による架橋、水溶液による洗浄、乾燥等の工程を有していてもよい。延伸や染色工程はPVA系フィルム単独で行ってもよいし、ポリエチレンテレフタレートのような他のフィルム(延伸用樹脂基材)と積層された状態で行うこともできる。用いられるPVA系フィルムの厚さは好ましくは3~100μmであり、前記延伸倍率は好ましくは2~10倍である。延伸用樹脂基材とPVA系樹脂層との積層体を作製する方法としては、延伸用樹脂基材の表面に、PVA系樹脂を含む塗布液を塗布し、乾燥する方法が好ましい。 The linear polarizer may be a film-type polarizer manufactured by dyeing and stretching a polyvinyl alcohol (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as PVA) film. A dichroic dye such as iodine is adsorbed on a PVA-based film that has been oriented by stretching, or the film is stretched while adsorbed to PVA, thereby aligning the dichroic dye and exhibiting polarizing performance. The production of the film-type polarizer may include other steps such as swelling, cross-linking with boric acid, washing with an aqueous solution, and drying. The stretching and dyeing processes may be carried out on the PVA-based film alone, or may be carried out while it is laminated with another film (stretching resin base material) such as polyethylene terephthalate. The thickness of the PVA-based film used is preferably 3 to 100 μm, and the draw ratio is preferably 2 to 10 times. As a method for producing a laminate of a stretchable resin base material and a PVA-based resin layer, a method of applying a coating liquid containing a PVA-based resin to the surface of the stretchable resin base material and drying it is preferable.
 特にPVA系樹脂層と延伸用樹脂基材を積層体の状態で延伸する工程と染色する工程を含む製法であれば、PVA系樹脂層が薄くても、延伸用樹脂基材に支持されていることにより延伸による破断などの不具合なく延伸することが可能となる。 In particular, if the manufacturing method includes the step of stretching and dyeing the PVA-based resin layer and the resin substrate for stretching in the state of a laminate, even if the PVA-based resin layer is thin, it is supported by the resin substrate for stretching. Thus, the film can be stretched without problems such as breakage due to stretching.
 前記偏光子の厚さは、20μm以下であり、好ましくは12μm以下であり、より好ましくは9μm以下であり、さらに好ましくは1~8μmであり、特に好ましくは3~6μmである。前記範囲内であれば、屈曲を阻害することなく、好ましい態様となる。 The thickness of the polarizer is 20 μm or less, preferably 12 μm or less, more preferably 9 μm or less, even more preferably 1 to 8 μm, particularly preferably 3 to 6 μm. If it is within the above range, it becomes a preferred embodiment without inhibiting bending.
 さらに前記偏光子の他の一例としては、液晶偏光組成物を塗布して形成する液晶塗布型偏光子が挙げられる。前記液晶偏光組成物は、液晶性化合物及び二色性色素化合物を含むことができる。前記液晶性化合物は、液晶状態を示す性質を有していればよく、特にスメクチック相等の高次の配向状態を有していると高い偏光性能を発揮することができるため好ましい。また、液晶性化合物は、重合性官能基を有することが好ましい。
 前記二色性色素化合物は、前記液晶性化合物とともに配向して二色性を示す色素であって、重合性官能基を有していてもよく、また、二色性色素自身が液晶性を有していてもよい。
 液晶偏光組成物に含まれる化合物のいずれかは重合性官能基を有する。前記液晶偏光組成物はさらに開始剤、溶剤、分散剤、レベリング剤、安定剤、界面活性剤、架橋剤、シランカップリング剤などを含むことができる。
 前記液晶偏光層は、配向膜上に液晶偏光組成物を塗布して液晶偏光層を形成することにより製造される。液晶偏光層は、フィルム型偏光子に比べて厚さを薄く形成することができ、その厚さは好ましくは0.5μm以上10μm以下、より好ましくは1μm以上5μm以下である。
Further, another example of the polarizer is a liquid crystal coated polarizer formed by applying a liquid crystal polarizing composition. The liquid crystal polarizing composition may contain a liquid crystal compound and a dichroic dye compound. The liquid crystalline compound only needs to have a property of exhibiting a liquid crystal state, and it is particularly preferable to have a high-order alignment state such as a smectic phase because high polarizing performance can be exhibited. Moreover, the liquid crystalline compound preferably has a polymerizable functional group.
The dichroic dye compound is a dye that exhibits dichroism by aligning with the liquid crystalline compound, and may have a polymerizable functional group, and the dichroic dye itself has liquid crystallinity. You may have
Any one of the compounds contained in the liquid crystal polarizing composition has a polymerizable functional group. The liquid crystal polarizing composition may further include an initiator, a solvent, a dispersant, a leveling agent, a stabilizer, a surfactant, a cross-linking agent, a silane coupling agent, and the like.
The liquid crystal polarizing layer is manufactured by coating a liquid crystal polarizing composition on an alignment film to form a liquid crystal polarizing layer. The liquid crystal polarizing layer can be formed thinner than the film-type polarizer, and the thickness is preferably 0.5 μm or more and 10 μm or less, more preferably 1 μm or more and 5 μm or less.
 前記配向膜は、例えば基材上に配向膜形成組成物を塗布し、ラビング、偏光照射等により配向性を付与することにより製造される。前記配向膜形成組成物は、配向剤を含み、さらに溶剤、架橋剤、開始剤、分散剤、レベリング剤、シランカップリング剤等を含んでいてもよい。前記配向剤としては、例えば、ポリビニルアルコール類、ポリアクリレート類、ポリアミック酸類、ポリイミド類が挙げられる。偏光照射により配向性を付与する配向剤を用いる場合、シンナメート基を含む配向剤を使用することが好ましい。前記配向剤として使用される高分子の重量平均分子量は、例えば、10,000~1,000,000程度である。前記配向膜の厚さは、好ましくは5nm以上10,000nm以下であり、配向規制力が十分に発現される点で、より好ましくは10nm以上500nm以下である。
 前記液晶偏光層は基材から剥離して転写して積層することもできるし、前記基材をそのまま積層することもできる。前記基材が、保護フィルムや位相差板、ウインドウフィルムの透明基材としての役割を担うことも好ましい。
The alignment film is produced, for example, by coating an alignment film-forming composition on a substrate and imparting alignment properties by rubbing, polarized light irradiation, or the like. The alignment film-forming composition contains an alignment agent, and may further contain a solvent, a cross-linking agent, an initiator, a dispersant, a leveling agent, a silane coupling agent, and the like. Examples of the alignment agent include polyvinyl alcohols, polyacrylates, polyamic acids, and polyimides. When using an alignment agent that imparts alignment properties by polarized light irradiation, it is preferable to use an alignment agent containing a cinnamate group. The weight average molecular weight of the polymer used as the alignment agent is, for example, about 10,000 to 1,000,000. The thickness of the alignment film is preferably 5 nm or more and 10,000 nm or less, and more preferably 10 nm or more and 500 nm or less in terms of sufficiently expressing the alignment control force.
The liquid crystal polarizing layer can be laminated by peeling from the base material and transferring, or the base material can be laminated as it is. It is also preferable that the base material plays a role as a protective film, a retardation plate, or a transparent base material for a window film.
 前記保護フィルムとしては、透明な高分子フィルムであればよく前記ウインドウフィルムの透明基材に使用される材料や添加剤と同じものが使用できる。セルロース系フィルム、オレフィン系フィルム、アクリルフィルム、ポリエステル系フィルムが好ましい。また、エポキシ樹脂等のカチオン硬化組成物やアクリレート等のラジカル硬化組成物を塗布して硬化して得られるコーティング型の保護フィルムであってもよい。該保護フィルムは、必要により可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤、赤外線吸収剤、顔料や染料のような着色剤、蛍光増白剤、分散剤、熱安定剤、光安定剤、帯電防止剤、酸化防止剤、滑剤、溶剤等を含んでいてもよい。該保護フィルムの厚さは、好ましくは200μm以下、より好ましくは1μm以上100μm以下である。保護フィルムの厚さが前記の範囲にあると、該フィルムの柔軟性が低下し難い傾向にある。保護フィルムは、ウインドウフィルムの透明基材の役割を兼ねることもできる。 As the protective film, any transparent polymer film can be used, and the same materials and additives as those used for the transparent base material of the window film can be used. Cellulose-based films, olefin-based films, acrylic films, and polyester-based films are preferred. It may also be a coating-type protective film obtained by applying and curing a cationic curable composition such as an epoxy resin or a radical curable composition such as an acrylate. The protective film may optionally contain plasticizers, ultraviolet absorbers, infrared absorbers, colorants such as pigments and dyes, fluorescent brighteners, dispersants, heat stabilizers, light stabilizers, antistatic agents, and antioxidants. , a lubricant, a solvent, and the like. The thickness of the protective film is preferably 200 μm or less, more preferably 1 μm or more and 100 μm or less. When the thickness of the protective film is within the above range, the flexibility of the film tends to be less likely to decrease. The protective film can also serve as the transparent base material of the window film.
 前記λ/4位相差板は、入射光の進行方向に直行する方向(フィルムの面内方向)にλ/4の位相差を与えるフィルムである。前記λ/4位相差板は、セルロース系フィルム、オレフィン系フィルム、ポリカーボネート系フィルム等の高分子フィルムを延伸することで製造される延伸型位相差板であってもよい。前記λ/4位相差板は、必要により位相差調整剤、可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤、赤外線吸収剤、顔料や染料のような着色剤、蛍光増白剤、分散剤、熱安定剤、光安定剤、帯電防止剤、酸化防止剤、滑剤、溶剤等を含んでいてもよい。
 前記延伸型位相差板の厚さは、好ましくは200μm以下、より好ましくは1μm以上100μm以下である。延伸型位相差板の厚さが前記の範囲にあると、該延伸型位相差板の柔軟性が低下し難い傾向にある。
The λ/4 retardation plate is a film that provides a λ/4 retardation in a direction (in-plane direction of the film) perpendicular to the traveling direction of incident light. The λ/4 retardation plate may be a stretched retardation plate manufactured by stretching a polymer film such as a cellulose-based film, an olefin-based film, or a polycarbonate-based film. The λ / 4 retardation plate, if necessary, retardation modifiers, plasticizers, ultraviolet absorbers, infrared absorbers, colorants such as pigments and dyes, fluorescent brighteners, dispersants, heat stabilizers, light stabilizers agents, antistatic agents, antioxidants, lubricants, solvents, and the like.
The thickness of the stretched retardation plate is preferably 200 μm or less, more preferably 1 μm or more and 100 μm or less. When the thickness of the stretched retardation plate is within the above range, the flexibility of the stretched retardation plate tends to be less likely to decrease.
 さらに前記λ/4位相差板の他の一例としては、液晶組成物を塗布して形成する液晶塗布型位相差板が挙げられる。
 前記液晶組成物は、ネマチック、コレステリック、スメクチック等の液晶状態を示す液晶性化合物を含む。前記液晶性化合物は、重合性官能基を有する。
 前記液晶組成物は、さらに開始剤、溶剤、分散剤、レベリング剤、安定剤、界面活性剤、架橋剤、シランカップリング剤などを含むことができる。
 前記液晶塗布型位相差板は、前記液晶偏光層と同様に、液晶組成物を下地上に塗布、硬化して液晶位相差層を形成することで製造することができる。液晶塗布型位相差板は、延伸型位相差板に比べて厚さを薄く形成することができる。前記液晶偏光層の厚さは、好ましくは0.5μm以上10μm以下、より好ましくは1μm以上5μm以下である。
 前記液晶塗布型位相差板は基材から剥離して転写して積層することもできるし、前記基材をそのまま積層することもできる。前記基材が、保護フィルムや位相差板、ウインドウフィルムの透明基材としての役割を担うことも好ましい。
Another example of the λ/4 retardation plate is a liquid crystal coated retardation plate formed by coating a liquid crystal composition.
The liquid crystal composition includes a liquid crystal compound exhibiting a liquid crystal state such as nematic, cholesteric, or smectic. The liquid crystalline compound has a polymerizable functional group.
The liquid crystal composition may further include an initiator, a solvent, a dispersant, a leveling agent, a stabilizer, a surfactant, a cross-linking agent, a silane coupling agent, and the like.
The liquid crystal-coated retardation plate can be produced by applying a liquid crystal composition on a base and curing to form a liquid crystal retardation layer in the same manner as the liquid crystal polarizing layer. The liquid crystal coating type retardation plate can be formed thinner than the stretching type retardation plate. The thickness of the liquid crystal polarizing layer is preferably 0.5 μm or more and 10 μm or less, more preferably 1 μm or more and 5 μm or less.
The liquid crystal-coated retardation plate can be laminated by peeling from the base material and transferred, or the base material can be laminated as it is. It is also preferable that the base material plays a role as a protective film, a retardation plate, or a transparent base material for a window film.
 一般的には、短波長ほど複屈折が大きく長波長になるほど小さな複屈折を示す材料が多い。この場合には全可視光領域でλ/4の位相差を達成することはできないので、視感度の高い560nm付近に対してλ/4となるように、面内位相差は、好ましくは100nm以上180nm以下、より好ましくは130nm以上150nm以下となるように設計される。通常とは逆の複屈折率波長分散特性を有する材料を用いた逆分散λ/4位相差板は、視認性が良好となる点で好ましい。このような材料としては、例えば延伸型位相差板は特開2007-232873号公報等に、液晶塗布型位相差板は特開2010-30979号公報等に記載されているものを用いることができる。
 また、他の方法としてはλ/2位相差板と組合せることで広帯域λ/4位相差板を得る技術も知られている(例えば、特開平10-90521号公報など)。λ/2位相差板もλ/4位相差板と同様の材料方法で製造される。延伸型位相差板と液晶塗布型位相差板の組合せは任意であるが、どちらも液晶塗布型位相差板を用いることにより厚さを薄くすることができる。
 前記円偏光板には斜め方向の視認性を高めるために、正のCプレートを積層する方法が知られている(例えば、特開2014-224837号公報など)。正のCプレートは、液晶塗布型位相差板であっても延伸型位相差板であってもよい。該位相差板の厚さ方向の位相差は、好ましくは-200nm以上-20nm以下、より好ましくは-140nm以上-40nm以下である。
In general, many materials exhibit larger birefringence at shorter wavelengths and smaller birefringence at longer wavelengths. In this case, it is not possible to achieve a retardation of λ/4 in the entire visible light region, so that the in-plane retardation is preferably 100 nm or more so that it is λ/4 around 560 nm where visibility is high. It is designed to be 180 nm or less, more preferably 130 nm or more and 150 nm or less. A reverse-dispersion λ/4 retardation plate using a material having a birefringence wavelength dispersion characteristic opposite to that of a normal one is preferable in terms of good visibility. As such materials, for example, those described in JP-A-2007-232873 and the like for the stretched retardation plate, and those described in JP-A-2010-30979 and the like for the liquid crystal-coated retardation plate can be used. .
As another method, a technique of obtaining a broadband λ/4 retardation plate by combining with a λ/2 retardation plate is also known (for example, JP-A-10-90521). The λ/2 retardation plate is also manufactured by a material method similar to that of the λ/4 retardation plate. The combination of the stretched retardation plate and the liquid crystal-coated retardation plate is arbitrary, but the thickness of both can be reduced by using the liquid crystal-coated retardation plate.
A method is known in which a positive C plate is laminated on the circularly polarizing plate in order to improve the visibility in the oblique direction (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-224837). The positive C-plate may be either a liquid crystal-coated retardation plate or a stretched retardation plate. The retardation in the thickness direction of the retardation plate is preferably −200 nm or more and −20 nm or less, more preferably −140 nm or more and −40 nm or less.
(タッチセンサ)
 本発明の積層体を備える表示装置(好ましくはフレキシブル表示装置)は、上記の通り、タッチセンサを備えることが好ましい。タッチセンサは入力手段として用いられる。タッチセンサとしては、抵抗膜方式、表面弾性波方式、赤外線方式、電磁誘導方式、静電容量方式等様々な様式が挙げられ、好ましくは静電容量方式が挙げられる。
 静電容量方式タッチセンサは活性領域及び前記活性領域の外郭部に位置する非活性領域に区分される。活性領域は表示パネルで画面が表示される領域(表示部)に対応する領域であって、使用者のタッチが感知される領域であり、非活性領域は表示装置で画面が表示されない領域(非表示部)に対応する領域である。タッチセンサは、好ましくはフレキシブルな特性を有する基板と、前記基板の活性領域に形成された感知パターンと、前記基板の非活性領域に形成され、前記感知パターンとパッド部を介して外部の駆動回路と接続するための各センシングラインを含むことができる。フレキシブルな特性を有する基板としては、前記ウインドウフィルムの透明基板と同様の材料が使用できる。タッチセンサの基板は、靱性が2,000MPa%以上のものがタッチセンサのクラック抑制の面から好ましい。より好ましくは靱性が2,000MPa%以上、30,000MPa%以下である。ここで、靭性は、高分子材料の引張実験を通じて得られる応力(MPa)-ひずみ(%)曲線(Stress-strain curve)で破壊点までの曲線の下部面積として定義される。
(touch sensor)
A display device (preferably a flexible display device) including the laminate of the present invention preferably includes a touch sensor as described above. A touch sensor is used as an input means. As the touch sensor, there are various types such as a resistive film type, a surface acoustic wave type, an infrared type, an electromagnetic induction type, and an electrostatic capacity type, and the capacitive type is preferred.
A capacitive touch sensor is divided into an active area and a non-active area located outside the active area. The active area is an area corresponding to the area (display part) where the screen is displayed on the display panel, and is an area where a user's touch is sensed. display area). The touch sensor preferably includes a flexible substrate, a sensing pattern formed in an active region of the substrate, and an external driving circuit formed in a non-active region of the substrate through the sensing pattern and a pad portion. each sensing line for connecting to a As the flexible substrate, the same material as the transparent substrate of the window film can be used. The substrate of the touch sensor preferably has a toughness of 2,000 MPa % or more from the viewpoint of suppressing cracks in the touch sensor. More preferably, the toughness is 2,000 MPa% or more and 30,000 MPa% or less. Here, the toughness is defined as the lower area of the stress-strain curve (Stress-strain curve) obtained through a tensile test of a polymer material up to the breaking point.
 前記感知パターンは、第1方向に形成された第1パターン及び第2方向に形成された第2パターンを備えることができる。第1パターンと第2パターンとは互いに異なる方向に配置される。第1パターン及び第2パターンは、同一層に形成され、タッチされる地点を感知するためには、それぞれのパターンが電気的に接続されなければならない。第1パターンは複数の単位パターンが継ぎ手を介して互いに接続された形態であるが、第2パターンは複数の単位パターンがアイランド形態に互いに分離された構造になっているので、第2パターンを電気的に接続するためには別途のブリッジ電極が必要である。第2パターンの接続のための電極には、周知の透明電極を適用することができる。該透明電極の素材としては、例えば、インジウムスズ酸化物(ITO)、インジウム亜鉛酸化物(IZO)、亜鉛酸化物(ZnO)、インジウム亜鉛スズ酸化物(IZTO)、インジウムガリウム亜鉛酸化物(IGZO)、カドミウムスズ酸化物(CTO)、PEDOT(poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene))、炭素ナノチューブ(CNT)、グラフェン、金属ワイヤなどが挙げられ、好ましくはITOが挙げられる。これらは単独又は2種以上混合して使用できる。金属ワイヤに使用される金属は特に限定されず、例えば、銀、金、アルミニウム、銅、鉄、ニッケル、チタン、テレニウム、クロムなどが挙げられ、これらは単独又は2種以上混合して使用することができる。
 ブリッジ電極は感知パターン上部に絶縁層を介して前記絶縁層上部に形成されることができ、基板上にブリッジ電極が形成されており、その上に絶縁層及び感知パターンを形成することができる。前記ブリッジ電極は感知パターンと同じ素材で形成することもでき、モリブデン、銀、アルミニウム、銅、パラジウム、金、白金、亜鉛、スズ、チタン又はこれらのうちの2種以上の合金で形成することもできる。
 第1パターンと第2パターンは電気的に絶縁されなければならないので、感知パターンとブリッジ電極の間には絶縁層が形成される。該絶縁層は、第1パターンの継ぎ手とブリッジ電極との間にのみ形成することや、感知パターン全体を覆う層として形成することもできる。感知パターン全体を覆う層の場合、ブリッジ電極は絶縁層に形成されたコンタクトホールを介して第2パターンを接続することができる。
The sensing patterns may include first patterns formed in a first direction and second patterns formed in a second direction. The first pattern and the second pattern are arranged in different directions. The first pattern and the second pattern are formed in the same layer, and each pattern must be electrically connected to sense a touched point. The first pattern has a form in which a plurality of unit patterns are connected to each other through joints, while the second pattern has a structure in which a plurality of unit patterns are separated from each other in an island form. A separate bridge electrode is required for direct connection. A well-known transparent electrode can be applied to the electrode for connection of the second pattern. Materials for the transparent electrode include, for example, indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), zinc oxide (ZnO), indium zinc tin oxide (IZTO), and indium gallium zinc oxide (IGZO). , cadmium tin oxide (CTO), PEDOT (poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)), carbon nanotube (CNT), graphene, metal wire, etc., preferably ITO. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more. The metal used for the metal wire is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include silver, gold, aluminum, copper, iron, nickel, titanium, terenium, chromium, etc. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. can be done.
A bridge electrode may be formed on the insulating layer above the sensing pattern with an insulating layer interposed therebetween, and the bridge electrode may be formed on the substrate, and the insulating layer and the sensing pattern may be formed thereon. The bridge electrode may be made of the same material as the sensing pattern, and may be made of molybdenum, silver, aluminum, copper, palladium, gold, platinum, zinc, tin, titanium, or an alloy of two or more of these. can.
Since the first pattern and the second pattern should be electrically insulated, an insulating layer is formed between the sensing pattern and the bridge electrode. The insulating layer can be formed only between the joints and bridge electrodes of the first pattern, or can be formed as a layer covering the entire sensing pattern. In the case of a layer covering the entire sensing pattern, the bridge electrode can connect the second pattern through contact holes formed in the insulating layer.
 前記タッチセンサは、感知パターンが形成されたパターン領域と、感知パターンが形成されていない非パターン領域との間の透過率の差、具体的には、これらの領域における屈折率の差によって誘発される光透過率の差を適切に補償するための手段として基板と電極の間に光学調節層をさらに含むことができる。該光学調節層は、無機絶縁物質又は有機絶縁物質を含むことができる。光学調節層は光硬化性有機バインダー及び溶剤を含む光硬化組成物を基板上にコーティングして形成することができる。前記光硬化組成物は無機粒子をさらに含むことができる。前記無機粒子によって光学調節層の屈折率を高くすることができる。
 前記光硬化性有機バインダーは、本発明の効果を損ねない範囲で、例えば、アクリレート系単量体、スチレン系単量体、カルボン酸系単量体などの各単量体の共重合体を含むことができる。前記光硬化性有機バインダーは、例えば、エポキシ基含有繰り返し単位、アクリレート繰り返し単位、カルボン酸繰り返し単位などの互いに異なる各繰り返し単位を含む共重合体であってもよい。
 前記無機粒子としては、例えば、ジルコニア粒子、チタニア粒子、アルミナ粒子などが挙げられる。
 前記光硬化組成物は、光重合開始剤、重合性モノマー、硬化補助剤などの各添加剤をさらに含むこともできる。
The touch sensor is induced by a difference in transmittance between a patterned area where a sensing pattern is formed and a non-patterned area where no sensing pattern is formed, specifically by a difference in refractive index in these areas. An optical adjustment layer may further be included between the substrate and the electrode as a means for properly compensating for differences in optical transmittance. The optical modulating layer can comprise an inorganic insulating material or an organic insulating material. The optical control layer may be formed by coating a photocurable composition containing a photocurable organic binder and a solvent on a substrate. The photocurable composition may further include inorganic particles. The inorganic particles can increase the refractive index of the optical adjustment layer.
The photocurable organic binder includes a copolymer of each monomer such as an acrylate-based monomer, a styrene-based monomer, and a carboxylic acid-based monomer within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. be able to. The photocurable organic binder may be, for example, a copolymer containing different repeating units such as epoxy group-containing repeating units, acrylate repeating units, and carboxylic acid repeating units.
Examples of the inorganic particles include zirconia particles, titania particles, and alumina particles.
The photocurable composition may further include additives such as a photopolymerization initiator, a polymerizable monomer, and a curing aid.
(接着層)
 前記表示装置(好ましくはフレキシブル画像表示装置)用積層体を形成する各層(ウインドウフィルム、円偏光板、タッチセンサ)並びに各層を構成するフィルム部材(直線偏光板、λ/4位相差板等)は接着剤によって接合することができる。該接着剤としては、水系接着剤、有機溶剤系、無溶剤系接着剤、固体接着剤、溶剤揮散型接着剤、湿気硬化型接着剤、加熱硬化型接着剤、嫌気硬化型、活性エネルギー線硬化型接着剤、硬化剤混合型接着剤、熱溶融型接着剤、感圧型接着剤(粘着剤)、再湿型接着剤等、通常使用されている接着剤等が使用でき、好ましくは水系溶剤揮散型接着剤、活性エネルギー線硬化型接着剤、粘着剤を使用できる。接着剤層の厚さは、求められる接着力等に応じて適宜調節することができ、好ましくは0.01~500μm、より好ましくは0.1~300μmである。前記表示装置(好ましくはフレキシブル画像表示装置)用積層体には、複数の接着層が存在するが、それぞれの厚さや種類は、同じであっても異なっていてもよい。
(adhesion layer)
Each layer (window film, circularly polarizing plate, touch sensor) forming the laminate for the display device (preferably a flexible image display device) and film members (linear polarizing plate, λ/4 retardation plate, etc.) constituting each layer are It can be joined with an adhesive. Examples of the adhesive include water-based adhesives, organic solvent-based adhesives, solvent-free adhesives, solid adhesives, solvent volatile adhesives, moisture-curable adhesives, heat-curable adhesives, anaerobic-curable adhesives, and active energy ray-curable adhesives. Commonly used adhesives such as adhesives, curing agent-mixed adhesives, hot-melt adhesives, pressure-sensitive adhesives (adhesives), and rewetting adhesives can be used, preferably water-based solvent volatilization. A type adhesive, an active energy ray-curable adhesive, and a pressure-sensitive adhesive can be used. The thickness of the adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted according to the desired adhesive strength and the like, and is preferably 0.01 to 500 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 300 μm. A plurality of adhesive layers are present in the laminate for a display device (preferably a flexible image display device), and the respective thicknesses and types may be the same or different.
 前記水系溶剤揮散型接着剤としては、ポリビニルアルコール系ポリマー、でんぷん等の水溶性ポリマー、エチレン-酢酸ビニル系エマルジョン、スチレン-ブタジエン系エマルジョン等水分散状態のポリマーを主剤ポリマーとして使用することができる。前記主剤ポリマーと水とに加えて、架橋剤、シラン系化合物、イオン性化合物、架橋触媒、酸化防止剤、染料、顔料、無機フィラー、有機溶剤等を配合してもよい。前記水系溶剤揮散型接着剤によって接着する場合、前記水系溶剤揮散型接着剤を被接着層間に注入して被着層を貼合した後、乾燥させることで接着性を付与することができる。前記水系溶剤揮散型接着剤を用いる場合、その接着層の厚さは、好ましくは0.01~10μm、より好ましくは0.1~1μmである。前記水系溶剤揮散型接着剤を複数層に用いる場合、それぞれの層の厚さや種類は同じであっても異なっていてもよい。 As the water-based solvent volatilization adhesive, water-soluble polymers such as polyvinyl alcohol-based polymers and starch, and polymers in a water-dispersed state such as ethylene-vinyl acetate-based emulsions and styrene-butadiene-based emulsions can be used as main polymers. In addition to the main polymer and water, crosslinking agents, silane compounds, ionic compounds, crosslinking catalysts, antioxidants, dyes, pigments, inorganic fillers, organic solvents, and the like may be added. When bonding with the water-based solvent volatilization type adhesive, adhesion can be imparted by injecting the water-based solvent volatilization type adhesive between the layers to be adhered, laminating the layers to be adhered, and then drying. When the water-based solvent volatilization type adhesive is used, the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 1 μm. When the water-based solvent volatilization type adhesive is used for multiple layers, the thickness and type of each layer may be the same or different.
 前記活性エネルギー線硬化型接着剤は、活性エネルギー線を照射して接着剤層を形成する反応性材料を含む活性エネルギー線硬化組成物の硬化により形成することができる。前記活性エネルギー線硬化組成物は、ハードコート組成物に含まれるものと同様のラジカル重合性化合物及びカチオン重合性化合物の少なくとも1種の重合物を含有することができる。前記ラジカル重合性化合物は、ハードコート組成物におけるラジカル重合性化合物と同じ化合物を用いることができる。
 前記カチオン重合性化合物は、ハードコート組成物におけるカチオン重合性化合物と同じ化合物を用いることができる。
 活性エネルギー線硬化組成物に用いられるカチオン重合性化合物としては、エポキシ化合物が特に好ましい。接着剤組成物としての粘度を下げるために単官能の化合物を反応性希釈剤として含むことも好ましい。
The active energy ray-curable adhesive can be formed by curing an active energy ray-curable composition containing a reactive material that forms an adhesive layer upon irradiation with an active energy ray. The active energy ray-curable composition can contain at least one polymer of the same radically polymerizable compound and cationic polymerizable compound as those contained in the hard coat composition. As the radically polymerizable compound, the same compound as the radically polymerizable compound in the hard coat composition can be used.
As the cationic polymerizable compound, the same compound as the cationic polymerizable compound in the hard coat composition can be used.
Epoxy compounds are particularly preferred as the cationic polymerizable compound used in the active energy ray-curable composition. It is also preferred to contain a monofunctional compound as a reactive diluent in order to reduce the viscosity of the adhesive composition.
 活性エネルギー線組成物は、粘度を低下させるために、単官能の化合物を含むことができる。該単官能の化合物としては、1分子中に1個の(メタ)アクリロイル基を有するアクリレート系単量体や、1分子中に1個のエポキシ基又はオキセタニル基を有する化合物、例えば、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。
 活性エネルギー線組成物は、さらに重合開始剤を含むことができる。該重合開始剤としては、ラジカル重合開始剤、カチオン重合開始剤、ラジカル及びカチオン重合開始剤等が挙げられ、これらは適宜選択して用いられる。これらの重合開始剤は、活性エネルギー線照射及び加熱の少なくとも一種により分解されて、ラジカルもしくはカチオンを発生してラジカル重合とカチオン重合を進行させるものである。ハードコート組成物の記載の中で活性エネルギー線照射によりラジカル重合又はカチオン重合の内の少なくともいずれか開始することができる開始剤を使用することができる。
 前記活性エネルギー線硬化組成物はさらに、イオン捕捉剤、酸化防止剤、連鎖移動剤、密着付与剤、熱可塑性樹脂、充填剤、流動粘度調整剤、可塑剤、消泡剤溶剤、添加剤、溶剤を含むことができる。前記活性エネルギー線硬化型接着剤によって2つの被接着層を接着する場合、前記活性エネルギー線硬化組成物を被接着層のいずれか一方又は両方に塗布後、貼合し、いずれかの被着層又は両方の被接着層に活性エネルギー線を照射して硬化させることにより、接着することができる。前記活性エネルギー線硬化型接着剤を用いる場合、その接着層の厚さは、好ましくは0.01~20μm、より好ましくは0.1~10μmである。前記活性エネルギー線硬化型接着剤を複数の接着層形成に用いる場合、それぞれの層の厚さや種類は同じであっても異なっていてもよい。
The active energy ray composition can contain a monofunctional compound to reduce viscosity. Examples of the monofunctional compound include acrylate-based monomers having one (meth)acryloyl group in one molecule, compounds having one epoxy group or oxetanyl group in one molecule, such as glycidyl (meth) ) acrylates and the like.
The active energy ray composition can further contain a polymerization initiator. Examples of the polymerization initiator include radical polymerization initiators, cationic polymerization initiators, radical and cationic polymerization initiators, and these are appropriately selected and used. These polymerization initiators are decomposed by at least one of active energy ray irradiation and heating to generate radicals or cations to promote radical polymerization and cationic polymerization. In the description of the hard coat composition, an initiator capable of initiating at least one of radical polymerization and cationic polymerization upon exposure to active energy rays can be used.
The active energy ray-curable composition further includes an ion scavenger, an antioxidant, a chain transfer agent, an adhesion imparting agent, a thermoplastic resin, a filler, a flow viscosity modifier, a plasticizer, an antifoaming agent solvent, an additive, and a solvent. can include When bonding two layers to be adhered with the active energy ray-curable adhesive, the active energy ray-curable composition is applied to one or both of the layers to be adhered, and then laminated, and any adherend layer is adhered. Alternatively, both layers to be adhered can be adhered by irradiating them with active energy rays for curing. When the active energy ray-curable adhesive is used, the adhesive layer preferably has a thickness of 0.01 to 20 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 10 μm. When the active energy ray-curable adhesive is used to form a plurality of adhesive layers, the thickness and type of each layer may be the same or different.
 前記粘着剤としては、主剤ポリマーに応じて、アクリル系粘着剤、ウレタン系粘着剤、ゴム系粘着剤、シリコーン系粘着剤等に分類され何れを使用することもできる。粘着剤には主剤ポリマーに加えて、架橋剤、シラン系化合物、イオン性化合物、架橋触媒、酸化防止剤、粘着付与剤、可塑剤、染料、顔料、無機フィラー等を配合してもよい。前記粘着剤を構成する各成分を溶剤に溶解・分散させて粘着剤組成物を得て、該粘着剤組成物を基材上に塗布した後に乾燥させることで、粘着剤層接着層が形成される。粘着層は直接形成されてもよいし、別途基材に形成したものを転写することもできる。接着前の粘着面をカバーするためには離型フィルムを使用することも好ましい。前記活性エネルギー線硬化型接着剤を用いる場合、その接着層の厚さは、好ましくは0.1~500μm、より好ましくは1~300μmである。前記粘着剤を複数層用いる場合には、それぞれの層の厚さや種類は同じであっても異なっていてもよい。 The adhesives are classified into acrylic adhesives, urethane adhesives, rubber adhesives, silicone adhesives, etc., depending on the main polymer, and any of them can be used. In addition to the base polymer, the adhesive may contain a cross-linking agent, a silane compound, an ionic compound, a cross-linking catalyst, an antioxidant, a tackifier, a plasticizer, a dye, a pigment, an inorganic filler, and the like. An adhesive layer is formed by dissolving and dispersing each component constituting the adhesive in a solvent to obtain an adhesive composition, applying the adhesive composition on a substrate and then drying it. be. The adhesive layer may be formed directly, or may be transferred after being separately formed on the substrate. It is also preferable to use a release film to cover the adhesive surface before adhesion. When the active energy ray-curable adhesive is used, the adhesive layer preferably has a thickness of 0.1 to 500 μm, more preferably 1 to 300 μm. When using a plurality of layers of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, the thickness and type of each layer may be the same or different.
 (遮光パターン)
 前記遮光パターンは、前記表示装置(好ましくはフレキシブル画像表示装置)のベゼル又はハウジングの少なくとも一部として適用することができる。遮光パターンによって前記表示装置(好ましくはフレキシブル画像表示装置)の辺縁部に配置される配線が隠されて視認されにくくすることで、画像の視認性が向上する。前記遮光パターンは単層又は複層の形態であってもよい。遮光パターンのカラーは特に制限されることはなく、黒色、白色、金属色などの多様なカラーであってもよい。遮光パターンはカラーを具現するための顔料と、アクリル系樹脂、エステル系樹脂、エポキシ系樹脂、ポリウレタン、シリコーンなどの高分子で形成することができる。これらの単独又は2種類以上の混合物で使用することもできる。前記遮光パターンは、印刷、リソグラフィ、インクジェットなど各種の方法にて形成することができる。遮光パターンの厚さは、好ましくは1~100μm、より好ましくは2~50μmである。また、遮光パターンの厚さ方向に傾斜等の形状を付与することも好ましい。
(Shading pattern)
The light shielding pattern can be applied as at least part of a bezel or housing of the display device (preferably a flexible image display device). The visibility of the image is improved by hiding the wiring arranged at the peripheral portion of the display device (preferably the flexible image display device) by the light-shielding pattern and making it difficult to see. The light shielding pattern may be in the form of a single layer or multiple layers. The color of the light-shielding pattern is not particularly limited, and various colors such as black, white, and metallic color may be used. The light-shielding pattern may be formed of pigments for realizing colors and polymers such as acryl-based resin, ester-based resin, epoxy-based resin, polyurethane, and silicone. These may be used singly or as a mixture of two or more. The light-shielding pattern can be formed by various methods such as printing, lithography, and inkjet. The thickness of the light-shielding pattern is preferably 1-100 μm, more preferably 2-50 μm. It is also preferable to impart a shape such as an inclination in the thickness direction of the light shielding pattern.
 以下、実施例を挙げて本発明をより具体的に説明する。本発明は以下の実施例によって制限を受けるものではなく、前記、後記の趣旨に適合し得る範囲で適当に変更を加えて実施することも勿論可能であり、それらはいずれも本発明の技術的範囲に包含される。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. The present invention is not limited by the following examples, and it is of course possible to make appropriate modifications within the scope that can be adapted to the gist of the above and below. Included in scope.
 実施例1
 有機ケイ素化合物(A)として上記式(a3)を好ましい範囲も含めて満たす化合物(a1)と、フッ素系溶剤(D1)としてのNovec(登録商標)7200を混合し、室温で所定の時間撹拌して混合液(a)を得た。また、有機ケイ素化合物(C)としてKBM603(N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、信越化学工業株式会社製)と、非フッ素系溶剤(D2)としてイソプロピルアルコールを混合し、室温で所定の時間振とうして混合液(c)を得た。更に、前記混合液(a)と混合液(c)を混合し、ボルテックスミキサーを用いて混合し、皮膜形成用溶液を得た。有機ケイ素化合物(A)、フッ素系溶剤(D1)、有機ケイ素化合物(C)、非フッ素系溶剤(D2)の混合比は、表1に記載の通りである。なお、上記化合物(a1)は、上記化合物(a11)及び(a21)の要件も満たす化合物である。
Example 1
A compound (a1) satisfying the above formula (a3) including the preferred range as the organosilicon compound (A) and Novec (registered trademark) 7200 as the fluorinated solvent (D1) are mixed and stirred at room temperature for a predetermined time. to obtain a mixture (a). Further, KBM603 (N-2-(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) as the organosilicon compound (C) and isopropyl alcohol as the non-fluorine solvent (D2) were mixed. , and shaken for a predetermined time at room temperature to obtain a mixture (c). Further, the mixed solution (a) and the mixed solution (c) were mixed and mixed using a vortex mixer to obtain a film-forming solution. Table 1 shows the mixing ratio of the organosilicon compound (A), the fluorine-based solvent (D1), the organosilicon compound (C), and the non-fluorine-based solvent (D2). The compound (a1) is a compound that also satisfies the requirements of the compounds (a11) and (a21).
 次に、基材(s)として、厚さ0.7mmのガラスを用い、該基材(s)の上に真空蒸着法により、SiO2及びSiO2以外の金属酸化物を交互に積層して前記基材(s)と反対側の面がSiO2である層(X)(反射防止層)を積層した。大気圧プラズマ装置(富士機械製造株式会社製)を用いて層(X)における皮膜形成面を活性化処理した。 Next, a glass having a thickness of 0.7 mm was used as the substrate (s), and SiO 2 and metal oxides other than SiO 2 were alternately laminated on the substrate (s) by a vacuum deposition method. A layer (X) (antireflection layer) having SiO 2 on the side opposite to the substrate (s) was laminated. The surface of the layer (X) on which the film was formed was activated using an atmospheric pressure plasma device (manufactured by Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.).
 更に、前記皮膜形成用溶液を蒸着用のMoボートに1mL滴下した後、溶媒を蒸発させて蒸着に用いるサンプルを調製した。アルバック機工株式会社製VPC-410Aを用いて、真空蒸着法(抵抗加熱法、圧力1×10-3Pa、印加電流50A、蒸着処理時間90秒)により、前述のサンプルを活性化処理した層(X)に成膜し、基材(s)、層(X)、膜(r)の順で積層した積層体を得た。膜形成後、温度40℃、相対湿度90%で60分間加熱保持した。その後、膜表面を乾いた布で拭いた。 Furthermore, after dropping 1 mL of the film-forming solution into a Mo boat for vapor deposition, the solvent was evaporated to prepare a sample to be used for vapor deposition. Using VPC-410A manufactured by ULVAC KIKO Co., Ltd., a layer obtained by activating the above sample by a vacuum deposition method (resistance heating method, pressure 1 × 10 -3 Pa, applied current 50 A, deposition processing time 90 seconds) ( X) to obtain a laminate in which the substrate (s), the layer (X), and the film (r) are laminated in this order. After film formation, the film was heated and held at a temperature of 40° C. and a relative humidity of 90% for 60 minutes. After that, the membrane surface was wiped with a dry cloth.
 実施例2
 前記化合物(a1)とフッ素系溶剤(D1)としてのNovec7200に代えて、オプツール(登録商標)DSX(ダイキン工業株式会社製)(有機ケイ素化合物(A)を20質量%と、溶媒としてパーフルオロヘキサンを80質量%含む)を用いたこと以外は実施例1と同様にして、基材(s)、層(X)、膜(r)の順で積層した積層体を得た。
Example 2
In place of the compound (a1) and Novec7200 as the fluorine-based solvent (D1), Optool (registered trademark) DSX (manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd.) (20% by mass of the organosilicon compound (A) and perfluorohexane as the solvent 80% by mass) was used in the same manner as in Example 1 to obtain a laminate in which the substrate (s), the layer (X), and the film (r) were laminated in this order.
 実施例3
 化合物(a1)、KBM603、Novec7200及びイソプロピルアルコールの混合比を表1に示す通りに変更した以外は実施例1と同様にして、基材(s)、層(X)、膜(r)の順で積層した積層体を得た。
Example 3
In the same manner as in Example 1, except that the mixing ratio of compound (a1), KBM603, Novec7200, and isopropyl alcohol was changed as shown in Table 1, the substrate (s), layer (X), and film (r) were prepared in this order. A laminated body was obtained.
 比較例1
 皮膜形成用溶液として、上記化合物(a1)を20質量%と、Novec(登録商標)7200を80質量%混合し、室温で所定の時間撹拌したものを用いたこと以外は実施例1と同様にして、基材(s)、層(X)、膜(r)の順で積層した積層体を得た。
Comparative example 1
As the film-forming solution, 20% by mass of the compound (a1) and 80% by mass of Novec (registered trademark) 7200 were mixed, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for a predetermined time. Thus, a laminate was obtained in which the substrate (s), the layer (X), and the film (r) were laminated in this order.
 比較例2
 皮膜形成用溶液として、オプツール(登録商標)DSX(ダイキン工業株式会社製)を、室温で所定の時間撹拌したものを用いたこと以外は実施例1と同様にして、基材(s)、層(X)、膜(r)の順で積層した積層体を得た。
Comparative example 2
The substrate (s), the layer A laminate was obtained in which (X) and film (r) were laminated in this order.
 比較例3
 化合物(a1)、KBM603、Novec7200及びイソプロピルアルコールの混合比を表1に示す通りに変更した以外は実施例1と同様にして、基材(s)、層(X)、膜(r)の順で積層した積層体を得た。
Comparative example 3
In the same manner as in Example 1, except that the mixing ratio of compound (a1), KBM603, Novec7200, and isopropyl alcohol was changed as shown in Table 1, the substrate (s), layer (X), and film (r) were prepared in this order. A laminated body was obtained.
 実施例及び比較例で得た積層体を以下の要領で評価した。 The laminates obtained in Examples and Comparative Examples were evaluated in the following manner.
 (1)初期接触角
 得られた積層体の膜(r)側表面に、1μLの水滴を滴下し、接触角測定装置(協和界面科学社製、DM700)を用い、液滴法(解析方法:θ/2法)にて、水の接触角を測定した。
(1) Initial contact angle A water droplet of 1 μL is dropped on the film (r) side surface of the obtained laminate, and a contact angle measurement device (manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd., DM700) is used to measure the droplet method (analysis method: θ/2 method) was used to measure the contact angle of water.
 (2)初期滑落角
 協和界面科学社製DM700を使用し、滑落法(解析方法:接線法、水滴量:20.0μL、傾斜方法:連続傾斜、滑落検出:滑落後、移動判定:前進角、滑落判定距離:5dot)により、積層体の膜(r)側表面の滑落角を測定した。本実施例において、1dotは0.01mmである。
(2) Initial sliding angle Using DM700 manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd., sliding method (analysis method: tangent method, water droplet amount: 20.0 μL, tilt method: continuous tilt, sliding detection: after sliding, movement determination: forward angle, The slide angle of the film (r) side surface of the laminate was measured by the slide determination distance: 5 dots). In this embodiment, 1 dot is 0.01 mm.
 (3)XPSによるN量測定
 日本電子社製、JFS-9010型を用い、励起X線:MgKα、X線出力は110Wとし、光電子脱出角度は45°、パスエネルギー50eVにて、炭素(C1s):260~300eV、窒素(N1s:390~410eV)、酸素(O1s):525~545eV、フッ素(F1s):680~698eV、ケイ素(2p):92~112eVの各種元素について、測定した。撥水層(r)表面のN含有量については、炭素、窒素、酸素、フッ素、ケイ素の合計量に対するN(窒素)量の原子比を求めた。
(3) N amount measurement by XPS Using JFS-9010 type manufactured by JEOL Ltd., excitation X-ray: MgKα, X-ray output of 110 W, photoelectron escape angle of 45 °, pass energy of 50 eV, carbon (C1s) : 260 to 300 eV, nitrogen (N1s: 390 to 410 eV), oxygen (O1s): 525 to 545 eV, fluorine (F1s): 680 to 698 eV, silicon (2p): 92 to 112 eV. Regarding the N content on the surface of the water-repellent layer (r), the atomic ratio of the N (nitrogen) amount to the total amount of carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, fluorine and silicon was determined.
 (4)膜厚測定
 Thermo Fisher Scientific社製VG Theta Probe解析用ソフトにて、前記(3)のXPS測定で得られた各元素のスペクトルを元に、膜厚計算およびシミュレーション計算によるデプスプロファイル構築を行った。
 具体的には、角度分解レンズモードにて、検出角81.13°から24.88°まで測定を行い、情報深さ6~7nmとして、検出角ごとに表面からの深さを算出した。基材由来の信号のピーク面積比から算出された値を、検出角ごとにプロットして得られる、直線の傾きから、膜厚を算出した。
(4) Film thickness measurement Using VG Theta Probe analysis software manufactured by Thermo Fisher Scientific, based on the spectrum of each element obtained in the XPS measurement in (3) above, a depth profile is constructed by film thickness calculation and simulation calculation. gone.
Specifically, in the angle-resolved lens mode, measurements were made from detection angles of 81.13° to 24.88°, and the information depth was set to 6 to 7 nm, and the depth from the surface was calculated for each detection angle. The film thickness was calculated from the slope of the straight line obtained by plotting the values calculated from the peak area ratio of the signal derived from the base material for each detection angle.
 (5)耐摩耗試験
 積層体の膜(r)表面に、16枚重ねした日本製紙クレシア社製キムワイプワイパーS-200を、15mm角の弾性体(Maped社(フランス)製プラスチック消しゴム型番1156SMTR00)に取り付け、200gの荷重を掛け、30mmストローク、70r/分(1分間に90往復)で20000回擦り耐摩耗試験を行った。耐摩耗試験後、上記(1)及び(2)と同じ要領にて、接触角及び滑落角を測定した。
(5) Abrasion resistance test On the surface of the film (r) of the laminate, 16 sheets of Kimwipe wiper S-200 manufactured by Nippon Paper Crecia Co., Ltd. are applied to a 15 mm square elastic body (Maped (France) plastic eraser model number 1156SMTR00). After mounting, a load of 200 g was applied, and an abrasion resistance test was performed by rubbing 20,000 times at a stroke of 30 mm and 70 r/min (90 reciprocations per minute). After the wear resistance test, the contact angle and sliding angle were measured in the same manner as in (1) and (2) above.
 結果を表1に示す。なお、イソプロピルアルコールのハンセン溶解度パラメータにおけるdD、dP及びdHは、データベースに登録された値でdD=15.8(J/cm0.5、dP=6.1(J/cm0.5、dH=16.4(J/cm0.5であり、Novec7200のハンセン溶解度パラメータにおけるdD、dP及びdHは、データベースに登録された値でdD=13.1(J/cm0.5、dP=2.8(J/cm0.5、dH=2.1(J/cm0.5である。パーフルオロヘキサンのハンセン溶解度パラメータにおけるdD、dP及びdHは、データベースに登録された値でdD=12.1(J/cm0.5、dP=0(J/cm0.5、dH=0(J/cm0.5であり、KBM603のハンセン溶解度パラメータにおけるdD、dP及びdHは、溶解度球法により測定及び算出された値でdD=16.6(J/cm0.5、dP=7.2(J/cm0.5、dH=12.45(J/cm0.5である。 Table 1 shows the results. Note that dD, dP and dH in the Hansen solubility parameters of isopropyl alcohol are values registered in the database, dD = 15.8 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 , dP = 6.1 (J/cm 3 ) 0 .5 , dH = 16.4 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 , and dD, dP and dH in the Hansen solubility parameters of Novec 7200 are the values registered in the database and dD = 13.1 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 , dP=2.8 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 , dH=2.1 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 . dD, dP and dH in the Hansen solubility parameters of perfluorohexane are the values registered in the database, dD = 12.1 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 , dP = 0 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 , dH = 0 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 , and dD, dP, and dH in the Hansen solubility parameter of KBM603 are values measured and calculated by the solubility sphere method, and dD = 16.6 (J/cm 3 ). 0.5 , dP=7.2 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 , dH=12.45 (J/cm 3 ) 0.5 .
 溶解度球法によるハンセン溶解度パラメータの測定は、透明の容器に下記に示した溶解度パラメータが既知の溶媒(出典:ポリマーハンドブック第4版)1mLと対象となる化合物1mLを投入し混合液を調製した。得られた混合物を振とうし、液の外観を目視にて観察し、得られた観察結果から下記の評価基準に基づいて対象の化合物の溶剤への溶解性を評価した。なお、評価基準が1又は2の場合は溶媒が測定試料を溶解したと判断し、評価基準が0の場合は溶媒が測定試料を溶解しなかったと判断した。なお、後記する溶媒名の後に括弧書きで示される数字は、KBM603の各溶媒に対する溶解性の評価結果である。
(評価基準)2:混合液の外観は半透明である。
1:混合液の外観は無色透明である。
0:混合液の外観は白濁している。
(溶媒)ヘキサン(1)、HFC-365mfc(1)、1-エトキシ-1,1,2,2,3,3,4,4,4-ノナフルオロブタン(0)、HFE7000(1)、ヘキサデカン(0)、p-キシレン(2)、酢酸イソアミル(1)、2-プロパノール(1)、ジアセトンアルコール(1)、ジエチレングリコール(2)、プロピレンカーボネート(1)、エチレングリコール(2)、ジメチルスルホキシド(2)、エタノール(1)
In the measurement of the Hansen solubility parameter by the solubility sphere method, 1 mL of a solvent (source: Polymer Handbook 4th edition) with a known solubility parameter shown below and 1 mL of the target compound were added to a transparent container to prepare a mixed solution. The obtained mixture was shaken, the appearance of the liquid was visually observed, and the solubility of the target compound in the solvent was evaluated based on the following evaluation criteria based on the obtained observation results. When the evaluation criterion was 1 or 2, it was determined that the solvent dissolved the measurement sample, and when the evaluation criterion was 0, it was determined that the solvent did not dissolve the measurement sample. The numbers shown in parentheses after the names of the solvents described below are the evaluation results of the solubility of KBM603 in each solvent.
(Evaluation Criteria) 2: Appearance of mixed liquid is translucent.
1: Appearance of mixed liquid is colorless and transparent.
0: The appearance of the mixed liquid is cloudy.
(Solvent) Hexane (1), HFC-365mfc (1), 1-ethoxy-1,1,2,2,3,3,4,4,4-nonafluorobutane (0), HFE7000 (1), hexadecane (0), p-xylene (2), isoamyl acetate (1), 2-propanol (1), diacetone alcohol (1), diethylene glycol (2), propylene carbonate (1), ethylene glycol (2), dimethyl sulfoxide (2), ethanol (1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
 本発明における混合組成物によれば、蒸着によって一工程(一液)で基材(s)と撥水層(r)を含む積層体を形成することができ、撥水層(r)表面の窒素含有量が0.30原子%以上、10原子%以下であることが分かった。また該積層体は、撥水層(r)表面の耐摩耗性に優れていることが分かった。 According to the mixed composition of the present invention, a laminate including the substrate (s) and the water-repellent layer (r) can be formed in one step (one-liquid) by vapor deposition. It was found that the nitrogen content was 0.30 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less. It was also found that the laminate has excellent abrasion resistance on the surface of the water-repellent layer (r).
 本発明の積層体は、タッチパネルディスプレイ等の表示装置、光学素子、半導体素子、建築材料、ナノインプリント技術、太陽電池、自動車や建物の窓ガラス、調理器具などの金属製品、食器などのセラミック製品、プラスチック製の自動車部品等に好適に成膜することができ、産業上有用である。また、台所、風呂場、洗面台、鏡、トイレ周りの各部材の物品などにも好ましく用いられる。 The laminate of the present invention can be used for display devices such as touch panel displays, optical elements, semiconductor elements, building materials, nanoimprint technology, solar cells, window glass for automobiles and buildings, metal products such as cookware, ceramic products such as tableware, and plastics. It is industrially useful because it can be suitably formed into a film on automotive parts and the like. It is also preferably used for items such as kitchens, bathrooms, washbasins, mirrors, and members around toilets.

Claims (7)

  1.  基材(s)と、撥水層(r)とを含む積層体であって、
     前記撥水層(r)表面の窒素含有量が0.30原子%以上、10原子%以下である積層体。
    A laminate comprising a substrate (s) and a water-repellent layer (r),
    A laminate in which the water-repellent layer (r) has a nitrogen content of 0.30 atomic % or more and 10 atomic % or less.
  2.  前記撥水層(r)表面を、1.5cm×1.5cmの面積当たり200gの荷重を掛けて20,000回擦った後の、(i)水接触角が105°以上であること、及び(ii)水滑落角が45°未満であること、の少なくともいずれかの要件を満たす請求項1に記載の積層体。 After rubbing the surface of the water-repellent layer (r) 20,000 times with a load of 200 g per area of 1.5 cm × 1.5 cm, (i) the water contact angle is 105 ° or more, and 2. The laminate according to claim 1, which satisfies at least one of (ii) a water sliding angle of less than 45[deg.].
  3.  前記撥水層(r)は、
     下記式(a1)で表されるフルオロポリエーテル構造を有する有機ケイ素化合物(A)と、
     下記式(c1)~(c3)のいずれかで表されるアミノ基又はアミン骨格を有する有機ケイ素化合物(C)の混合組成物の硬化物である請求項1または2に記載の積層体。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     上記式(a1)中、
     Rfa26、Rfa27、Rfa28、及びRfa29は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のフッ化アルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfa26が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa26がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfa27が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa27がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfa28が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa28がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfa29が複数存在する場合は複数のRfa29がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     R25及びR26は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又は1個以上の水素原子がハロゲン原子に置換された炭素数1~4のハロゲン化アルキル基であり、一つの炭素原子に結合するR25及びR26の少なくとも一方は水素原子であり、R25が複数存在する場合は複数のR25がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R26が複数存在する場合は複数のR26がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     R27及びR28は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又は単結合であり、R27が複数存在する場合は複数のR27がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R28が複数存在する場合は複数のR28がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     R29及びR30は、それぞれ独立して、炭素数1~20のアルキル基であり、R29が複数存在する場合は複数のR29がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、R30が複数存在する場合は複数のR30がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     Mは、-O-、-C(=O)-O-、-O-C(=O)-、-NR-、-NRC(=O)-、-C(=O)NR-、-CH=CH-、又は-C-(フェニレン基)であり、前記Rは水素原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基又は炭素数1~4の含フッ素アルキル基であり、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     Mは、水素原子、フッ素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基であり、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     M10は、水素原子、又はハロゲン原子であり、
     M及びMは、それぞれ独立して、加水分解性基、ヒドロキシ基、又は-(CHe7-Si(OR14であり、e7は1~5であり、R14はメチル基又はエチル基であり、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Mが複数存在する場合は複数のMがそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     f21、f22、f23、f24、及びf25はそれぞれ独立して0~600の整数であり、f21、f22、f23、f24、及びf25の合計値は13以上であり、
     f26は、0~20の整数であり、
     f27は、それぞれ独立して、0~2の整数であり、
     g21は1~3の整数、g22は0~2の整数、g21+g22≦3であり、
     g31は1~3の整数、g32は0~2の整数、g31+g32≦3であり、
     M10-、-Si(Mg31(H)g32(R303-g31-g32、f21個の-{C(R25)(R26)}-単位(Ua1)、f22個の-{C(Rfa26)(Rfa27)}-単位(Ua2)、f23個の-{Si(R27)(R28)}-単位(Ua3)、f24個の-{Si(Rfa28)(Rfa29)}-単位(Ua4)、f25個の-M-単位(Ua5)、及びf26個の-[C(M){(CHf27-Si(Mg21(H)g22(R293-g21-g22}]-単位(Ua6)は、M10-が式(a1)における一方の末端であり、-Si(Mg31(H)g32(R303-g31-g32が他方の末端であり、少なくとも一部でフルオロポリエーテル構造を形成する順で並び、-O-が-O-と連続しない限り、それぞれの単位が任意の順で並んで結合する。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
     上記式(c1)中、
     Rx11、Rx12、Rx13、Rx14は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であり、Rx11が複数存在する場合は複数のRx11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx12が複数存在する場合は複数のRx12がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx13が複数存在する場合は複数のRx13がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx14が複数存在する場合は複数のRx14がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     Rfx11、Rfx12、Rfx13、Rfx14は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfx11が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx12が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx12がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx13が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx13がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx14が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx14がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     Rx15は、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であり、Rx15が複数存在する場合は複数のRx15がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     X11は、加水分解性基であり、X11が複数存在する場合は複数のX11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     Y11は、-NH-、又は-S-であり、Y11が複数存在する場合は複数のY11がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     Z11は、ビニル基、α-メチルビニル基、スチリル基、メタクリロイル基、アクリロイル基、アミノ基、イソシアネート基、イソシアヌレート基、エポキシ基、ウレイド基、又はメルカプト基であり、
     p1は、1~20の整数であり、p2、p3、p4は、それぞれ独立して、0~10の整数であり、p5は、0~10の整数であり、
     p6は、1~3の整数であり、
     Z11がアミノ基でない場合は-NH-であるY11を少なくとも1つ有し、Y11が全て-S-である場合又はp5が0である場合はZ11がアミノ基であり、
     Z11-、-Si(X11p6(Rx153-p6、p1個の-{C(Rx11)(Rx12)}-単位(Uc11)、p2個の-{C(Rfx11)(Rfx12)}-単位(Uc12)、p3個の-{Si(Rx13)(Rx14)}-単位(Uc13)、p4個の-{Si(Rfx13)(Rfx14)}-単位(Uc14)、p5個の-Y11-単位(Uc15)は、Z11-が式(c1)で表される化合物の一方の末端となり、-Si(X11p6(Rx153-p6が他方の末端となり、-O-が-O-と連結しない限り、それぞれの単位が任意の順で並んで結合する。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     上記式(c2)中、
     Rx20及びRx21は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であり、Rx20が複数存在する場合は複数のRx20がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx21が複数存在する場合は複数のRx21がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     Rfx20及びRfx21は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfx20が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx20がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx21が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx21がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     Rx22及びRx23はそれぞれ独立して、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であり、Rx22及びRx23が複数存在する場合は複数のRx22及びRx23がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     X20及びX21はそれぞれ独立して、加水分解性基であり、X20及びX21が複数存在する場合は複数のX20及びX21がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     p20は、1~30の整数であり、p21は、0~30の整数であり、p20又はp21を付して括弧でくくられた繰り返し単位の少なくとも1つは、アミン骨格-NR100-に置き換わっており、前記アミン骨格におけるR100は水素原子又はアルキル基であり、
     p22及びp23はそれぞれ独立して、1~3の整数であり、
     p20個の-{C(Rx20)(Rx21)}-単位(Uc20)、p21個の-{C(Rfx20)(Rfx21)}-単位(Uc21)は、p20個の単位(Uc20)又はp21個の単位(Uc21)が連続である必要はなく、それぞれの単位(Uc21)及び単位(Uc20)が任意の順で並んで結合し、式(c2)で表される化合物の一方の末端が-Si(X20p22(Rx223-p22となり、他方の末端が-Si(X21p23(Rx233-p23となる。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     上記式(c3)中、
     Z31、Z32は、それぞれ独立に、加水分解性基及びヒドロキシ基以外の、反応性官能基である。反応性官能基としては、ビニル基、α-メチルビニル基、スチリル基、メタクリロイル基、アクリロイル基、アミノ基、エポキシ基、ウレイド基、又はメルカプト基であり、
     Rx31、Rx32、Rx33、Rx34は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であり、Rx31が複数存在する場合は複数のRx31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx32が複数存在する場合は複数のRx32がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx33が複数存在する場合は複数のRx33がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rx34が複数存在する場合は複数のRx34がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     Rfx31、Rfx32、Rfx33、Rfx34は、それぞれ独立して、1個以上の水素原子がフッ素原子に置換された炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素原子であり、Rfx31が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx32が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx32がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx33が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx33がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、Rfx34が複数存在する場合は複数のRfx34がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     Y31は、-NH-、-N(CH)-又は-O-であり、Y31が複数存在する場合は複数のY31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     X31、X32、X33、X34は、それぞれ独立に、-OR(Rは、水素原子、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又はアミノC1-3アルキルジC1-3アルコキシシリル基である)であり、X31が複数存在する場合は複数のX31がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、X32が複数存在する場合は複数のX32がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、X33が複数存在する場合は複数のX33がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、X34が複数存在する場合は複数のX34がそれぞれ異なっていてもよく、
     p31は、0~20の整数であり、p32、p33、p34は、それぞれ独立して、0~10の整数であり、p35は、0~5の整数であり、p36は、1~10の整数であり、p37は0又は1であり、
     Z31及びZ32の少なくとも一方がアミノ基であるか、又はY31の少なくとも一つが-NH-又は-N(CH)-であるという条件を満たし、かつ式(c3)で表される化合物の一方の末端がZ31-であり、他方の末端がZ32-であり、-O-が-O-と連結しない限り、p31個の-{C(Rx31)(Rx32)}-単位(Uc31)、p32個の-{C(Rfx31)(Rfx32)}-単位(Uc32)、p33個の-{Si(Rx33)(Rx34)}-単位(Uc33)、p34個の-{Si(Rfx33)(Rfx34)}-単位(Uc34)、p35個の-Y31-単位(Uc35)、p36個の-{Si(X31)(X32)-O}-単位(Uc36)、p37個の-{Si(X33)(X34)}-単位(Uc37)が、それぞれ任意の順で並んで結合する。
    The water-repellent layer (r) is
    an organosilicon compound (A) having a fluoropolyether structure represented by the following formula (a1);
    3. The laminate according to claim 1, which is a cured product of a mixed composition of an organosilicon compound (C) having an amino group or amine skeleton represented by any one of the following formulas (c1) to (c3).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    In the above formula (a1),
    Rf a26 , Rf a27 , Rf a28 , and Rf a29 are each independently a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom ; When a plurality of Rf a26 are present, a plurality of Rf a26 may be different, when a plurality of Rf a27 are present, a plurality of Rf a27 may be different, and when a plurality of Rf a28 are present, a plurality of Rf a28 may be different from each other, and when a plurality of Rf a29 are present, the plurality of Rf a29 may be different,
    R 25 and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a halogenated alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with halogen atoms group, at least one of R 25 and R 26 bonded to one carbon atom is a hydrogen atom ; When doing, multiple R 26 may be different,
    R 27 and R 28 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a single bond ; When a plurality of R 28 are present, the plurality of R 28 may be different,
    R 29 and R 30 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R 29 are present, the plurality of R 29 may be different, and when a plurality of R 30 are present may have different R 30s ,
    M 7 is -O-, -C(=O)-O-, -OC(=O)-, -NR-, -NRC(=O)-, -C(=O)NR-, - CH═CH— or —C 6 H 4 — (phenylene group), R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and M 7 is When a plurality of M7 are present, the plurality of M7 may be different,
    M 5 is a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when multiple M 5 are present, the multiple M 5 may be different,
    M 10 is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom,
    M 8 and M 9 are each independently a hydrolyzable group, a hydroxy group, or —(CH 2 ) e7 —Si(OR 14 ) 3 , e7 is 1 to 5, and R 14 is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and when there are a plurality of M 8 , the plurality of M 8 may be different, and when there is a plurality of M 9 , the plurality of M 9 may be different,
    f21, f22, f23, f24, and f25 are each independently an integer of 0 to 600, and the total value of f21, f22, f23, f24, and f25 is 13 or more,
    f26 is an integer from 0 to 20,
    f27 is each independently an integer of 0 to 2,
    g21 is an integer of 1 to 3, g22 is an integer of 0 to 2, g21 + g22 ≤ 3,
    g31 is an integer of 1 to 3, g32 is an integer of 0 to 2, g31 + g32 ≤ 3,
    M 10 -, -Si (M 9 ) g31 (H) g32 (R 30 ) 3-g31-g32 , f21 -{C(R 25 )(R 26 )}-units (U a1 ), f22 -{C(Rf a26 )(Rf a27 )}-unit (U a2 ), f23 -{Si(R 27 )(R 28 )}-unit (U a3 ), f24-{Si(Rf a28 )(Rf a29 )}-units (U a4 ), f25 -M 7 -units (U a5 ), and f26 -[C(M 5 ){(CH 2 ) f27 -Si(M 8 ) g21 (H) g22 (R 29 ) 3-g21-g22 }]-unit (U a6 ) has M 10 - at one end in formula (a1), and -Si(M 9 ) g31 (H) g32 ( R 30 ) 3-g31-g32 are the other ends, and are arranged in an order that forms a fluoropolyether structure at least in part, and each unit can be in any order as long as —O— is not continuous with —O— Join side by side.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    In the above formula (c1),
    R x11 , R x12 , R x13 , and R x14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when multiple R x11 are present, the multiple R x11 are different. may be different when there are a plurality of R x12 , and when there are a plurality of R x13 , a plurality of R x13 may be different, and when there are a plurality of R x14 may be different from each other in a plurality of R x14 ,
    Rf x11 , Rf x12 , Rf x13 , and Rf x14 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf x11 are present When there is a plurality of Rf x11 may be different, when there are a plurality of Rf x12 , a plurality of Rf x12 may be different, and when there are a plurality of Rf x13 , a plurality of Rf x13 may be different may be different, and if there are multiple Rf x14 , the multiple Rf x14 may be different,
    R x15 is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R x15 are present, the plurality of R x15 may be different,
    X 11 is a hydrolyzable group, and when a plurality of X 11 are present, the plurality of X 11 may be different,
    Y 11 is -NH- or -S-, and when a plurality of Y 11 are present, the plurality of Y 11 may be different,
    Z 11 is a vinyl group, α-methylvinyl group, styryl group, methacryloyl group, acryloyl group, amino group, isocyanate group, isocyanurate group, epoxy group, ureido group, or mercapto group;
    p1 is an integer of 1 to 20, p2, p3, and p4 are each independently an integer of 0 to 10, p5 is an integer of 0 to 10,
    p6 is an integer from 1 to 3,
    having at least one Y 11 which is —NH— if Z 11 is not an amino group, and Z 11 is an amino group if all Y 11 are —S— or p5 is 0;
    Z 11 -, -Si(X 11 ) p6 (R x15 ) 3-p6 , p1 -{C(R x11 )(R x12 )}-units (U c11 ), p2 -{C(Rf x11 ) (Rf x12 )}-unit (U c12 ), p3-{Si(R x13 )(R x14 )}-unit (U c13 ), p4-{Si(Rf x13 )(Rf x14 )} - unit (U c14 ), p5 -Y 11 - units (U c15 ), Z 11 - becomes one end of the compound represented by formula (c1), and -Si(X 11 ) p6 (R x15 ) Unless 3-p6 is the other end and —O— is not linked to —O—, each unit is linked in any order.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    In the above formula (c2),
    R x20 and R x21 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms ; When a plurality of R x21 are present, the plurality of R x21 may be different,
    Rf x20 and Rf x21 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and when there are multiple Rf x20 , multiple Rf x20 may be different, and when there are a plurality of Rf x21 , a plurality of Rf x21 may be different,
    R x22 and R x23 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and when there are a plurality of R x22 and R x23 , a plurality of R x22 and R x23 may be different,
    X 20 and X 21 are each independently a hydrolyzable group, and when multiple X 20 and X 21 are present, multiple X 20 and X 21 may be different,
    p20 is an integer of 1 to 30, p21 is an integer of 0 to 30, and at least one of the repeating units bracketed with p20 or p21 is replaced with an amine skeleton —NR 100 —. and R 100 in the amine skeleton is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group,
    p22 and p23 are each independently an integer of 1 to 3,
    p20-{C( Rx20 )( Rx21 )}-units ( Uc20 ), p21-{C( Rfx20 )( Rfx21 )}-units ( Uc21 ) are p20 units ( U c20 ) or p21 units (U c21 ) need not be contiguous, and each unit (U c21 ) and unit (U c20 ) can be arranged in any order and combined to form the formula (c2). One end of the compound is -Si(X 20 ) p22 (R x22 ) 3-p22 , and the other end is -Si(X 21 ) p23 (R x23 ) 3-p23 .
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    In the above formula (c3),
    Z 31 and Z 32 are each independently a reactive functional group other than a hydrolyzable group and a hydroxy group. The reactive functional group is a vinyl group, α-methylvinyl group, styryl group, methacryloyl group, acryloyl group, amino group, epoxy group, ureido group, or mercapto group,
    R x31 , R x32 , R x33 and R x34 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and when there are multiple R x31 , the multiple R x31 may be different. may be different when there are a plurality of R x32 , and when there are a plurality of R x33, a plurality of R x33 may be different, and when there are a plurality of R x34 may be different from each other in a plurality of R x34 ,
    Rf x31 , Rf x32 , Rf x33 , and Rf x34 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms or a fluorine atom, and a plurality of Rf x31 are present When there are multiple Rf x31, the plurality of Rf x31 may be different, and when there are multiple Rf x32 , the plurality of Rf x32 may be different, and when there are multiple Rf x33 , the plurality of Rf x33 may be different. may be different, and if there are multiple Rf x34 , the multiple Rf x34 may be different,
    Y 31 is —NH—, —N(CH 3 )— or —O—, and when there are a plurality of Y 31 , the plurality of Y 31 may be different,
    X 31 , X 32 , X 33 and X 34 are each independently —OR c (R c is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or amino-C 1-3 alkyldi-C 1-3 alkoxysilyl is a group), and when a plurality of X 31 are present, the plurality of X 31 may be different, when a plurality of X 32 are present, the plurality of X 32 may be different, and X 33 is When a plurality of X 33 are present, the plurality of X 33 may be different, and when a plurality of X 34 are present, the plurality of X 34 may be different,
    p31 is an integer of 0 to 20, p32, p33, and p34 are each independently an integer of 0 to 10, p35 is an integer of 0 to 5, and p36 is an integer of 1 to 10 and p37 is 0 or 1,
    at least one of Z 31 and Z 32 is an amino group, or at least one of Y 31 is -NH- or -N(CH 3 )-, and a compound represented by formula (c3) p31 -{C(R x31 )(R x32 )}-units, unless one end of is Z 31 - and the other end is Z 32 -, and -O- is not linked to -O- (U c31 ), p32-{C(Rf x31 )(Rf x32 )}-units (U c32 ), p33-{Si(R x33 )(R x34 )}-units (U c33 ), p34 -{Si(Rf x33 )(Rf x34 )}-units (U c34 ), p35 -Y 31 -units (U c35 ), p36 -{Si(X 31 )(X 32 )-O }-unit (U c36 ) and p37 -{Si(X 33 )(X 34 )}-units (U c37 ) are arranged and bonded in any order.
  4.  請求項1~3のいずれかに記載の積層体を含むウインドウフィルムまたはタッチパネルディスプレイ。 A window film or touch panel display comprising the laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
  5.  基材(s)と、撥水層(r)を有する積層体の製造方法であって、
     フルオロポリエーテル構造を有する有機ケイ素化合物(A)、アミノ基又はアミン骨格を有する有機ケイ素化合物(C)、及び溶剤の混合組成物であって、該混合組成物100質量%に対する前記有機ケイ素化合物(A)の質量比が1質量%超であり、前記有機ケイ素化合物(C)の質量比が0.1質量%以上である混合組成物を加熱する工程、及び
     加熱後の前記混合組成物を、基材(s)に真空蒸着して撥水層(r)を形成する工程を含む積層体の製造方法。
    A method for producing a laminate having a substrate (s) and a water-repellent layer (r),
    A mixed composition of an organosilicon compound (A) having a fluoropolyether structure, an organosilicon compound (C) having an amino group or an amine skeleton, and a solvent, wherein the organosilicon compound ( a step of heating a mixed composition in which the mass ratio of A) is more than 1% by mass and the mass ratio of the organosilicon compound (C) is 0.1% by mass or more; A method for producing a laminate, comprising a step of forming a water-repellent layer (r) by vacuum deposition on a substrate (s).
  6.  更に、前記基材(s)上に、基材(s)及び撥水層(r)とは異なる層(X)を形成する工程を含み、
     加熱後の前記混合組成物を、基材(s)上に設けられた層(X)に真空蒸着して撥水層(r)を形成する請求項5に記載の製造方法。
    Furthermore, a step of forming a layer (X) different from the substrate (s) and the water-repellent layer (r) on the substrate (s),
    6. The manufacturing method according to claim 5, wherein the mixed composition after heating is vacuum-deposited on the layer (X) provided on the substrate (s) to form the water-repellent layer (r).
  7.  更に、前記基材(s)表面又は基材(s)上に設けられた層(X)表面に親水化処理する工程を含み、
     前記基材(s)の親水化処理面又は前記層(X)の親水化処理面に、加熱後の前記混合組成物を真空蒸着する請求項5または6に記載の製造方法。
    Furthermore, a step of hydrophilizing the surface of the substrate (s) or the surface of the layer (X) provided on the substrate (s),
    7. The manufacturing method according to claim 5 or 6, wherein the mixed composition after heating is vacuum-deposited onto the hydrophilized surface of the substrate (s) or the hydrophilized surface of the layer (X).
PCT/JP2022/002091 2021-02-05 2022-01-21 Layered body and method for producing same WO2022168627A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021017845 2021-02-05
JP2021-017845 2021-02-05

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022168627A1 true WO2022168627A1 (en) 2022-08-11

Family

ID=82741144

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2022/002091 WO2022168627A1 (en) 2021-02-05 2022-01-21 Layered body and method for producing same

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2022120794A (en)
TW (1) TW202239597A (en)
WO (1) WO2022168627A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016006584A1 (en) * 2014-07-07 2016-01-14 ダイキン工業株式会社 Composition including perfluoro(poly)ether-modified amide silane compound
WO2020066534A1 (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 ダイキン工業株式会社 Surface treatment agent
WO2020218342A1 (en) * 2019-04-26 2020-10-29 株式会社ニコン・エシロール Stacked body and production method therefor

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016006584A1 (en) * 2014-07-07 2016-01-14 ダイキン工業株式会社 Composition including perfluoro(poly)ether-modified amide silane compound
WO2020066534A1 (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 ダイキン工業株式会社 Surface treatment agent
WO2020218342A1 (en) * 2019-04-26 2020-10-29 株式会社ニコン・エシロール Stacked body and production method therefor

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202239597A (en) 2022-10-16
JP2022120794A (en) 2022-08-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021166736A1 (en) Multilayer body and flexible display device
WO2022168628A1 (en) Mixed composition and layered body
WO2022168627A1 (en) Layered body and method for producing same
WO2022168636A1 (en) Mixed composition and film formed from said mixed composition
WO2022168630A1 (en) Cured coating film and layered product
WO2022168631A1 (en) Mixed composition
WO2023171415A1 (en) Mixed composition and layered body
WO2022168629A1 (en) Mixed composition and laminate
WO2023157433A1 (en) Laminate, window film, and touch panel
WO2023157434A1 (en) Laminate, window film, and touch panel
WO2022168633A1 (en) Laminate
WO2024024188A1 (en) Mixed composition
WO2023171414A1 (en) Mixed composition and layered body
WO2022168660A1 (en) Laminate
JP2022120766A (en) laminate

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22749502

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22749502

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1